The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutDGSD Biomass Heating System Pre-Final Design 90% Specifications 4-5-2010 Delta/Greely School District The Delta/Greely School District is an Equai Op tt DGSD Biomass Heating System PRE-FINAL DESIGN 90% SPECIFICATIONS ASOFFMAN April 5, 2010 Prepared by: as 7 4 cI At HITEC OR DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 10 00 00 21 13 00 23 13 00 40 00 00 43 00 00 43 13 00 45 09 00 52 13 00 61 13 00 72 00 00 73 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS GROUP INVITATION FOR BIDS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (AIA DOCUMENT A701) SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID FORM BIDDERS CHECK LIST BID BOND (AIA DOCUMENT A310) BIDDERS AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION AND NON-DISBARMENT SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (AIA DOCUMENT A101) PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND (AIA DOCUMENT A312) GENERAL CONDITIONS (AIA DOCUMENT A201) SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS GROUP General Requirements Subgroup DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 01 25 00 01 26 00 01 29 00 01 3100 01 3200 01 3300 01 40 00 0150 00 01 60 00 017700 01 78 23 01 78 39 SUMMARY SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Substitution Request CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PAYMENT PROCEDURES PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QUALITY REQUIREMENTS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Facility Construction Subgroup DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 12 00 05 53 00 05 55 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL METAL GRATINGS METAL FABRICATION DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 1400 07 2113 07 25 00 07 26 00 07 92 00 09603 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING BOARD INSULATION WEATHER BARRIERS VAPOR RETARDER JOINT SEALANTS TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 1113 08 36 16 08 71 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTIONAL DOORS DOOR HARDWARE DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 22 16 09 91 23 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISON 10 — SPECIALTIES 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DIVISION 13 —- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 3419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 21 05 00 21 1300 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS AND METHODS FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 00 00 22 05 00 22 05 29 22 05 53 22 07 00 22 09 13 22 1116 221117 GENERAL PLUMBING WORK BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION PLUMBING INSULATION VALVES FOR PLUMING PIPING PIPE AND FITTINGS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 23 05 00 23 05 13 23 05 19 23 05 23 23 05 48 23 05 53 23 05 93 23 07 00 23 09 00 23 09 93 23 2113 23 21 23 23 3113 23 33 00 23 34 00 GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT METERS, GAUGES AND SPECIALITIES FOR HVAC PIPING GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT MECHANICAL INDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC HVAC INSULATION INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR HVAC CONTROLS HYDRONIC PIPING HYDRONIC PUMPS METAL DUCTS DUCT ACCESSORIES FANS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 26 05 19 26 05 26 26 05 29 09603 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 26 05 33. =RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 2416 PANELBOARDS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 09603 TABLE OF CONTENTS - 3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 00 10 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INVITATION FOR BIDS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Date: April 9, 2010 Name and Location of Project: DELTA HIGH SCHOOL BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM Delta Junction, Alaska Owner: Delta Greely School District P. O. Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 Bids: Sealed bids for furnishing all labor, materials and transportation and performing all work for construction of Delta High School Biomass Heating System will be received by the Delta Greely School District at the offices of Coffman Engineers, Inc., 800 F Street, Anchorage, Alaska 99501 until 4:00 P.M., local time, on XXXXX XX, 2010 at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud. Bids shall be submitted in sealed envelope and marked as required on Bid Form. Bids received after the time stated above will not be considered. Bid Bond is required with the submission of Bid. Bids may not be withdrawn within 60 days of receipt. Project consists of the construction of a new biomass central heating plant to serve the Delta Greely High School. The new biomass system will supplement the existing fuel oil fired boiler plant and will significantly reduce the reliance on fuel oil for heating of the school building. The new biomass boiler plant will be located to the north of the existing school building with buried utilities and heating piping extending between the school and new boiler plant. The new plant includes an Owner supplied wood chip fired boiler, chip storage bin and automated chip feeding mechanisms. The wood chips will be transported to the plant in chip hauling trailers that will be owned and provided by the school district. The interconnection of the new heat source piping to the existing heating plant will be such that the biomass system will be first in line to heat the cooler return heating water from the school. After the biomass heat has been added, the existing oil fired plant will, if necessary, bring the heating water up to the required final temperature to heat the school. During a significant portion of the heating season, the biomass system will provide all of the necessary heat and the oil fired plant will be idle. Base bid will include a pre-engineered steel biomass plant building to house the boiler, chip bin and chip handling system to automatically feed the boiler as well as all of the ancillary equipment necessary for a complete functioning system. The building will also include a heated two bay chip trailer storage area. Site work includes excavation, compacted fill, grading, drainage, and restoration of disturbed areas. Owner Furnished Equipment will include a furnace/boiler capable of 5.0 MMBTUH at a minimum 70% efficiency The total system shall consist of a chip bin unloading auger, chain conveyor, or walking floor; transport/sifting conveyor, transport conveyor to the metering bin, screw auger metering conveyors and over fire and under fire blowers to support adjustable burn rates and tuning of the system. The furnace and boiler shall include the above metering, a control panel, with integration to the DDC, as well as tube soot blower and compressor. Included shall be the flue duct work, multiclone separator, ID fan, and stack. Contractor shall coordinate the delivery, handling, storage, and provide installation support, including startup and training, of the Owner Furnished Equipment. 09603 00 1000-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 00 10 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INVITATION FOR BIDS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Pre-Bid Conference: A pre Bid conference will be held at 4:00 PM on XXXXX XX, 2010 at the offices of Coffman Engineers, Inc. 800 F Street, Anchorage, Alaska. Representatives of Bidders are encouraged to attend. Complete bidding documents for this project are available in electronic form. They may be viewed online and downloaded without charge and without deposit from www.aeplans.com and are available to your local plan rooms and reprographers. If software/website technical assistance is needed please call toll free 888-320-3032. Bidders must register through the website to be notified of addenda. Bid documents are not available from the Engineer or the Owner, but they may be obtained from most plan rooms and reprographic firms for a fee. Printed copies may be ordered from reprographic companies through the website or by contacting a reprographer directly. Downloaded files may be printed on the plan holder’s equipment. Plan holders are responsible for their own reproduction costs. Please go to www.aeplans.com to download Delta High School Biomass Heating System Project, for distribution to your members. No hard copies will be sent. Addenda to the project will be posted on the website. The bidder is responsible for periodically checking the site. The Contractor that is awarded the project will be responsible for printing all documents necessary for performing the work. Bonds: In addition to Bid Bond required with bid, Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bonds in the amount of 100% of contract amount will be required. Wage Rate Requirements: Current prevailing wage rates as defined in State of Alaska, Department of Labor, Laborers and Mechanics Minimum Rates of Pay (Title 36) are required for this project. Solicitation of bids, award of bid, bid protest of qualified bidders and award of contract will be conducted in accordance with 04 AAC 031.80. Bid protest may be filed within 10 days after notice if intent to award is issued. END OF SECTION 00 10 00 09603 00 10 00-2 4/5/10 Si IS ta ae LATA Document A701" - 1997 Instructions to Bidders for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) Delta High School Biomass Heating System Delta Junction, Alaska ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has THE OWNER: added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available (Name, legal status and address) Delta Greely School District P.O. Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 THE ARCHITECT: In all cases where "Architect" is referenced, for the purposes of this from the author and should be project, it shall refer to: reviewed. A vertical line in the left (Name, legal status and address) margin of this document indicates Coffman Engineers, Inc. where the author has added 800 F. Street necessary information and where Anchorage, AK 99501 the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. TABLE OF ARTICLES This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect 1 DEFINITIONS to its completion or modification. 2 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AIA Pocument A701™ — 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This \MIA° Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under t document was produced by AIA software at 15:11:20 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1230006578) ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS § 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. § 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. § 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. § 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. § 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. § 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. § 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. § 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. § 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS § 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: § 2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. § 2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. § 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder’s personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. § 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.1 COPIES § 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder’s deposit will be refunded. AIA Document A701™ — 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:11:20 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1230006578) § 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders. § 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. § 3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents. § 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. § 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. § 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. § 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS § 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. § 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. § 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. § 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. § 3.4 ADDENDA § 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. § 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. § 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. § 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. AIA Document A701™ - 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:11:20 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1230006578) ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES § 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS § 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents. § 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium. § 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount written in words shall govern. § 4.1.4 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. § 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. Ifno change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change." § 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder’s refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. § 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent’s authority to bind the Bidder. § 4.2 BID SECURITY § 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2. § 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents, and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. § 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn or (c) all Bids have been rejected. § 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS § 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder’s name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. § 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. § 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. § 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be considered. § 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID § 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. AIA Document A701™ — 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA° Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:11:20 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1230006578) § 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder. Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date- and time- stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. § 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. § 4.4.4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS § 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS At the discretion of the Owner, if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. § 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to rejection. § 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) § 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner’s judgment, is in the Owner’s own best interests. § 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION § 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request, a properly executed AIA Document A305, Contractor’s Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. § 6.2 OWNER’S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. § 6.3 SUBMITTALS § 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: 1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder’s own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers, products, and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; and .3. names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work. § 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. AIA Document A701™ — 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA° Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:11:20 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1230006578) § 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder’s option, (1) withdraw the Bid or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. § 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS § 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder’s usual sources. § 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. § 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder’s usual sources, changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. § 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS § 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1. § 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. § 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. § 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document A101, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum. AIA Document A701™ — 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:11:20 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1230006578) Additions and Deletions Report for ® ™ AIA Document A701 - 1997 This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text. Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AIA software at 15:11:20 on 04/05/2010. PAGE 1 Delta High School Biomass Heating System Delta Junction, Alaska (Name, legal status and address) Delta Greely School District P.O. Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 THE ARCHITECT: In all cases where "Architect" is referenced, for the purposes of this project, it shall refer to: (Name, legal status and address) Coffman Engineers, Inc. 800 F. Street Anchorage, AK 99501 Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A701™ — 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA° Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:11:20 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1230006578) Certification of Document’s Authenticity AIA® Document D401™ — 2003 I, Harold L. Hollis, P-E., hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 15:11:20 on 04/05/2010 under Order No. 3575118491_1 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA” Document A701™ — 1997 - Instructions to Bidders, as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report. (Signed) (Title) (Dated) AIA Document D401™ - 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, 1 may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:11:20 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1230006578) DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 00 23 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA The following add to, delete from, modify, or supplement AIA Document A701, Instructions To Bidders, and shall take precedence over AIA Document A 701. SIB 1 SIB 2 SIB 3 SIB 4 SIB 5 SIB 6 SIB 7 Reference Article 3.3 Substitutions DELETE 3.3.2, and replace with 3.3.2 No materials substitutions or approvals will be considered prior to contract award” Reference Article 4.1 Preparation of Bids DELETE 4.1.6 and replace with: “4.1.6 The bidder shall make no stipulation on the Bid Form nor qualify his bid in any other manner” Reference Article 4.2 Bid Security ADD “4.2.1.1. Bid security in the form of a Bid Bond or Certified Check, in the amount of 5% of the Base Bid and Payable to the Delta Greely School District, shall be submitted with Bid.” Reference Article 6.2 Delete this article in its entirety Reference Article 7.1 Bond Requirements 7.1.1 Delete last sentence ”Bonds may be secured through the Bidders usual sources.” 7.1.2 | DELETE and replace with: “7.1.2 Performance bond in the amount of 100% of contract amount shall be required.” 7.1.3 DELETE and replace with “7.1.3 Payment bond in the amount of 100% of contract amount shall be required.” Reference Article 7.2 Time of delivery of Bonds 7.2.1 DELETE and replace with: “7.2.1 The bidder shall deliver required bonds prior to the execution of the Contract.” Reference Article Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor. Add at end of Article 8 “Including any owner modifications to that document.” END OF SECTION 00 23 13 09603 00 23 13 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 00 40 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BID FORM DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FROM: Name of contractor (type or print) TO: DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT clo Coffman Engineers, Inc 800 F Street Anchorage, Alaska 99501 SUBJECT: DELTA HIGH SCHOOL BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM BASE BID Having examined the Contract Documents for Delta High School Biomass Heating System, prepared by Coffman Engineers, Inc. dated XXXXX XX, 2010, and having become familiar with the documents and the conditions which may effect the execution of the work, and having received and examined the following addenda: Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, material, equipment and services required and reasonably incidental to the construction Delta High School Biomass Heating System, in accordance with the above documents for the Lump Sum of: Dollars ($ ) (Written) (Figures) hereby designated as the BASE BID. Furthermore, the undersigned agrees that, upon written acceptance of this bid, mailed or otherwise furnished within 60 calendar days after the date established for the opening of bids, will within 5 days (unless longer period is granted by the owner) after receipt of the prescribed forms, execute Construction Contract, and give Performance and Payment Bonds on standard forms with good and sufficient surety. Owner will issue Notice to Proceed immediately following execution of the Contract by both parties. The undersigned further agrees that if awarded the Contract to commence work in accordance with the established schedule BID BOND Bid Security as required by the Invitation to Bid in the sum of: Dollars ($. ) (Written) (Figures) being 5% of the Base Bid is enclosed herein. 09603 00 40 00-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 00 40 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BID FORM DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA The undersigned represents that he operates as: (check appropriate spaces) Individual Partnership Corporation, Incorporated in State of Name of Firm or Individual Business Address By. Typed or printed name of individual Signature in Ink Title If Partnership, list names of all Partners Alaska Business License Number Alaska Contractors Certificate of Registration Number CORPORATE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT UNITED STATES OF AMERICA ) ) STATE OF ALASKA ) The forgoing Bid Form was acknowledged before me this day of 2010 by known to me to be the Name of Officer Title of officer Of (Name of Corporation) a Corporation on behalf of said Corporation. (State of Incorporation) (Notary Public) My Commission Expires: DIRECTIONS FOR SUBMITTING BIDS Envelopes containing bids, guarantee, etc. must be sealed, marked and addressed as follows: MARK: ADDRESS: BIDDING DOCUMENTS DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DELTA HIGH SCHOOL BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM c/o Coffman Engineers, Inc DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT 800 F Street Anchorage, AK 99501 END OF SECTION 00 40 00 09603 00 40 00-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 00 43 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BIDDER'S CHECK LIST DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA CAUTION: Your bid will be rejected if not property executed. Check that the following items have been accomplished to help assure a responsive bid: 1. Bid Form: The Bid Form has been dated. Alaska Contractor's Certificate of Registration Number is shown. Information regarding Alaska Business License is shown. Addenda are acknowledged. The Bid Form has been executed and signed. @aoo® Bid Bond: An executed Bid Security (Bid Bond - AIA Document A310) or certified check payable to Delta Greely School District in the amount of 5% of the base bid amount. Corporate Acknowledgement (if applicable): The corporate acknowledgement has been executed and signed. Bidders Affidavit of Non-Collusion and Non-Debarment: Bidders Affidavit of Non-Collusion and Non-Debarment is executed signed and enclosed with bid. Mailing Bids: a. The envelope containing bids, securities, etc. must be sealed. b. It also must be addressed and marked as indicated on the bid form. END OF SECTION 00 43 00 09603 00 43 00-1 4/5/10 i = SS “i aa a % IA Document A310" - 1970 Bid Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Contractor) as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety) a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner) Delta Greely School District P.O. Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of ($__ ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for (Here insert full name, address and description of project) Delta High School Biomass Heating System Delta Junction, Alaska NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this dayof , ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. AIA Document A310™ - 1970. Copyright © 1963 and 1970 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:15:55 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1716868651) (Principal) (Seal) (Witness) (Title) (Witness) (Surety) (Title) (Seal) AIA Document A310™ — 1970. Copyright © 1963 and 1970 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA~ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:15:55 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1716868651) Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A310™ - 1970 This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text. Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AIA software at 15:15:55 on 04/05/2010. PAGE 1 Delta Greely School District P.O. Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 Delta High School Biomass Heating System Delta Junction, Alaska Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A310™ — 1970. Copyright © 1963 and 1970 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:15:55 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1716868651) Certification of Document’s Authenticity AIA® Document D401™ — 2003 I, Harold L. Hollis, P.E., hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 15:15:55 on 04/05/2010 under Order No. 3575118491_1 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA” Document A310™ — 1970 - Bid Bond, as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report. (Signed) (Title) (Dated) AIA Document D401™ — 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:15:55 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1716868651) DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 00 45 09 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BIDDERS AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND NON-DEBARMENT BIDDERS AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION AND NON-DEBARMENT UNITED STATES OF AMERICA ) )ss STATE OF ALASKA ) I, of (Name) (Firm Name) being duly sworn, do depose and state: That I, or the firm, association, or corporation of which | am a member, a bidder on the contract to be awarded by the Delta Greely School District, for the construction of certain construction project designated as: Delta High School Biomass Heating System, located in Delta Junction, in the State of Alaska, have not either directly or indirectly entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint competitive bidding in connection with such contract: and That | am not, and the firm, association or corporation which | represent is not presently suspended, debarred or otherwise deemed ineligible under federal law or the laws of any state to receive the award of a public contract. Signature Title (Print or type) Subscribed and Sworn to this day of 2010 (Notary Public) My Commission Expires 09603 00 4509-1 4/5/10 Init. AIA Document A101" — 2007 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum AGREEMENT made as of the day of _ in the year (In words, indicate day, month and year.) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has BETWEEN the Owner: added information needed for its (Name, legal status, address and other information) completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original Delta Greely School District AIA standard form. An Additions and PO Box 527 Deletions Report that notes added Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be and the Contractor: reviewed. A vertical line in the left (Name, legal status, address and other information) margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an for the following Project: attorney is encouraged with respect (Name, location and detailed description) to its completion or modification. AIA Document A201 ™-—2007, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use : . . . with other general conditions unless The Architect: In all cases where "Architect" is referenced, for the purposes of this this document is modified. project, it shall refer to: (Name, legal status, address and other information) Delta High School Biomass Heating System Delta Junction, Alaska Coffman Engineers, Inc. 800 F. Street Anchorage, Alaska 99501 The Owner and Contractor agree as follows. AIA Document A101™ — 2007. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is pi d by U.S. Copyright Law and International T; ies. Unauthorized »production or distribution of this AIA” Oocument, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penaities, and will rosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:19:49 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (728720986) Init. TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 4 CONTRACT SUM 5 PAYMENTS 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in Article 9. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable, state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) If, prior to the commencement of the Work, the Owner requires time to file mortgages and other security interests, the Owner’s time requirement shall be as follows: § 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. § 3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than (_ ) days from the date of commencement, or as follows: (Insert number of calendar days. Alternatively, a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of commencement. If appropriate, insert requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work.) AIA Document A101™ — 2007. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIAY Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:19:49 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (728720986) Init. Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date , Subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert provisions, if any, for liquidated damages relating to failure to achieve Substantial Completion on time or for bonus payments for early completion of the Work.) ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM § 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor’s performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be ($ _), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If the bidding or proposal documents permit the Owner to accept other alternates subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires.) § 4.3 Unit prices, if any: (Identify and state the unit price; state quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will be applicable.) Item Units and Limitations Price Per Unit ($0.00) § 4.4 Allowances included in the Contract Sum, if any: (Identify allowance and state exclusions, if any, from the allowance price.) Item Price ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS § 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: § 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month, the Owner shall make payment of the certified amount to the Contractor not later than the day ofthe month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than (__) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. (Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.) § 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported AIA Document A101™ — 2007. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized eproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:19:49 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (728720986) Init. by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. § 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. § 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: 1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage of percent( %). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute shall be included as provided in Section 7.3.9 of AIA Document A201™-—2007, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction; 2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage of percent( %); Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Section 9.5 of AIA Document A201—2007. Row § 5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Section 5.1.6 shall be further modified under the following circumstances: ‘1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the full amount of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work, retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims; and (Section 9.8.5 of AIA Document A201-2007 requires release of applicable retainage upon Substantial Completion of Work with consent of surety, if any.) 2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Section 9.10.3 of AIA Document A201-2007. § 5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: (If it is intended, prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Sections 5.1.6.1 and 5.1.6.2 above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.) § 5.1.9 Except with the Owner’s prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. § 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT § 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when ‘1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor’s responsibility to correct Work as provided in Section 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201—2007, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment; and 2a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. § 5.2.2 The Owner’s final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect’s final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: AIA Document A101™ — 2007. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:19:49 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (728720986) Init. ARTICLE 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION § 6.1 INITIAL DECISION MAKER The Architect will serve as Initial Decision Maker pursuant to Section 15.2 of AIA Document A201—2007, unless the parties appoint below another individual, not a party to this Agreement, to serve as Initial Decision Maker. (f the parties mutually agree, insert the name, address and other contact information of the Initial Decision Maker, if other than the Architect.) § 6.2 BINDING DISPUTE RESOLUTION For any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation pursuant to Section 15.3 of AIA Document A201—2007, the method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows: (Check the appropriate box. If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution below, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, Claims will be resolved by litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction.) { ] Arbitration pursuant to Section 15.4 of AIA Document A201—2007 { ] Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction { ] Other (Specify) ARTICLE 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION § 7.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201-2007. § 7.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201—2007. ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201—2007 or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. § 8.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) % § 8.3 The Owner’s representative: (Name, address and other information) PJ Ford Slack Delta Greely School District Superintendent PO Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 § 8.4 The Contractor’s representative: (Name, address and other information) AIA Document A101™ — 2007. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the !aw. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:19:49 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (728720986) 5 Init. § 8.5 Neither the Owner’s nor the Contractor’s representative shall be changed without ten days written notice to the other party. § 8.6 Other provisions: ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated in the sections below. § 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed AIA Document A101—2007, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. § 9.1.2 The General Conditions are AIA Document A201-2007, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. § 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract: Document Title Date Pages § 9.1.4 The Specifications: (Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) § 9.1.5 The Drawings: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Number Title Date § 9.1.6 The Addenda, if any: Number Date Pages Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9. § 9.1.7 Additional documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents: 1 AIA Document E201™-—2007, Digital Data Protocol Exhibit, if completed by the parties, or the following: AIA Document A101™ — 2007. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:19:49 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (728720986) Init. .2 Other documents, if any, listed below: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201-2007 provides that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor’s bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) ARTICLE 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance and provide bonds as set forth in Article 11 of AIA Document A201-2007. (State bonding requirements, if any, and limits of liability for insurance required in Article 11 of AIA Document A201-2007.) Type of insurance or bond Limit of liability or bond amount ($0.00) This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above. OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature) (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title) AIA Document A101™ - 2007. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIAY Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:19:49 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (728720986) Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A101™ - 2007 This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text. Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AIA software at 15:19:49 on 04/05/2010. PAGE 1 Delta Greely School District PO Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 Delta High School Biomass Heating System Delta Junction, Alaska The Architect: In all cases where "Architect" is referenced, for the purposes of this project, it shall refer to: Coffman Engineers, Inc. 800 F. Street Anchorage, Alaska 99501 PAGE 5 PJ Ford Slack Delta Greely School District Superintendent PO Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 PAGE 6 Section Title Date Pages Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A101™ — 2007. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAY Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penaities, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:19:49 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (728720986) Certification of Document’s Authenticity AIA® Document D401™ - 2003 I, Harold L. Hollis, P.E., hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 15:19:49 on 04/05/2010 under Order No. 35751184911 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA” Document A101™ — 2007 - Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum, as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report. (Signed) (Title) (Dated) AIA Document D401™ — 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAY Document, or any portion of it, 41 may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:19:49 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (728720986) ATA Document A312" — 1984 Payment Bond CONTRACTOR (Name, Legal Status SURETY (Name, Legal Status and and Address): Principal Place of Business): ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also OWNER (Name, Legal Status and have revised the text of the original Address): . AIA standard form. An Additions and Delta Greely School District Deletions Report that notes added PO Box 527 information as well as revisions to Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT margin of this document indicates Date: where the author has added Amount: $ necessary information and where Description (Name and Location): the author has added to or deleted Delta High School Biomass Heating System from the original AIA text. This document has important legal BOND consequences. Consultation with an Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): attorney is encouraged with respect Amount: $ to its completion or modification. Modifications to this Bond: Xx None See Section 16 Any singular reference to Contract, Surety, Owner or other party shall CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY be considered plural where Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) applicable. Signature: Signature: Name and Name and Title: Title: (Any additional signatures appear on the last page) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY - Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party): PJ Ford Slack Delta Greely School District Superintendent PO Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 AIA Document A312™ — 1984 Payment Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA° Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:14:19 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1984394578) § 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. § 2 With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor: § 2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and § 2.2 Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity whose claim, demand, lien or suit is for the payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Section 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default. § 3 With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due. § 4 The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: § 4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address described in Section 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. § 4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor: 1 Have furnished written notice to the Contractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed; and 2 Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the above notice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contractor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and 3 Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety (at the address described in Section 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor. § 5 If a notice required by Section 4 is given by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety, that is sufficient compliance. § 6 When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Section 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions: § 6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed. § 6.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. § 7 The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. § 8 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and the Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. § 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. AIA Document A312™ — 1984 Payment Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA? Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:14:19 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1984394578) § 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. § 11 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Section 4.1 or Section 4.2.3, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. § 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, the Owner or the Contractor, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page. § 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. § 14 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. § 15 DEFINITIONS § 15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished. § 15.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. § 15.3 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. § 16 MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: Address: Address: AIA Document A312™ — 1984 Payment Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:14:19 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1984394578) Additions and Deletions Report for ® AIA Document A312™ - 1984 This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text. Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AIA software at 15:14:19 on 04/05/2010. PAGE 1 Delta Greely School District PO Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 Delta High School Biomass Heating System Modifications to this Bond: None See Section 16 >< PJ Ford Slack Delta Greely School District Superintendent PO Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A312™ — 1984 Payment Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIAY Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:14:19 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1984394578) Certification of Document’s Authenticity AIA® Document D401™ - 2003 I, Harold L. Hollis, P.E., hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 15:14:19 on 04/05/2010 under Order No. 3575118491_1 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA” Document A312™ — 1984 - Payment Bond, as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report. (Signed) (Title) (Dated) AIA Document D401™ — 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, 1 may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:14:19 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1984394578) Performance Bond CONTRACTOR (Namie, Legal Status and Address): SURETY (Name, Legal Status and Principal Place of Business): OWNER (Name, Legal Status and Address): Delta Greely School District PO Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount: $ Description (Name and Location): Delta High School Biomass Heating System BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: $ Modifications to this Bond: Xx None See Section 13 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Name and Title: Title: (Any additional signatures appear on the last page) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY - Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party): PJ Ford Slack Superintendent Delta Greely School District PO Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 AIA Document A312" - 1984 ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. Any singular reference to Contract, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. AIA Document A312™ — 1984 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA° Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:13:08 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1261586535) § 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. § 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Section 3.1. § 3 If there is no Owner Default, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after: § 3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Section 10 below that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and § 3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor’s right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Section 3.1; and § 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the terms of the contract with the Owner. § 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the following actions: § 4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; or § 4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contractors; or § 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Owner’s concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Section 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor’s default; or § 4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: 1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to the Owner; or .2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefor. § 5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Section 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Section 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. § 6 After the Owner has terminated the Contractor’s right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Section 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for: AIA Document A312™ — 1984 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA’ Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:13:08 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1261586535) § 6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; § 6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Section 4; and § 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. §7 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators or successors. § 8 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. § 9 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. § 10 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. § 11 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted here from and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. § 12 DEFINITIONS § 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract. § 12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. § 12.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. § 12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. AIA Document A312™ — 1984 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the |aw. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:13:08 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1261586535) § 13 MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: Address: Address: AIA Document A312™ — 1984 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA’ Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:13:08 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1261586535) Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A312" - 1984 This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text. Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AIA software at 15:13:08 on 04/05/2010. PAGE 1 Delta Greely School District PO Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 Delta High School Biomass Heating System Modifications to this Bond: None See Section 13 >< PJ Ford Slack Superintendent Delta Greely School District PO Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A312™ — 1984 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. z WARNING: This AIA° Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:13:08 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1261586535) Certification of Document’s Authenticity AIA® Document D401™ - 2003 I, Harold L. Hollis, P.E., hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 15:13:08 on 04/05/2010 under Order No. 3575118491_1 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA” Document A312™ — 1984 - Performance Bond, as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report. (Signed) (Title) (Dated) AIA Document D401™ — 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:13:08 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1261586535) Init. DATA Document A201" - 2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) Delta High School Biomass Heating System Delta Junction, Alaska THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) Delta Junction School District PO Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 THE ARCHITECT: In all cases where "Architect" is referenced, for the purposes of this project, it shall refer to: (Name, legal status and address) Coffman Engineers, Inc. 800 F. Street Anchorage, Alaska 99501 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 1 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. AIA Document A201™ - 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA° Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are section headings.) Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1, 15.2 Addenda 1.1.1, 3.11.1 Additional Costs, Claims for 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 6.1.1, 7.3.7.5, 10.3, 15.1.4 Additional Inspections and Testing 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 Additional Insured 11.1.4 Additional Time, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.5 Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13 Allowances 3.8, 7.3.8 All-risk Insurance 11.3.1, 11.3.1.1 Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10, 11.1.3 Approvals 2.1.1, 2.2.2, 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.5.1 Arbitration 8.3.1, 11.3.10, 13.1.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT 4 Architect, Definition of 4.11 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.4.1, 3.12.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.7, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.3, 9.6.4, 15.1.3, 15.2 Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses 2.4.1, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 Architect’s Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5 Architect’s Approvals 2.4.1, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7 Architect’s Authority to Reject Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect’s Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Architect’s Decisions 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 15.2;-15.3 Architect’s Inspections 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Architect’s Instructions 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.5.2 Architect’s Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Architect’s Project Representative 4.2.10 Architect’s Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5, 15.2 Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.7 Architect’s Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architect’s Site Visits 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Asbestos 10.3.1 Attorneys’ Fees 3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.3 Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1, 6.1.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1, 5.2.1, 11.4.1 Binding Dispute Resolution 9.7, 11.3.9, 11.3.10, 13.1.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance 11.3.2 Bonds, Lien 7.3.7.4, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Bonds, Performance, and Payment 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 Certificates for Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.3 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 13.5.4 Certificates of Insurance 9.10.2, 11.1.3 Change Orders 1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, §.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9, 12.1.2, 15.1.3 Change Orders, Definition of 7.2.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 2.2.1, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 7.4.1, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.3.9 Claims, Definition of 15.1.1 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 15.4.1 Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 7.3.9, 10.3.2, 15.1.4 Claims for Additional Time 3.2.4, 3.7.46.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for 3.7.4 Claims for Damages 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Claims Subject to Arbitration 15.3.1, 15.4.1 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.1, 15.1.4 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration 3.9.1, 4.2.4 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 13.7 Compliance with Laws 1.6.1, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 Consent, Written 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.3.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2 Consolidation or Joinder 15.4.4 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.31 Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor’s 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance 15.1.3 Contract, Definition of 1.1.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 5.4.1.1, 11.3.9, 14 Contract Administration 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.2.5, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of LL Contract Sum 3.7.4, 3.8, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4, 15.2.5 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5.1, 15.2.5 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 AIA Document A201™ —- 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, 6.1.2 Contractor’s Construction Schedules 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Contractor’s Employees 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1, Contractor’s Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner’s Forces 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8 Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1 Contractor’s Representations 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8 Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents 3.2 Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work 9.7 Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1, 15.1.6 Contractor’s Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.4, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.2 Contractor’s Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Contractor’s Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 Contractual Liability Insurance 11.1.1.8, 11.2 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.11 Copyrights 1.5, 3.17 Correction of Work 2.3, 2.4, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of 7.3.7 Costs 2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.3, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 Cutting and Patching 3.14, 6.2.5 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3, 12.2.4 Damage to the Work 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4.1, 11.3.1, 12.2.4 Damages, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Damages for Delay 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2 Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8.1.3 Day, Definition of 8.1.4 Decisions of the Architect 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 15.2, 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1 Definitions 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 15.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1 Delays and Extensions of Time 3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Disputes 6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11 Drawings, Definition of 1.1.5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 3.11 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Emergencies 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.4 Employees, Contractor’s 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 AIA Document A201™ - 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Equipment, Labor, Materials or 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13.1, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.3 Extensions of Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Failure of Payment 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 12.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Financial Arrangements, Owner’s 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 11.3.1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials 10.2.4, 10.3 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers $.2.1 Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Initial Decision 15.2 Initial Decision Maker, Definition of 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker, Decisions 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 10.2.8, 10.4.1 Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.5.2 Instruments of Service, Definition of 1.1.7 Insurance 3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 11 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery 11.3.2 Insurance, Contractor’s Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Insurance, Loss of Use 11.3.3 Insurance, Owner’s Liability 11.2 Insurance, Property 10.2.5, 11.3 Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2 INSURANCE AND BONDS ll Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9.1 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4 Interest 13.6 Interpretation 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1 Interpretations, Written 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 15.1.4 Judgment on Final Award 15.4.2 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Labor Disputes 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations 1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13.1, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1.1, 11.3, 13.1.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6.1, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Liens 2.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Limitations, Statutes of 12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1 Limitations of Liability 2.3.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.1.2, 11.2, 11.3.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3.1, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1.5, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15 Loss of Use Insurance 11.3.3 AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 5 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the I maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. Material Suppliers 1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10.5 Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13.1, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Mechanic’s Lien 2.1.2, 15.2.8 Mediation 8.3.1, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1 Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of L11 Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1 Notice 2.2.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.12.9, 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2, 15.2.8, 15.4.1 Notice, Written 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.3.1, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4.1 Notice of Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.4 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Observations, Contractor’s 3.2, 3.7.4 Occupancy 2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.3.1.5 Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2.11 Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Owner’s Authority 1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.10, 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7 Owner’s Financial Capability 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Owner’s Liability Insurance 11.2 Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work 2.4, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work 2.3 Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.2.2, 3.11.1, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3.1 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9, 11.3.1.5 Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6.2.5 Patents 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Payment, Failure of 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Payment, Final 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4 Payments, Progress 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 PCB 10.3.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.7.4, 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.1 Product Data, Definition of 3.12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Progress Payments 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3 Project, Definition of 1.1.4 Project Representatives 4.2.10 Property Insurance 10.2.5, 11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Rejection of Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens 9.10.2 Representations 3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.10.1 Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.10, 5.1.1, §.1.2, 13.2.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and Architect 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14, 15.4 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration 15.4.1 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.4 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Samples, Definition of 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Site Inspections 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Site Visits, Architect’s 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 Specifications, Definition of 1.1.6 Specifications 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14 Statute of Limitations 13.7, 15.4.1.1 Stopping the Work 2.3, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 Subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7 Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.7, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3 Submittal Schedule 3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7 Subrogation, Waivers of 6.1.1, 11.3.7 Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 13.7 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of Architect 4.1.3 Substitutions of Materials 3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8 Sub-subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions 3.7.4 Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.7, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 Surety 5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 Surety, Consent of 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Surveys 2.2.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 5.4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 5.4.1.1, 14 Taxes 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.7.4 Termination by the Contractor 14.1, 15.1.6 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.6 Termination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4 Termination of the Architect 4.1.3 Termination of the Contractor 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Time Limits 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15.1.2, 15.4 Time Limits on Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 13.7, 15.1.2 Title to Work 9.3.2, 9.3.3 Transmission of Data in Digital Form 1.6 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Unit Prices 7.3.3.2, 7.3.4 Use of Documents 1.1.1, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3 Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.4.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 9.10.5, 13.4.2, 15.1.6 Waiver of Claims by the Owner 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Waiver of Liens 9.10.2, 9.10.4 Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, 11.3.7 Warranty 3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7.1 Weather Delays 15.1.5.2 Work, Definition of 1.1.3 Written Consent 1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2 Written Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA? Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. Written Notice Written Orders 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.1.2 15.4.1 AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA° Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA’ Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) 9 Init. ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS § 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements. § 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties. § 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. § 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors. § 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. § 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. § 1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials. § 1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section 14.2.2. § 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) iv Init. § 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. § 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. § 1.3 CAPITALIZATION Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. § 1.4 INTERPRETATION In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. § 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE § 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights. § 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect’s consultants. § 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form, they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 GENERAL § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative. § 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein. § 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. Thereafter, the Contractor may only request such evidence if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum; or (3) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due. The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 11 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the !aw. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. the portion of the Work affected by a material change. After the Owner furnishes the evidence, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. § 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. § 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. § 2.2.4 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services. § 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. § 2.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. § 2.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 GENERAL § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative. § 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Ve Init. § 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. § 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. § 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. § 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities. § 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. § 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 13 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. § 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections 3.12.8 or 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. § 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. § 3.5 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. § 3.6 TAXES The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. § 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. § 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. § 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. § 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may proceed as provided in Article 15. § 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. § 3.8 ALLOWANCES § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. § 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, ‘1 Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and .3. Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2. § 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. § 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. § 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) that the Architect requires additional time to review. Failure of the Architect to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. § 3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES § 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. § 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. § 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 15 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. § 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. § 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. § 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. § 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. § 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. § 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. § 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. § 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect’s approval thereof. § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. § 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 40 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents. § 3.13 USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. § 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. § 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor’s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. § 3.15 CLEANING UP § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from and about the Project. § 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. § 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. § 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 17 reproduction or distribution of this AIA? Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. § 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. § 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 GENERAL § 4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. § 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. § 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. § 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3.1. § 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) w Init. § 4.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. § 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. § 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. § 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. § 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. § 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 19 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. § 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 DEFINITIONS § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. § 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub- subcontractor. § 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) that the Architect requires additional time for review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. § 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. § 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may AIA Document A201™ - 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIAY Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) ae Init. be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. § 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that 1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract. § 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. § 5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the subcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS § 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article 15. § 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. § 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. § 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. § 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. § 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that AIA Document A201™ - 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 21 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may resuit in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. the Owner’s or separate contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. § 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction. § 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. § 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. § 6.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 GENERAL § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. § 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. § 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: 1 The change in the Work; .2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and 3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. § 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. § 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. § 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: -1— Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; 3. Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or AIA Document A201™ - 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AiA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the !aw. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) “Le Init. -4__ As provided in Section 7.3.7. § 7.3.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. § 7.3.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. § 7.3.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. § 7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.7 shall be limited to the following: 1 Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance; .2 Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; .3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; -4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and 5 Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. § 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. § 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. § 7.4MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK The Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 23 reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 DEFINITIONS § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. § 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. § 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. § 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. § 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. § 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. § 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. § 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or by changes ordered in the Work; or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration; or by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. § 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. § 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 CONTRACT SUM The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. § 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. § 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penaities, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. § 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. § 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. § 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. § 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. § 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. § 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on- site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. § 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of A defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; AIA Document A201™ - 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 25 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. 3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; damage to the Owner or a separate contractor; reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. one § 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. § 9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such payment on the next Certificate for Payment. § 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. § 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. § 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. § 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law. § 9.6.5 Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. § 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. § 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA’ Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Zo Init. stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shut- down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. § 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. § 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section 11.3.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, ifno agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. § 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA’ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 27 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. § 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees. § 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. § 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from 1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; 2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or 3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. § 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. § 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to -1— employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; 2. the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Sub- subcontractors; and 3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA~ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) £0 Init. § 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. § 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. § 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18. § 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. § 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. § 10.2.8 INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. § 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. § 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 29 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. § 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity. § 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. § 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence. § 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. § 10.4 EMERGENCIES In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: ‘1 Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor’s employees; -3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor’s employees; .4— Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; 5 Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; ‘6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .T Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and 8 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18. § 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness. § 11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include (1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s completed operations. § 11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual liability insurance. § 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE § 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s risk "all-risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors in the Project. § 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. § 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. § 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. § 11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work in transit. § 11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIAY Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 31 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. § 11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. § 11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner’s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner’s property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. § 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. § 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. § 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. § 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub- subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub- subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. § 11.3.8 A loss insured under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. § 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner’s duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) ve Init. Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as determined in accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. § 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner’s exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the directions of the arbitrators. § 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. § 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time. § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner’s expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, such costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor’s expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. § 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 33 reproduction or distribution of this AIAY Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. § 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. § 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. § 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. § 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 GOVERNING LAW The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that, if the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. § 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. § 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. § 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the firm or entity, or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at, or sent by registered or certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to, the last business address known to the party giving notice. § 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES § 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. § 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach there under, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. § 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS § 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor. § 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense. § 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. § 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. § 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. § 13.6 INTEREST Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. § 13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 13.7. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons: 1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped; .2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be stopped; AIA Document A201™ - 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 35 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. .3. Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or 4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor’s request, reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1. § 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less. § 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages. § 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. § 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor 1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; 2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or -4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. § 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: 1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and 3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. § 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. § 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. § 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. AIA Document A201™ - 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized gq reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. § 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent .1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. § 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause. § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall 1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2__ take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and 3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. § 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 CLAIMS § 15.1.1 DEFINITION A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. § 15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMS Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. § 15.1.3 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker. § 15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. § 15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME § 15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary. § 15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. AIA Document A201™ - 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 37 reproduction or distribution of this AIA’ Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) § 15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes 1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2_ damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 15.2 INITIAL DECISION § 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, 11.3.9, and 11.3.10, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. § 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. § 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense. § 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. § 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution. § 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. § 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within the time required, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized + reproduction or distribution of this AIA’ Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the ! maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Init. Init. § 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy. § 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. § 15.3 MEDIATION § 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.6 shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution. § 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings. § 15.3.3 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4 ARBITRATION § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. § 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim. § 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER § 15.4.4.1 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). § 15.4.4.2 Either party, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIAY Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 39 reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent. § 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement. AIA Document A201™ — 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Init. Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAY Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the ! maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) 4u Additions and Deletions Report for AIA’ Document A201™ — 2007 This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text. Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010. PAGE 1 Delta High School Biomass Heating System Delta Junction, Alaska Delta Junction School District PO Box 527 Delta Junction, Alaska 99737 THE ARCHITECT: In all cases where "Architect" is referenced, for the purposes of this project, it shall refer to: (Name, legal status and address) Coffman Engineers, Inc. 800 F. Street Anchorage, Alaska 99501 Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201™ - 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA° Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) Certification of Document’s Authenticity AIA® Document D401™ — 2003 I, Harold L. Hollis, P.E., hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No. 3575118491_1 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA” Document A201™ — 2007 - General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report. (Signed) (Title) (Dated) AIA Document D401™ — 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA” Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA” Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:18:25 on 04/05/2010 under Order No.3575118491_1 which expires on 04/04/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1736008242) DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 00 73 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA The following add to, delete from, modify, or supplement General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, and shall take precedence over AIA Document A 201. SGC 1 SGC 2 SGC 3 SGC 4 09603 Reference 2.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner DELETE 2.2.1 Reference 4.2 Architects Administration of Contract DELETE 4.2.11 DELETE 4.2.12 Reference 4.3 Claims and Disputes DELETE 4.3.1 and replace with: “4.3.1 Definition: A claim is a demand or assertion by the contractor seeking, as a matter if right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. Claims must be initiated by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall be by the Contractor.” DELETE 4.3.2 and replace with: “4.3.2 Time limits on claims. Claims mist be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the Contractor first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the owner’s Representative.” Reference 4.4 Resolution of Claims DELETE 4.4.1 and replace with: “4.4.1 Claims, including those alleging and error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under paragraphs 10.3 through 10.5 shall be referred to the Owner’s Representative for decision. A decision by the Owner’s Representative shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation, arbitration or litigation of claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to date of final payment is due.” DELETE 4.4.2 and replace with: “4.2.2 the owners representative will review Claims and within 10 days of the receipt of the Claim take one of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant, (2) reject the Claim in whole or part, (3) approve the Claim, (4)suggest a compromise” DELETE 4.4.3 DELETE 4.4.4 DELETE 4.4.5 and replace with: “4.4.5 The Owner’s Representative will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefore and which shall notify the Contractor of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Owners Representative shall be final and binding on the parties subject to mediation or arbitration.” DELETE 4.4.6 and replace with: “4.4.6 When a written decision of the Owner’s Representative states that (1) the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration for a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the contractor receives a final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days’ period shall result in the Owner’s Representative decision becoming final and binding upon the contractor.” 00 73 00-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 00 73 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SGC 5 SGC 6 DELETE 4.4.7 Reference 4.5 Mediation DELETE 4.5.1 and replace with: “4.5.1 Any claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall, after decision by the Owner’s Representative, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. Reference 4.6 Arbitration DELETE 4.6.1 and replace with: “4.6.1 Any claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall, after decision by the Owner’s Representative, be subject to arbitration. Prior to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 4.5.” SGC 7 — Reference Article 7. Changes In The Work SGC 8 SGC 9 09603 ADD7.3.6.6 — Overhead and Profit 7.3.6.6.1 The Contractor shall apply a combined percentage rate to the direct costs to compensate it for Overhead and Profit associated with the change. The combined rate to the Owner of any change shall not exceed the rates set forth in the following schedule: 7.3.6.6.1.1: For the Contractor, for Work performed by his own forces, up to twenty percent (20%) of direct costs; 7.3.6.6.1.2: For each Subcontractor involved, for Work performed by the Subcontractor’s forces, up to fifteen percent (15%) of direct costs; 7.3.6.6.1.3: For the Contractor, for Work performed by Subcontractors, up to ten percent (10%) of the Subcontractor’s direct costs; 7.3.6.6.1.4 For the Subcontractor, for Work performed by the multiple-tier- contractors, up to ten percent (10%) of direct costs; 7.3.6.6.1.5The total Contractor and all-subcontractors overhead allowance shall not exceed thirty percent (30%) of direct costs. -Reference 8.2 Progress and Completion ADD “8.2.4 Liquidated Damages: The owner will suffer damage if the project is not substantially complete on the date set forth in the Contract Documents. Such damage will include inconvenience, delay, and higher fuel costs to the Delta Greely School District in being unable to occupy and make use of the facility. Such inconvenience and loss of anticipated benefit from the project is not capable of being reasonably estimated in economic terms. The Contractor (and his surety) shall pay to the Owner, liquidated damages (not a Penalty) in the amount of $500, for each calendar day of delay beyond the time of Substantial Completion stated in the Contract Documents - Reference 11.1 Contractors Liability Insurance DELETE 11.1 and all subparagraphs and replace with: “11.1 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 11.1.1. The Contractor shall carry and maintain throughout the life of this contract, at his own expense, insurance not less than the amounts of coverage herein specified, and the 0073 00-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 00 73 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 09603 Delta Greely School District, its employees and agents shall be named as additional insured under the insurance coverage so specified and where allowed, with respect to performance of the Work. There shall be no right of subrogation against the Delta Greely School District or its agents performing Work in connection with the Work and this waiver of subrogation shall be endorsed upon the policies. Insurance shall be placed with companies acceptable to the Delta Greely School District; and these policies providing coverage there under shall contain provisions that no material changes in the policy shall become effective except upon 30 days prior written notice thereof the Delta Greely School District. 11.1.2 Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall furnish certificates to the Delta Greely School District, in duplicate, evidencing that the insurance policy provisions required hereunder are in force. Acceptance by the Delta Greely School District of deficient evidence does not constitute a waiver of Contract requirements. 11.1.3 The Contractor shall provide the Delta Greely School District with certified copies of policies upon request. The minimum Coverage and limits required are as follows: 11.1.3.1 | Workers Compensation insurance in accordance with the statutory coverage required by the State of Alaska Employers Liability insurance limits not less than $1,000,000 and, where applicable, insurance in compliance with any other statutory obligations, either State or Federal , pertaining to the compensation of injured employees assigned to Voluntary Compensation, Federal Longshoremen and Harbor Workers Act. Maritime and the Outer Continental Shelf’s Act. 11.1.3.2 Commercial General Liability with limits not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 Aggregate for Bodily Injury and Property Damage, including coverage for Premises and Operations Liability, Products and Completed Operations Liability, Contractual Liability, Broad Form Property Damage Liability and Personal Injury Liability. Coverage shall not include any exclusion of Explosion, Collapse, or underground. Coverage is to be endorsed to include a per project aggregate. Additionally, such insurance shall be considered primary to any other insurance carried by the Delta Greely School District and the insurer shall endorse the policy accordingly. 11.1.3.3 Commercial Automobile Liability on all owner, non-owned, hired and rented vehicles with limits of liability not less than 1,000,000 Combined Single Limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage per accident or loss. 11.1.3.4 If applicable, Contractor’s Equipment insurance covering all of the Contractor’s equipment and machinery to be used in connection with the performance of the Work specified in this Contract. This coverage requirement may be waived at the discretion of the Delta Greely School District if the Contractor self-insures the equipment and will waive all rights of recovery against the Delta Greely School District in writing. 11.1.3.5 Umbrella/Excess Liability insurance coverage of not less than $3,000,000 per occurrence and annual aggregate providing coverage in excess of General Liability, Auto Liability and Employers Liability. 11.1.3.6 If work involves use of aircraft, Aircraft Liability insurance covering all owner and non-owned aircraft per occurrence limit of not less than $1,000,000. 11.1.3.7 If work involves use of watercraft, Protection and Indemnity Insurance with limits of not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence, Hull and Machinery coverage is to be carried on the vessel for the full current market value. This coverage requirement may be waived 00 73 00-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 00 73 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 09603 at the discretion of the Delta Greely School District if the Contractor self-insures the equipment and will waive all rights of recovery against the Delta Greely School District in writing. 11.1.3.8 Where applicable, Professional Liability Insurance with limits of not less than $1,000,000 per claim and $1,000,000 aggregate subject to a maximum deductible of $10,000 per claim. The Delta Greely School District had the right to negotiate increase of deductibles subject to acceptance of financial information of the policyholder. 11.1.3.8 Where applicable, Pollution Liability Insurance with a project limit of not less that $1,000,000 to include coverage for Asbestos, Hazardous materials, Lead or other related environmental hazards. In the event Asbestos, Hazardous Materials, Lead or other related environmental hazards are transported by vehicle and/or marine vessel, the operator of such vehicles and vessels shall provide a Certificate of Insurance for the transportation of such materials (including loading and unloading) with limits of not less than $1,000,000. 11.1.3.9 Builders Risk insurance: Coverage shall be “All Risk” completed value basis and protect the interest of the Owner, the Contractor and his subcontractors. Coverage shall include all materials, equipment and supplies that are intended for specific installation in the project shall such materials, supplies and equipment are located at the project site and in transit from port of arrival to jobsite and while temporarily located away from the project site. 11.1.4 Any deductibles or self-insured retentions must be declared to and approved by the Delta Greely School District. At the option of the Delta Greely School District, either the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retentions as respects the Delta Greely School District., it officers, officials, employees and volunteers; or the contractor shall provide a financial guarantee satisfactory to the Delta Greely School District guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations, claim administration and defense expense. 11.1.5 All insurance policies as described above are required to be written on an “occurrence“ basis. In the event occurrence coverage is not available, the contractor agrees to maintain “claims made” coverage for a minimum of two years after project completion. 11.1.6 If the contractor employs second tier subcontractors to perform any Work hereunder, the contractor agrees to require such subcontractors to obtain, carry, maintain and keep in force during the time in which they are engaged in performing any work herein under policies of insurance which comply with requirements as set forth in this section and furnish copies thereof to the Delta Greely School District. This requirement is applicable to subcontractors of any tier. The contractor is required to maintain all certificates of insurance during the course of the project and for a minimum of three (3) years following the completion of the project. It is further agreed, that upon request they the Delta Greely School District, the contractor shall provide copies of any and all subcontractor certificates of insurance for review of compliance. 11.1.7 Failure of the Contractor to maintain the required insurance coverage or to comply with 11.1.6 above, may at the option of the Delta Greely School District, be deemed Defective Work and remedied in accordance with the Contract.” 00 7300-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 00 73 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SGC 10 - Reference 11.2 Owners Liability Insurance DELETE 11.2 and all subparagraphs. SGC 11 Reference 11.3 Project Management Protective Liability Insurance DELETE 11.3 and all subparagraphs. SGC 12 Reference 11.4 Property Insurance DELETE 11.4 and all subparagraphs. SGC 13 Reference 11.5 Performance Bond and Payment Bond DELETE 11.5.1 and replace with: 11.5.1 Contractor shall be required to furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising there under. Contractor shall submit prior to of execution of the agreement, Performance Bond in the amount of 100% of the Contract Amount and Labor and Material Payment Bond in the amount of 100% of the Contract Amount. SGC 14 Reference Article 13 Miscellaneous Provisions ADD “13.1.2 Wage Rate Requirements: Current prevailing wage rates as defined in State if Alaska, Department of Labor, Laborers and Mechanics Minimum Rates of Pay (Title 36) are required for this project.” END OF SECTION 00 73 00 09603 00 7300-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 10 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUMMARY DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 11 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: Work covered by the Contract Documents. Use of premises. Owner's occupancy requirements. Work Restrictions. Specification formats and conventions. OPoNn B. See Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing the use of Owners facilities. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Delta High School Biomass Heating Facility. 1. Project Location: Delta Junction, Alaska. B. Owner: Delta Greely School District. Cc. Engineers: Coffman Engineers, 800 F Street, Anchorage, AK 99501. This Project includes the construction phase of a new biomass central heating plant to serve the Delta Greely High School. This new biomass system will supplement the existing fuel oil fired boiler plant and will significantly re- duce the reliance on fuel oil for heating of the school building. The new biomass system will supplement the existing fuel oil system. The new biomass boiler plant will be located to the north of the existing school building with buried utilities and heating piping extending between the school and new boiler plant. The new plant includes an Owner supplied wood chip fired boiler, chip storage bin and automated chip feeding mechanisms. The wood chips will be transported to the plant in chip hauling trailers that will be owned and provided by the school district. The interconnection of the new heat source piping to the existing heating plant will be such that the bio- mass system will be first in line to heat the cooler return heating water from the school. After the biomass heat has been added, the existing oil fired plant will, if necessary, bring the heating water up to the re- quired final temperature to heat the school. During a significant portion of the heating season, the bio- mass system will provide all of the necessary heat and the oil fired plant will be idle. Base bid will include a pre-engineered steel biomass plant building to house the boiler, chip bin and chip handling system to automatically feed the boiler as well as all of the ancillary equipment necessary for a complete functioning system. The building will also include a heated two bay chip trailer storage area. Site work includes excavation, compacted fill, grading, drainage, and resto- ration of disturbed areas. Owner Furnished Equipment will include a furnace/boiler capable of 5.0 MMBTUH at a mini- mum 70% efficiency The total system shall consist of a chip bin unloading auger, chain conveyor, or walking floor; transport/sifting conveyor, transport conveyor to the metering bin, screw auger metering conveyors and over fire and under fire blowers to support adjustable burn rates and tun- 09603 011000 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 10 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUMMARY DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA ing of the system. The furnace and boiler shall include the above metering, a control panel, with integration to the DDC, as well as tube soot blower and compressor. Included shall be the flue duct work, multiclone separator, ID fan, and stack. D. Contractor shall coordinate the delivery, handling, storage, and provide installation support, including startup and training, of the Owner Furnished Equipment. E. 1.3 A. 1.4 1.5 09603 Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. PROJECT LOCATION The project is located on the existing Delta High School property. All work is to be coordinated with the Delta Greely School District Project Manager, Mr. Kent Scifres, phone (907) 803-4690. PROJECT SCHEDULE The work is to be accomplished and substantially complete and operational not later than August 1, 2011. Final completion shall be not later thank September 1, 2011. USE OF PREMISES General: Contractor Work Area will be limited to the immediate area of construction. Use of existing Facilities: Contractor shall have limited use of existing building facilities for construction operations as follows. As The School Year is approximately August XX to May XX: Contractor will have limited access of school facilities during this time for the purposes of tie-in to the existing school systems. Preferred construction time is during periods when school is not in session. a. Contractor shall not assume that any dedicated space will be provided within the school. b. Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from Contractors access or use of facilities including Contractors failure to maintain security to unauthorized entry. Cc Contractor shall be responsible for daily cleaning of all areas occupied by the Contractor. d. Contractor shall not use any School District materials or supplies other than the owner furnished equipment as noted in the documents. e. Contractor shall not remove any materials, equipment or furnishings from the school building. fi Use shall be limited exclusively to on site workers. Building shall be secured at all times and shall not allow entry to any person except as authorized by the School District h. No Alcohol, drugs or smoking are permitted on school property. Use of Site: Limit use of site and premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public. Normal school day is from approximately 8:00 AM to 3 PM. Hours may vary depending on activities that may be scheduled during the school year, Contractor shall accommodate scheduled activities within the school facility. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. Maintain existing heating system in operational condition at all times heat is needed. 011000 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 10 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUMMARY DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.6 A. 1.7 1.8 09603 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain access to existing fire lanes, walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct fire lands, roadways, walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. Owner Occupancy During School Year: Owner will occupy all portions of the facility during the school year for their normal educational program. Operations which may interrupt the school program will be very limited. Owner Occupancy During Summer Break: Owner will occupy site and existing building for normal summer occupancy. All existing furnishings and equipment will remain in place. Building will not be occupied for normal school session during the summer break. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as protect owner’s equipment and furnishings. Maintain access to existing fire lanes, roadways, walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct access lanes, walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. WORK RESTRICTIONS On-Site Work Hours During School Year: 1. Work to be conducted inside the existing building, that will interfere with the instructional program shall be performed outside of normal school hours with only minor exceptions as provided above and coordinated with the school administrator. This will include after and before school on week days and no restriction on weekends or school holidays Onsite work Hours During Summer Break: 1. Generally there are no restrictions on work hours, except operations shall not disturb adjacent homes between the hours of 10:00 PM and 8:00 AM Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following Provisions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: a Notify Owner 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. WORK RESTRICTIONS Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes. 011000 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 10 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUMMARY DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.9 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 4. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: qa Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used). END OF SECTION 01 10 00 09603 011000 -4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 25 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. 1.2 1.3 09603 SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. Related Section: 1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. DEFINITIONS Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. SUBMITTALS Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use at the end of this section 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. b. > ao Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. Samples, where applicable or requested. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 01 25 00 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 25 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. Substitution Request END OF SECTION 01 25 00 09603 01 25 00-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 25 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SUBSTITUTION REQUEST TO: PROJECT: SPECIFIED ITEM: Section Page Paragraph Description PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, perform- ance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the pro- posed substitution will require for its proper installation. The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering de- sign. 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted by: Signature: For use by the A/E Firm: Approved Approved as noted Address: Not Approved Received too late By: Date: Date: Telephone: Remarks: 09603 01 25 00 - 3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 26 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 09603 SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. See Division 01 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing allowances. See Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements for using unit prices. MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions. PROPOSAL REQUESTS Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. a0 Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 01 26 00 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 26 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 14 1.5 6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714 Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used). END OF SECTION 01 26 00 09603 01 26 00-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 29 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PAYMENT PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 09603 SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. SCHEDULE OF VALUES Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets Submittals Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than fifteen days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and Progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for Operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. en as APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. 01 2900-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 29 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PAYMENT PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. 09603 Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the tenth of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. Transmittal: Submit 2 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: List of subcontractors. Schedule of Values. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). Schedule of unit prices. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). List of Contractor's staff assignments. List of Contractor's principal consultants. Copies of building permits. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. | Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. OMNAARWN> Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 01 2900-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 29 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PAYMENT PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA ONOARY 9. 1 0. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." Evidence that claims have been settled. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. Evidence of “Notification of Completion of Public Works” as required by Alaska DOL. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used). END OF SECTION 01 29 00 09603 01 29 00 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 31 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 09603 SUMMARY This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Project meetings. 3. Requests for Interpretation (RFls). See Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. DEFINITIONS RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. COORDINATION Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. so Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. PROJECT MEETINGS General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences as needed during the progress of the Work. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; 01 3100-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 31 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.6 09603 Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: Tentative construction schedule. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. Designation of key personnel and their duties. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. Procedures for RFls. Procedures for testing and inspecting. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. Distribution of the Contract Documents. Submittal procedures. Preparation of Record Documents. Use of the premises. Work restrictions. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. Construction waste management and recycling. Office, work, and storage areas. Equipment deliveries and priorities. First aid. Security. Progress cleaning. t. Working hours. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at as needed during the progress of the Work or7av0asR> ATO Fa>9QA20Tm Ro REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFs shall originate with Contractor. RFls submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFls in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: Project name. Date. Name of Contractor. Name of Architect. RFI number, numbered sequentially. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. OONOARWN> 01 3100-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 31 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. Hard-Copy RFls: Form furnished by Architect. 1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFls received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. A: The following RF Is will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFls or RFls with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFls that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures.” a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFls organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: Project name. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of Architect. RFI number including RFls that were dropped and not submitted. RFI description. Date the RFI was submitted. Date Architect's response was received. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. ONOARWN> PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used). END OF SECTION 01 31 00 09603 01 3100-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 32 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 09603 SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: a: Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2 Submittals Schedule. 3: Daily construction reports. 4. Field condition reports. See Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. DEFINITIONS Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. SUBMITTALS Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: Scheduled date for first submittal. Specification Section number and title. Submittal category (action or informational). Name of subcontractor. Description of the Work covered. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. QakWnN>= Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two opaque copies, large enough to show entire network 01 3200-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 32 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. D. E. F. G. 1.4 A. B. for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1, Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. a Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. Electronic Copies: In addition to opaque copies required above, all documents required above shall be submitted in electronic format, in MS Word, MS Excel or PDF COORDINATION Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. a Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. 09603 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of Final 01 3200-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 32 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.3 09603 Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than two days for startup and testing. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. os Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice of Award. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, cost- and resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for the Notice of Award. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. 01 3200-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 32 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.4 09603 Purchase of materials. Delivery. Fabrication. Utility interruptions. Installation. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. : Testing and commissioning. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. No more than 20% of activities should be critical or near- critical. The definition of critical and near-critical are those activities with 10 days or less total float. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. “sza-pao Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: OCONOARWN> Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. Description of activity. Principal events of activity. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. Early and late start dates. Early and late finish dates. Activity duration in workdays. Total float or slack time. Average size of workforce. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: NOARWON> Identification of activities that have changed. Changes in early and late start dates. Changes in early and late finish dates. Changes in activity durations in workdays. Changes in the critical path. Changes in total float or slack time. Changes in the Contract Time. REPORTS Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: DWONDARWN>= List of subcontractors at Project site. Equipment at Project site. Material deliveries. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. Accidents. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. Meter readings and similar recordings. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. Services connected and disconnected. 013200-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 32 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. 10. Equipment or system tests and startups. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation on form furnished by Owner. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01 32 00 09603 01 3200-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 33 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 09603 SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. See Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule. See Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. See Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. See Division01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. DEFINITIONS Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. i Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor 01 3300-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 33 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 09603 when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. a Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2! Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: Project name. Date. Name and address of Architect. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of subcontractor. Name and address of supplier. Name of manufacturer. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06 10 00.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06 10 00.01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. sa>oa00M Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. i Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return or discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked indicating approval. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect. 01 33 00-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 33 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 09603 ACTION SUBMITTALS General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1 2. 3 If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. Include the following information, as applicable: Manufacturer's written recommendations. Manufacturer's product specifications. Manufacturer's installation instructions. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. Printed performance curves. Operational range diagrams. Compliance with specified referenced standards. i. Testing by recognized testing agency. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. "pa *MadgTH Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: Dimensions. Identification of products. Fabrication and installation drawings. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h Schedules. i Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. I. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy. @a2o00m Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 01 3300-3 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 33 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.2 09603 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. 1. Number of Copies: Submit Five copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. 1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 0133 00-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 33 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. 09603 Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with 01 3300-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 33 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.3 09603 requirements in the Contract Documents. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: qa Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. at Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for resubmittal. DELEGATED DESIGN Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. Me If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 01 33 00-6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 33 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. ARCHITECT'S ACTION General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. i: Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01 33 00 09603 01 33 00 -7 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 40 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 09603 SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. DEFINITIONS Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 01 40 00 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 40 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.3 1.4 09603 Installer/Applicator/Erector: _ Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: Date of issue. Project title and number. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. Identification of product and Specification Section. Complete test or inspection data. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. | Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. SEMNODARWN> = = oOo Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 01 40 00 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 40 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.5 A. 09603 QUALITY ASSURANCE General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the state of Alaska and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. fa Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5 Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 01 40 00 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 40 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.6 A. 09603 QUALITY CONTROL Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. a Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2! Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. a Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2 Notify testing agencies at least three days in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2: Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1: Access to the Work. 01 4000-4 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 40 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA G. 7 A. B. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. won Oak N Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. REPAIR AND PROTECTION General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. a Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01 40 00 09603 01 4000-5 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 50 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. 1.2 A. B. Cc. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. SUMMARY Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. Related Section: A; Division 01 Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. USE CHARGES General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. QUALITY ASSURANCE Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. PROJECT CONDITIONS Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 A. B. 09603 MATERIALS EQUIPMENT Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. HVAC Equipment: Provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 01 50 00 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 50 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 3.3 3.4 09603 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. 01 5000-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 50 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. Cc. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01 50 00 09603 01 50 00 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 60 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 09603 SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers’ standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. DEFINITIONS Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. SUBMITTALS Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Form provided by Architect. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. Cc. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as 01 60 00 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 60 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.4 09603 performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. i: Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. I. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1 Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 01 60 00 -2 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 60 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.5 A. 1.6 09603 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2 Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. Storage: 4 Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2) Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. PRODUCT WARRANTIES Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures.” 01 60 00 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 60 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 2 - PRODUCTS at PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. a 2! Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: a 2. 3. 10. 09603 Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that 01 60 00 -4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 60 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.2 2.3 complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. a Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. COMPARABLE PRODUCTS Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2; Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4 List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5: Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used). END OF SECTION 01 60 00 09603 01 6000-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 77 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 09603 SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: i Inspection procedures. pa Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. See Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. See Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. See Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. Complete startup testing of systems. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 0. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. | Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. = © © 0177 00-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 77 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. 1.3 14 1.5 09603 Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. FINAL COMPLETION Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division01 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. WARRANTIES Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 01 7700-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 77 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MATERIALS Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 09603 FINAL CLEANING General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. f. Sweep floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. i, Remove labels that are not permanent. j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. I. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. ao 0177 00-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 77 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. oO. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. Cc. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01 77 00 09603 0177 00-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 78 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. 1.2 A. SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1 Emergency manuals. 2) Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes, systems and equipment. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. SUBMITTALS Manual: Submit of each manual in final form at least 30 days before Substantial Completion Inspection and Demonstration. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 3 days prior to demonstration and training. Manuals shall be available to Owners Maintenance Personnel at time of demonstration and training PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. D. 09603 MANUALS, GENERAL Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: Subject matter included in manual. Name and address of Project. Name and address of Owner. Date of submittal. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. Name and address of Architect. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. NOARONS> Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, with locking “D” Rings in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. No 3 ring binder shall exceed 3” in thickness. a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 01 78 23 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 78 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.2 2.3 09603 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. All Manuals including but not limited to; General Manuals, Emergency Manuals, Operation Manuals, Product Maintenance Manuals, System and Equipment Manuals will also be prepared in electronic form using PDF format. All files will be bookmarked as their hard-copy counterpart would be provided divisions. Disks will be clearly labeled with table of contents presented on the Disk Label. PDF files will be made searchable. Where product information is scanned, scanned copies will be in color. In an effort to provide clear and easily read documents, cut sheets shall derived from electronic files and not scanned. Provide 4 complete sets of Operations and Maintenance Manuals in the compact disk format. EMERGENCY MANUALS Content: Organize manual into a separate section for type of emergency, emergency instructions, and emergency procedures. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component for fire flood gas leak water leak power failure water outage equipment failure and chemical release or spill. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type of emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits, and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. OPERATION MANUALS Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements. Descriptions: Include the following: Product name and model number. Manufacturer's name. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. Equipment function. Operating characteristics. Limiting conditions. Performance curves. Engineering data and tests. ONOARWN> 0178 23-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 78 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.4 2.5 09603 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: Product name and model number. Manufacturer's name. Color, pattern, and texture. Material and chemical composition. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. OARON> Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and maintenance, and repair instructions. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers’ maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. Manufacturers’ Maintenance Documentation: | Manufacturers’ maintenance documentation including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of 01 78 23 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 78 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA equipment: Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide, disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions, and demonstration and training videotape if available, that detail essential maintenance procedures: Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers’ maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. E. F. MANUAL PREPARATION Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Manufacturers’ Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers’ standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers’ printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01 78 23 09603 01 78 23 -4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 78 39 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. Cc. 1.2 A. B. SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Product Data. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. SUBMITTALS Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. 09603 RECORD DRAWINGS Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. a Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2) Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. a. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." 01 78 39-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 01 78 39 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.2 A. 2.3 A. d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. RECORD PRODUCT DATA Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. Cc. RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. Submit to Engineer one clean, legible, and orderly set of project record documents prior to substantial completion. END OF SECTION 01 78 39 09603 0178 39-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 03 30 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL a0 A. B. 1.2 Cc. 1.3 A. B. Cc. SUMMARY This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. See Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Shop Drawings: For steel reinforcement and formwork. Material certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. a Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. 2.2 A. B. Cc. 09603 FORM-FACING MATERIALS Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. STEEL REINFORCEMENT Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports 03 30 00 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 03 30 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 09603 from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." CONCRETE MATERIALS Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: A Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type Ill. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTMC 33, graded, 3/4-inch nominal maximum coarse- aggregate size. a Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type Il. OaARWN> VAPOR RETARDERS Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape. CURING MATERIALS Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. Water: Potable. RELATED MATERIALS Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. CONCRETE MIXTURES Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 03 30 00 -2 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 03 30 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. 2.8 A. 2.9 A. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: it Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2: Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 4-7 percent. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent. FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." CONCRETE MIXING Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information. it When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 09603 FORMWORK Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. EMBEDDED ITEMS Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. VAPOR RETARDERS Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. STEEL REINFORCEMENT General: Comply with CRS|'s "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1, Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. JOINTS General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 03 30 00 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 03 30 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. 3.6 3.7 3.8 09603 Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2 Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. CONCRETE PLACEMENT Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. un Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. FINISHING FORMED SURFACES Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. A! Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and 03 30 00-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 03 30 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.9 3.10 3.11 finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot-long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch. CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 09603 03 30 00 -5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 05 12 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. 1.3 1.4 A. B. Cc. D. SUMMARY This Section includes structural steel. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand [ASD-service] [LRFD] loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design," Volume 2, Part 9. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. Welding certificates. Mill test reports. Source quality-control test reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AlSC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code- -Steel." Comply with applicable provisions of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 > moo 8 09603 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 0512 00-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 05 12 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA F. 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 09603 Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. ie Configuration: Straight. 2. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight. Le Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. PRIMER Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type ll, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. FABRICATION Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." SHOP CONNECTIONS High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. SHOP PRIMING Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1: Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. Surfaces to be field welded. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Galvanized surfaces. aAPon Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 05 1200-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 05 12 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Comply with testing and inspection requirements of Part 3, Article "Field Quality Control." B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. Cc. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Examination: Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. a Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." C. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base plates. Clean bottom surface of base plates. a Set base plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base plate. D. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.2 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. de Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1: Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 09603 05 12 00-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 05 12 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.3 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTME 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. Cc. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 05 12 00 09603 05 1200-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 05 53 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL GRATINGS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. B. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Metal bar gratings. 2. Formed-metal plank gratings. 3. Metal frames and supports for gratings. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance of Gratings: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Floors: Uniform load of 125 Ibf/sq. ft or concentrated load of 2000 Ibf, whichever produces the greater stress. 2: Walkways and Elevated Platforms Used as Exits: Uniform load of 100 Ibf/sq. ft. Seismic Performance: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. Formed-metal plank gratings. 2. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. 3. Paint products. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of gratings. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. QUALITY ASSURANCE Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. 09603 MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Metal Bar Gratings: Alabama Metal Industries Corporation. All American Grating, Inc. Barnett/Bates Corp. Borden Metal Products (Canada) Limited. Fisher & Ludlow. Grupo Metelmex, S.A. de C.V. IKG Industries; a Harsco Company. a-geaocD 05 53 00-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 05 53 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL GRATINGS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 09603 Ohio Gratings, Inc. Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc. k. Tru-Weld. h. Marwas Steel Co.; Laurel Steel Products Division. i. j. METALS Ferrous Metals: dt Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510. 3. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30. 4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 , with G90 coating. FASTENERS General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. Anchors: Provide anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. FABRICATION Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field. METAL BAR GRATINGS Welded Steel Grating: al Bearing Bar Spacing: 1-3/16 inches o.c. 2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1-1/4 inches. 3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 1/8 inch or as required to comply with structural performance requirements. 4. Crossbar Spacing: 4 inches o.c. 5. Traffic Surface: Serrated. 6 Steel Finish: Shop primed. 05 53 00-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 05 53 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL GRATINGS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. Cc. Dz. 27 A. B. 2.8 Cc. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation. GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. fa Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete with integrally welded anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long. Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations: Ag Exterior. 2. Interior, where indicated. STEEL FINISHES Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 09603 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 05 53 00-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 05 53 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL GRATINGS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA E. Metal Bar Gratings: Comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details. 1. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown. 2. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above. Formed-Metal Plank Gratings: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing gratings. Use manufacturer's standard anchor clips and hold-down devices for bolted connections. 1. Attach removable units to supporting members by bolting at every point of contact. 2. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size and spacing of welds. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05 53 00 09603 05 53 00-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 05 55 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL FABRICATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 05 55 00 - METAL FABRICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 SUMMARY A. Section includes steel pipe, railings, metal ladders and catwalk. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. (0.73 KN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (0.89 KN) applied in any direction. Cc. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. Cc. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings, ladders and catwalk. 2) Railing brackets. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Cc. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 09603 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: un Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Pisor Industries, Inc. b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 2. Catwalk: a. McNichols Company 05 5500-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 05 55 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL FABRICATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.02 2.03 2.04 2.05 09603 METALS, GENERAL A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. STEEL AND IRON A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide the following: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488. Cc. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. D. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. F. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. G. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. H. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Vinyl wash primer complying with MPI#80. I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. Cc. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. fq Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 05 5500-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 05 55 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL FABRICATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.06 2.07 2.08 09603 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. Non-welded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. ln At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers to transfer loads through wall finishes. STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings (1-1/4” O.D.): 1. Hot-dip galvanized exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Hot-dip galvanized indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 3. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 4. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. METAL LADDERS A. General: Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails 16 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous % x 2-1/2 inch steel flat bars with eased edges. 3. Rungs: 3/4” diameter steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide non-slip surfaces on top of each run, either by coating rung with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum oxide grout. 6. Provide non-slip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung. a Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 8. Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fastners. CATWALK A. Grating: 1. Bearing bar spacing: a. Span: 4-0”. 05 5500-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 05 55 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL FABRICATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA b. Size: 1-1/4" x %". c. Pattern: 4” x 1-3/16”" 2. Galvanize walk-on deck: brackets, fasteners, clamps. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 3.02 09603 INSTALLATION A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1m). Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3 m). On Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset metal pipe sleeves and grouting annular space. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used]. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements. 4. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05 55 00 05 5500-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 06 10 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 09603 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Rough carpentry includes work not specified as part of other sections and is generally not exposed, unless otherwise noted. B. Work included, but not limited to: in Wood furring, nailers and blocking for securing work specified in other sections. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Sections of Division 01 B. Section 09 91 00 — Non-Structural Metal Framing Cc. Section 09 91 00 — Painting REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. A. Federal Specification, specific issues as called for. B. American Plywood Association (APA) 1. APA PS-1 Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood Cc. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLB) Us WCLB Standard Grading Rules SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. Cc. Certification of Wood Preservative Treatment: Submit certification in approved form, stating that the treated material conforms to requirements of AWPB Standards LP-2-80 or LP-3-78. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant treated wood product through one source from a single producer. 06 1000-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 06 10 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood and other panels. Place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Factory mark each piece of panel material with the official grade mark of the appropriate association or authorized inspection service under whose rules the material is identified. Cc. Provide standard commercial quality of nails, spikes, bolts, screws, clips, and miscellaneous parts necessary to draw and hold members rigidly and permanently in place. 2.02 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Telephone and Electrical Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire- retardant treated, in thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than % inch (12.7mm) thick. B. Oriented-Strand-Board: 1. Exposure 1 sheathing 2. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 3. Thickness: Not less than %2” (13 mm). Cc. Plywood 1. Interior softwood plywood per PS 1 with exterior glue of at least C-D grade unless higher grades are indicated on Drawings. 2. All plywood shall be grade-marked or identified with appropriate grade trademark of the American Plywood Association. Thickness and minimum sheathing panel identification index per Drawings and per approved submittals. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch minimum if not indicated otherwise on Drawings. 4. Identification Index: 32/16 or greater span allowance. 5. Moisture Content: 15 percent maximum. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1; Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Blocking. 3. Cants. 4. Nailers. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. 2.04 TREATED WOOD A. Preservative Treated Wood: 1. Wood embedded in or in contact with concrete, masonry, or plaster, and wood plates, cants, cleats, curbs and nailing strips in connection with roofing, and flashing. 09603 06 1000-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 06 10 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.05 B. 2) Lumber and plywood requiring preservative treatment shall be treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2 or LP-3. Wood treated with oil-borne preservatives shall be clean, free from surface oil, and properly seasoned for use in building construction. Wood treated with water-borne preservatives shall be air-dried or kiln-dried to the moisture content specified for lumber and marked with the word "Dry". 3. As far as practicable, all items shall be cut to correct size prior to treatment. Wherever field cutting or drilling, treat all cut ends, edges, etc. in accordance with AWPB N-4. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: 1. Treat all wood blocking and backing with wood that has been kiln-dried to a maximum of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood and pressure- treated with fire retardant chemicals that meet UL’s FRS ratings requirements and also meet AWPA Standards C20 and C27 for Type A use. All such wood shall bear UL’s label or stamp attesting to the above. ANCHORS, FASTENERS AND MISCELLANEOUS A. @ 9 2 m Select fastener type, grade, and class best suited for its purpose, unless otherwise indicated. All items galvanized. Bolts, Nuts, Studs, Rivets: FS FF-B-571 and FF-B-575. Lag Screws and Bolts: FS FF-B-561. Nails: FS FF-N-105. Hot dip galvanized for general exterior. Toggle Units: FS FF-B-588. Powder Driven Connector: All wood to steel, wood to masonry or concrete, sheet metal to steel, and sheet metal to masonry or concrete connections, unless otherwise shown, shall be made with Ramset drive pins or approved equal, with spacing not more than 2'- 8" 0.c. Use following sizes: 2x to structural steel #3345, full 2" to block/concrete #3330, sheet metal to structural steel #2326 or #2327, sheet metal to concrete or block #3336 or approved equal manufacturer's recommended sizes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 09603 GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that might impair the quality of the work, and units which are too small to fabricate the work with minimum joints or the optimum joint arrangement. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, clips, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow proper attachment or other work. Set work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. Securely attach work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Counter-sink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill 06 10 00-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 06 10 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA holes. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required. 3.02 WOOD CURBS A. Provide in sizes detailed for roof mounted items. 3.03 WOOD BLOCKING, NAILERS, SLEEPERS, GROUNDS AND CANTS A. Provide blocking/nailers for all surface-mounted items shown or called for such as coat hooks, hardware, specialties, etc. or attachment of other work and wherever shown. Form to shapes required and/or shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. Counter-sink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. END OF SECTION 06 10 00 09603 06 1000-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 14 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 07 14 00 - FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section. SUMMARY A. The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Fluid applied waterproofing system. 2. Protection board. B. Related Sections: Other specification sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Section 03 33 00 — Cast-in-place Concrete REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The following standards and publications are applicable to extent referenced in the text. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C836 Standard Specification for High Solids, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course. 2. C898 Standard Guide for Use of High Solids Content, Cold-Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane with Separate Wearing Course 3. D412 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension 4. D903 Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds 5. D3767 Standard Practice for Rubber - Measurements of Dimensions SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations. B. Samples: Submit representative samples of the following for approval: 1. Fluid applied membrane 2. Protection board QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A firm which has at least three years experience in work of the type required by this Section. B. Materials: Fluid applied waterproofing material shall be two part synthetic rubber based system free of isocyanates and bitumen. For each type of material required for the work of this Section, provide primary materials which are the products of one manufacturer. 07 1400-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 14 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.06 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. B. Deliver materials and products in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and material safety data sheets. Protect from damage from sunlight, weather, excessive temperatures, and construction operations. Remove damaged material from the site and dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations. 1. Do not double stack pallets of waterproofing on the job site. Provide cover on top and all sides, allowing for adequate ventilation. 2. Protect waterproofing materials from freezing. In cool temperatures, store the material for several hours at room temperature to facilitate mixing and application. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits established by the manufacturer of the materials and products used. Proceed with installation only when substrate construction and preparation work is complete and in condition to receive membrane waterproofing. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 09603 MATERIALS A. Basis of Design: Procor ® fluid applied waterproofing membranes by Grace Construction Products; a two part, self-curing, synthetic rubber based material. Procor ° fluid applied membranes meet or exceed the performance requirements of ASTM C 836 and other ASTM standards as shown in the following table or equal. Waterproofing Membrane Physical Properties: _ Property Test Method Typical Value _ _ Color ; TerraCotta. Cured Film Thickness __ASTM D 3767 Method A_ | 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) nominal Solids Content ASTM D 1644 100% Flexibility, 180° bend over ASTM D 1970 Unaffected 25 mm (1 in.) mandrel at 32° _C(-25°F) _ Elongation ASTM D 412 500% minimum Peel Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D 903 Modified ' __880 N/m (5 Ibs./in.) 07 1400-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 14 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. Protection Board: is Asphalt Hardboard: A premolded semi-rigid protection board consisting of bitumen, mineral core and reinforcement. Provide 3 mm (0.125 in.) thick hardboard on horizontal surfaces not receiving steel reinforced slab. Where steel reinforcing bars are to be used, apply two layers of 3 mm (0.125 in.) thick hardboard or one layer of 6 mm (0.25 in.) thick hardboard. 2. Expanded Polystyrene Protection Board: 25 mm (1 in.) thick for vertical applications with the following characteristics: a. Normal Density: 16 kg/m® (1.0 Ib/ft®) b. Thermal Conductivity, K factor: 0.24 at 5°C (40°F), 0.26 at 24° C (75°F) c. Thermal Resistance, R-Value: 4 per 25 mm (1 in.) of thickness. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The installer shall examine conditions of substrates and other conditions under which this work is to be performed and notify the contractor, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until satisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBTRATES A. Refer to manufacturer's literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall be structurally sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods which are acceptable to manufacturer of the fluid applied waterproofing. B. Concrete Substrates: fl: Waterproofing application may commence as soon as the substrate can accept foot traffic. Surface shall be free of any visible water. 2. Repair bugholes over 13 mm (0.5 in) in length and 6 mm (0.25 in) deep and finish flush with surrounding surface. 3. Remove scaling to sound, unaffected concrete and repair exposed area. 4 Grind irregular construction joints to suitable flush surface. Cc. Related Materials: Treat joints and install flashing as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to manufacturer's literature for recommendations on installation, including but not limited to, the following: A Apply minimum 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) in all areas to be waterproofed. Apply minimum 3 mm (0.120 in) in all detail areas. 2. If area to be waterproofed is in direct sunlight and temperature is rising, apply “scratch coat” (a think application of fluid applied waterproofing) prior to the full application of the waterproofing membrane. 3. In applications where a minimum slope of 11 mm/m (0.13 in./ft) cannot be achieved, a two coat application of Procor membrane is recommended to achieve the total thickness. 4. Apply protection board and related materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 09603 07 1400-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 14 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove any masking materials after installation. Clean any stains on materials which would be exposed in the completed work. B. Protect completed membrane waterproofing from subsequent construction activities as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 07 14 00 09603 07 1400-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 21 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BOARD INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 07 21 13 - BOARD INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 SECTION INCLUDES A. Applications of insulation specified herein include rigid insulation for building foundation thermal insulation. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry. B. Section 09 22 16, Non Structural Metal Framing REFERENCES The most recently published standards of the following organizations are referenced herein by their acronym: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in conformance with Section 01 33 00. B. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation required. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Thermal Conductivity: Thicknesses shown are for thermal conductivity (K-value at 75 degrees F or 24 degrees C) specified for each material. Provide adjusted thicknesses as directed for equivalent use of material having a different thermal conductivity. Where insulation is identified by "R" value, provide appropriate thickness. PRODUCT HANDLING A. Conform to the requirements of Section 01 66 00. B. Do not allow insulation material to become wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 09603 FOUNDATION INSULATION A. Rigid Board Stock: Extruded or expanded polystyrene (EPS) per ASTM C578 conforming to the following requirements: 1. Minimum thermal resistance “R” for 1 inch: 4.5 at 25 degrees F per ASTM C177 or ASTM C518. 2. Minimum compressive resistance: Less than 10 percent deformation under 15 psi uniform loading per ASTM D1621. 07 2113-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 21 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BOARD INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3. Maximum water absorption: 3 percent by volume after 24 hours after immersion per ASTM C272. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with fire-resistance requirements. Mechanical Anchors: Stick clips as recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate. Base Flashing: For protection of top of foundation insulation provide continuous skirting, fabricated from 20 gage steel sheet complying with ASTM A527, hot dip galvanized with G90 coating complying with ASTM A525. Machine form to 2-1/2 inches by 1/2 inch by 18 inches Z-shape as shown. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01. RIGID INSULATION A. 09603 Set units in adhesive applied in conformance with manufacturer's instructions. Use type adhesive recommended by manufacturer of insulation. Install rigid insulation in a uniform and continuous manner to provide a homogenous installation. Place insulation over uniform, level fill with minimum voids. Backfill over insulation with care to not damage insulation. Joints: Butt tight, tape or foam tight all joint voids. Replace cracked/split insulation that may permit cold/moisture transfer. END OF SECTION 07 21 13 07 2113-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 21 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BOARD INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 07 21 13 - BOARD INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 SECTION INCLUDES A. Applications of insulation specified herein include rigid insulation for building foundation thermal insulation. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry. B. Section 09 22 16, Non Structural Metal Framing REFERENCES The most recently published standards of the following organizations are referenced herein by their acronym: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in conformance with Section 01 33 00. B. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation required. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Thermal Conductivity: Thicknesses shown are for thermal conductivity (K-value at 75 degrees F or 24 degrees C) specified for each material. Provide adjusted thicknesses as directed for equivalent use of material having a different thermal conductivity. Where insulation is identified by "R" value, provide appropriate thickness. PRODUCT HANDLING A. Conform to the requirements of Section 01 66 00. B. Do not allow insulation material to become wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 09603 FOUNDATION INSULATION A. Rigid Board Stock: Extruded or expanded polystyrene (EPS) per ASTM C578 conforming to the following requirements: fl Minimum thermal resistance “R” for 1 inch: 4.5 at 25 degrees F per ASTM C177 or ASTM C518. iy Minimum compressive resistance: Less than 10 percent deformation under 15 psi uniform loading per ASTM D1621. 07 2113-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 21 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BOARD INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.02 3. Maximum water absorption: 3 percent by volume after 24 hours after immersion per ASTM C272. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with fire-resistance requirements. Mechanical Anchors: Stick clips as recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate. Base Flashing: For protection of top of foundation insulation provide continuous skirting, fabricated from 20 gage steel sheet complying with ASTM A527, hot dip galvanized with G90 coating complying with ASTM A525. Machine form to 2-1/2 inches by 1/2 inch by 18 inches Z-shape as shown. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 09603 RIGID INSULATION A. Set units in adhesive applied in conformance with manufacturer's instructions. Use type adhesive recommended by manufacturer of insulation. Install rigid insulation in a uniform and continuous manner to provide a homogenous installation. Place insulation over uniform, level fill with minimum voids. Backfill over insulation with care to not damage insulation. Joints: Butt tight, tape or foam tight all joint voids. Replace cracked/split insulation that may permit cold/moisture transfer. END OF SECTION 07 21 13 07 2113-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 25 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT WEATHER BARRIERS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 09603 SECTION 07 25 00 - WEATHER BARRIERS SECTION INCLUDES A. Weather barrier membrane B. Seam Tape Cc. Flashing D. Fasteners REFERENCES A. ASTM International: ft ASTM C920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM C1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 4. ASTM D1117; Standard guide for Evaluating Non-woven Fabrics 5. ASTM E84; Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 6. ASTM E96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 7. ASTM E1677; Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building Walls 8. ASTM E2178; Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in conformance with Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's current technical literature for each component. Cc. Samples: Weather Barrier Membrane, minimum 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches. D Quality Assurance Submittals: A Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements. 2. Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: au Installer shall have experience with installation of weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer's installation guidelines and recommendations. 3. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer. 07 2500-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 25 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT WEATHER BARRIERS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.05 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer’s original unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: ‘1. Special weather-barrier manufacturer's warranty for weather barrier assembly for a period of ten (10) years from date of final weather barrier installation. 2. Approval by weather barrier manufacturer for warranty is required prior to assembly installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 2.02 09603 WEATHER BARRIER A. A non-perforated, non-woven, non-absorbing, breathable membrane that resists air flow, bulk water and wind driven rain and channels water and moisture to the outside of the building envelope. It has microscopic pores that allow moisture vapor to escape from inside walls. B. Physical Properties 1. Spunbonded polyolefin membrane. Cc. Performance Characteristics: 1. Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft? at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type 1 per ASTM E1677. ra Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B. 3. Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 280 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. 4. Basis Weight: Minimum 2.7 oz/yd’, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410. 5. Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460. 6. Tensile Strength: Minimum 38/35 Ibs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A. 7. Tear Resistance: 12/10 Ibs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flame Spread: 10, Smoke Developed: 10. ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape: As recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer. B. Fasteners: Steel Frame Construction. 1-5/8 inch rust resistant screw with 2-inch diameter plastic cap or manufacturer approved 1-1/4” or 2” metal gasketed washer. Cc. Sealants: Provide sealants that comply with ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions as recommended by manufacturer with low VOC. D. Adhesives: Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 07 2500-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 25 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT WEATHER BARRIERS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA E: Flashing: Flexible membrane flashing materials for door openings and penetrations recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 -— EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories. 3.02 INSTALLATION —- WEATHER BARRIER A. Install weather barrier over exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Install weather barrier prior to installation of doors. Start weather barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level. Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings. Overlap weather barrier: 1. Exterior corners: minimum 12 inches. 2. Seams: minimum 6 inches. Weather Barrier Attachment: Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, space 12-18 inches vertically on center along stud line and 24 inches on center, maximum horizontally. 3.03 SEAMING A. B. Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 3.06 PROTECTION A. 09603 Protect installed weather barrier from damage. END OF SECTION 07 25 00 07 2500-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 26 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VAPOR RETARDER DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 07 26 00 - VAPOR RETARDER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Extent of surfaces to receive vapor retarder is shown on Drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 33 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete B. Section 13 34 19 — Metal Building Systems 1.03 REFERENCES The most recently published standards of the following organizations are referenced herein by their acronym: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTME 154-99 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs. 2. ASTM E 96095 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in conformance with Section 01 33 00. B. Submit manufacturer's specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Extremely low permeance vapor barriers for critically sensitive, low permeance floor coverings. Includes floor coverings of rubber, vinyl, urethane, epoxy and methyl methacrylate, as well as linoleum and wood. 1. Vapor Barrier must have the following qualities - Minimum WVTR as tested by ASTM E96 of 0.008 2. Vapor Barriers (under slab) — 10 mil thick polyethlene 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: A spray-on adhesive, as recommended by 3M, with a low VOC. B. Sealing Film: A transfer tape, as recommended by 3M, with a low VOC. Cc. Tape: A press-on tape, as recommended by 3M, with a low VOC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install Vapor Barrier/Retarder: 09603 07 2600-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 26 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VAPOR RETARDER DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Al Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and ASTM E 1643-98. a. Lap Vapor Barrier/Retarder over footings and seal to foundation walls. b. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape. c. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer's instructions. d. No penetration of the Vapor Barrier/Retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. e. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of Vapor Barrier/Retarder, 09603 overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape. Coordinate installation of vapor retarder with installation of concrete slab. Apply the vapor retarder material with all joints lapped a minimum of 6 inches. Apply this minimum lapping to all areas where the vapor retarder material unites with itself. Set-in and seal joints and laps with tape. Where pipes, conduits, wiring, or outlet boxes, and the like, penetrate the vapor retarder the penetration and retarder shall be sealed vapor tight. After the vapor retarder is installed and sealed with the specified tape cover the vapor retarder with a 2 inch wide band of sealing film with the vapor retarder mastic specified herein. The completed installation, sealing and coating shall be such as to eliminate the possibility of moisture vapor flow. After installation and prior to installing concrete slab, the vapor retarder installation shall be thoroughly inspected prior to concealment; any break, rupture, tear or failure to provide a positive vapor retarder seal shall brought to the attention of the Architect and Owner. END OF SECTION 07 26 00 07 2600-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 92 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Latex joint sealants. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required. Cc. Warranties. WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 09603 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTMC920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. 07 9200-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 92 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. 2.02 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one of the following: BASF Building Systems. Dow Corning Corporation. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. May National Associates, Inc. Pecora Corporation. Polymeric Systems, Inc. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. i. Tremco Incorporated. Type: Single component (S). Grade: nonsag (NS). Class: 100/50. Uses Related to Exposure: Non-traffic (NT). “sa>ga9T9 Oahw 2.03 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: BASF Building Systems. Bostik, Inc. May National Associates, Inc. Pecora Corporation. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. Tremco Incorporated. >~paocD 2.04 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. 09603 07 9200-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 92 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. ae Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. 09603 Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below 07 9200-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 07 92 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 09603 to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 07 9200-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 08 11 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details. Cc. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2 Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3 Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Firedoor Corporation. 7 Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8 Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Kewanee Corporation (The). 10. Mesker Door Inc. 11. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 12. Security Metal Products Corp. 13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 14. Windsor Republic Doors. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B. Cc. Frame Anchors: ASTMA591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 09603 08 1113-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 08 11 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type |. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15- mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. 2.03 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. Thermal-Rated (insulated) Doors: R-value of not less than 12.3° F x h x sq. ft./Btu (2.166 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from sheet steel. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). Cc. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6. 2.04 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as knocked down unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet. 4. Exterior Frames: Thermally broken 5. Exterior Frames: Insulated Cc. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6. 2.05 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 09603 08 1113-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 08 11 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.06 FABRICATION A. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. Hollow Metal Doors: fa Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 2) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. b. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface- mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDIA250.6 and ANSI/ DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 2.07 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. 09603 Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1 Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 08 1113-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 08 11 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA b. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. d. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. e. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. Cc. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. END OF SECTION 08 11 13 09603 08 1113-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 08 36 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SECTIONAL DOORS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 08 36 16 - SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. The work of this Section includes upward-acting sectional doors. B. Related Sections: Other specification sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Section 05 50 00 — Metal Fabrication 2. Section 09 91 21 — Painting 3. Division 26 - Electrical, Wiring 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for each type of sectional door. Include both published data and any specific data prepared for this project. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, required clearances, anchors and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Sectional doors shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of sectional doors. Manufacturers proposed for use, which are not named in these specifications, shall submit evidence of ability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list of five projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five years. B. Installer: Installation of sectional doors shall be performed by the authorized representative of the manufacturer. Cc! Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors and accessories from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components. D. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application. E. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. 09603 08 36 16-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 08 36 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SECTIONAL DOORS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.05 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 4! Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 2.02 09603 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Upwardor Corp., 8025 Lawson Road, Milton, Ontario, Canada, or comparable product by one of the following: 1 Amarr Garage Doors 2 Arm-R-Lite 3 C.H.1. OverheadDoors 4. Clopay Building Products; a Griffon Company 5. Fimbel Architectural Door Specialties 6 General American Door Company 7 Haas Door; a Nofziger Company 8 Martin Door Manufacturing 9. Overhead Door Corporation 10. Raynor 11. Rite-Hite Corporation 12. Wayne Dalton Corp 13. Windsor Republic Doors INSULATED STEEL SECTIONAL DOORS A. B. Trade Reference: ‘Upwardor’ Model TX-420-20. Sectional Door Assembly: Metal/foam/metal sandwich panel construction, with EPDM thermal break and ship-lap design. Units shall have the following characteristics: i. Panel Thickness: 1-3/4”. Exterior Surface: Flush, stucco embossed. Exterior Steel: 20-gauge, hot-dipped galvanized End Stiles: 16-gauge Counter Balance: 15,000 life cycles) Insulation: CFC-free and HCFC-free polyurethane, continuous Thermal Values: R-value of 16.3, U-value of 0.06 Air Infiltration: 0.08 cfm at 15 mph; 0.13 cfm at 25 mph DNOARWN Finish and Color: Two coat baked-on polyester with white exterior and white interior color. 08 36 16-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 08 36 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SECTIONAL DOORS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA D. Windload Design: ANSI/DASMA 102 standards and as required by code. = Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. Ball bearing rollers with hardened steel races. F. Lock: Interior mounted slide lock (Keyed lock). G. Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber bulb-type strip at bottom. (Header seal and jamb weatherstripping). H. Tracks: Standard lift on 16’-0” doors, full vertical on 10’-0” door. I. Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, NEMA 4, Model H, single phase, % HP, adjustable friction clutch. 1. Entrapment Protection: Pneumatic sensing edge up to 18’ wide. 2. Operator Controls: Push button operated control stations with open, close and stop buttons for surface mounting for interior location. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Take field dimensions and examine conditions of substrates, supports and other conditions under which this work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for maintenance. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test sectional doors for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without binding or distortion. B. Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage. Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material or product being cleaned. END OF SECTION 08 36 16 09603 08 36 16-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 08 71 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Work under this section includes the finish hardware requirements for the project. Hardware schedule is based on hollow metal doors and frames. Quantities listed are for the contractor's convenience and are not guaranteed. Items not specifically mentioned, but necessary to complete the work, shall be furnished, matching the items specified in quality and finish. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 11 13 — Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/BHMA A156.18 — Materials and Finishes B. Underwriters Laboratories — Building Materials Index Cc. Underwriters Laboratories Test Standard UL 10C-98 — Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies. D. WHI-Intertek-Building Material Index. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General Requirements: All Submittals shall be in accordance with Division 01 “Submittal Procedures.” B. Product Data: Submit Six (6) copies of manufacturer's data for each item of finish hardware. Cc. Hardware Schedule. fl Submit six (6) copies of a detailed Finish Hardware Schedule. The submitted Finish Hardware Schedule shall indicate the complete designation of every item required for each door or opening. List each opening individually under separate headings. Do not continue individual headings on separate pages. Each heading shall include Architect's door number, openings location, handing, degree of opening, door size, door type, fire rating, door and frame material. 2 Owner will review and approve final submittal. 3. Review of hardware schedule does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to fulfill project requirements in accordance with Contract Documents. D. Revisions: The Finish Hardware Submittal shall be kept current throughout the project duration. All revisions incorporated shall be submitted in accordance with the above requirements. Submit only cover sheet and revised pages. All revisions shall clearly identify changes from previous submittal content. E. Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit one (1) sample of each exposed hardware category, finished as required, tagged with full description for coordination with the hardware schedule. The Architect will review samples for design and finish only. Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of the General Contractor. Units 09603 08 7100-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 08 71 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08 09603 that are acceptable and remain undamaged through the submittal process may be used on the project. F. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit Maintenance and Operation manuals under provisions of Division 01 “Closeout Procedures.” 2. Manuals shall contain final copies of the Finish Hardware Submittal, Product Date, Templates, Key Schedule, Installation Instructions and Product Warranties. G. Templates: Furnish hardware templates for fabricators of doors, frames and other work to be factory prepared for hardware. Upon request, check shop drawings of such other work to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware. QUALITY CONTROL A. Supplier: 1. Finish hardware shall be supplied by recognized builders' hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the same area as the project for not less than 2 years. The supplier's organization shall include an individual sufficiently skilled in all matters concerning builder's hardware, and who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work to meet with the Owner or Contractor for project hardware consultation, at the Owner's place of business. 2. Hardware submittal is to be prepared by an AHC certified individual for review and approval by the Owner prior to purchasing. Final keying is to be coordinated with the Owner. B. Installer: 1. Finish hardware shall be installed only by experienced tradesmen either at the door and frame fabrication plant or at the project site. Cc. Codes: 1. All finish hardware shall comply with current applicable local and/or state building codes. PERMANENT KEYING AND BITTING A. All cylinders shall be (Best 7 pin interchangeable) (Schlage 6 pin standard) (Schlage 6 pin interchangeable) core and keyed into the existing factory registered Grand Master key system with a restricted keyway. PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Packaging: 1. Each item or package is to be separately tagged with identification related to final hardware schedule. 2. Detailed installation instructions shall be included. GUARANTEE A. Finish hardware shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship and operation for a period of one (1) year, backed by a factory guarantee of the hardware manufacture. The following products shall be guaranteed for period beyond one (1) year: 08 7100- 2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 2. 2.01 2.02 2.03 2.04 2.05 09603 Locks — 2 years Door Closers — 10 years PRODUCTS ABBREVIATIONS ABH BBW BE GJ LCN MC OL PE RI ED Sc ST vo NO PR LN MA FINISH A. FASTENERS A. B. BUTTS A. B. D. Architectural Builders Hardware Builders Brass Works Best Access Systems. Glynn-Johnson. LCN Door Closers. McKinney. Olympus Lock Pemko Mfg. Rixon Edwards. Schlage. Stanley. Von Duprin. Norton Door Closers Precision Hardware Inc. Locknetics Marks Finish in general to be US26D, except: Where specifically noted differently. Closers: SRI Prime/Al or powder coat Locksets: US32d, satin stainless steel Sleeve anchors may be substituted. Manufacturer listed: Lawrence. All hinges shall have non-removable pins (NRP) set-screw in barrel. LOCKSETS (MORTISE) A. Manufacturer listed: Schlage L-9000 series. 087100- 3 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE All hardware screws shall be Phillips head, and all surface type hardware on doors shall be thru-bolted with "shoulder" type bolts on all doors. Acceptable substitutions: McKinney, Architectural Control Systems (ACS). Quantity: 1-1/2 pair up to and including 90" in height and/or 36" in width unless noted otherwise: 3 pair over 90" in height and/or 36" in width. 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 08 71 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. Acceptable substitutions: Best 40H series. Cc. Design: L-Stand/O6L with abrasive at “hazardous” room locations. D. Backset: 2-3/4" 2.06 LOCKSETS (CYLINDRICAL) A. Manufacturer listed: Marks 195 Series. B. Backset: 2-3/4", 3-3/4” or 5” 2.07 CYLINDERS A. Manufacturer same as lockset. B. Type that will accept “SFIC”. 2.08 CORES A. Manufacturer listed: Best Access Systems, 7 pin, interchangeable core. Provide typically with all locksets and as listed. B. Acceptable substitutions: None. 2.09 STOPS, HOLDERS AND MISCELLANEOUS A. Manufacturer listed: Ives. B. Acceptable substitutions: ABH, Builders Brass, Rockwood. Cc. Overhead stops are not to be used. D. Set doors to open 180 degrees and use floor or wall stops. 2.010 KEYING A. All cylinders/cores shall be keyed into the building masterkey system. B. All cylinders are to be provided with brass construction cores Cc. All cores shall be stamped with the applicable key mark for identification. These visual key control marks shall be stamped on the side of each core by the manufacturer (Best Access Systems). 1. Key Quantities: Three (3) keys for each keyed lock. D. All change keys, master keys, control keys, and construction/control keys via registered mail, return receipt requested to: Delta Greely School District. E. Send all construction master keys directly to the General Contractor. 09603 08 7100- 4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 08 71 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 3. EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Contractor to provide solid blocking for all wall stops and other wall mounted items. Report to Owner's Representative if missing. B. Fasteners: Check all conditions and use fastening devices as needed to securely anchor all hardware per manufacturer's templates. Self-tapping sheet metal screws are not acceptable. See 2.03 above for required type of fasteners. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Except as indicated below, mount units at heights listed in “Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (2006) by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). Products not specifically mentioned shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's templates and instructions. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware on surfaces, which will be painted or finished at a later time, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place. After completion of finishes, reinstall. 2. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed. Cc. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace any unit that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. D. Install door closers so that doors open fully to the maximum degree possible. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT A. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy, make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy. 1. Clean and lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. 2. Adjust door control devices to compensate for ambient conditions at final operation of heating and ventilating systems. 3. Interior door closers shall be adjusted to require not more than 5 pounds of force to open to meet ADA. However, if they are fire rated doors, the requirement for closing and latching may necessitate greater force and therefore, takes precedence over ADA. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes. 09603 08 7100-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 08 71 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.04 HARDWARE GROUPS A. Exterior, single leaf, out-swing 1. Butts MC TB2314 1 each Lockset SC L9060L 1 each Threshold PE 252X3AFG 1 each Door Bottom PE412CRL 1 pair Jamb Gaskets PE45041 1 each Head Gasket PES44D 1 each Lock Protector GJLP10 1 each Stop GJF20X or W20X (if not feasible use GJ104H US32D) END OF SECTION 08 71 00 09603 08 7100-6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 09 22 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior assemblies. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Evaluation Reports: For steel studs and runners, from ICC-ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1; Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180). Cc. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use steel studs and runners. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.035 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on the Drawings. D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: iv Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 inch deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2, Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. 4) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 09603 09 22 16-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 09 22 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 5) Telling Industries. Ee! Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. i Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.045 inch. 2.02 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1 Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, furnishings, or similar construction. Cc. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 3.03 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. Cc. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. 09603 09 2216-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 09 22 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. D. Direct Furring: i Screw to metal framing. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 09 22 16 09603 09 22 16-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 09 91 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INTERIOR PAINTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. This Section includes all labor and material necessary and incidental to the execution of all painting and finishing indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. B. It is the intent of this Section to provide finish for all interior materials, new or existing, factory primed or unfinished, or both, unless specifically stated as not requiring finish. Omission of specific surfaces from Schedule of Finishes or Finish Schedule is NOT to be interpreted to mean the finish is not required. Cc. Painting is required on mechanical and electrical equipment, exposed to public view, and the like. See Divisions 22, 23 and 26 and Mechanical and Electrical Drawings for extent. D. No finish required on items having complete factory finish, or copper, aluminum, stainless steel, bronze, or brass, unless specifically called for on the Drawings or Schedule of Fin- ishes specified herein. RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. B: Division 08 Sections for factory priming doors with primers specified in this Section. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. Cc. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2 Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. Di Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 09 9123-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 09 91 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INTERIOR PAINTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.05 1.06 1.07 3. VOC content. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 2.02 09603 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Pittsburgh Paints is the basis for design and color selection colors. Other manufacturers are acceptable: Benjamin Moore & Co. ICI Paints. Kelly-Moore Paints. Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). APON> B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated. PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. Cc. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC 09 91 23-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 09 91 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INTERIOR PAINTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.03 limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. NOAPhWN> Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services’ "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Match Architect's samples. PRIMERS/SEALERS A. B. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 3.02 09603 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Cc. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 09 91 23-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 09 91 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INTERIOR PAINTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in “MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. Cc. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.05 © CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. Cc. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. 09603 09 91 23-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 09 91 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INTERIOR PAINTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.06 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. It is not the intent of this Schedule to state in detail each surface to receive finish. It is intended only as a general guide. Omission of any surface from this list shall not relieve Contractor from the responsibility of providing finish. B. Product identifications listed are Federal Specification numbers. Cc. Interior Surfaces: 1. Where Contract Drawings Indicate "Paint", (PT) a. On wood surfaces: One coat primer sealer Two coats latex acrylic satin sheen b. On metal surfaces: One coat Acrylic Primer Two coats Acrylic Enamel, semi-gloss c. On concrete floor: Concrete sealer D. Exterior Surfaces: iu Where Contract Drawings Indicate “Paint”, (PT) a. On metal surfaces: One coat Acrylic Primer Two coats Acrylic Enamel, semi-gloss END OF SECTION 09 91 23 09603 09 9123-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 10 44 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 10 44 16 —- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide portable fire extinguishers, cabinets and applicable hardware as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in conformance with Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Cc. Operation and Maintenance Data. D. Warranty: Sample of Special Warranty. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NPFA 10, “Portable Fire Extinguishers.” B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Cc. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of vales or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 09603 PRODUCTS A. B. Provide fire extinguisher manufacturer producing equivalent products as specified herein. Manufacturers: 1. Amerex Corporation 2. J.L. Industries, Inc. 3. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. 4. Larsen’s Manufacturing Company 10 4416-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 10 44 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Type ABC extinguishers shall be 10 pound, multi-purpose dry chemical pressurized, having metal valves and siphon tubing with UL approved, Larsen's MP 10 (UL 4A-60B:C) or equivalent in physical characteristics and performance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Where noted "F.E.", provide wall mounted bracket and extinguisher. B. Fire extinguisher must be mounted with its bottom edge at or below 27” from the floor for ADA compliance. END OF SECTION 10 44 16 09603 10 4416-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 09603 SUMMARY A. This Section includes metal building systems that consist of integrated sets of mutually dependent components including but not limited to structural framing, roof panels, wall panels and soffit panels. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete - for concrete foundations, slabs, and anchor- bolt installation. B. Section 08 11 13 — Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Cc. Section 08 36 13 - Sectional Doors SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 4. Engineer metal building systems according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual." 2. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Design Loads: Include bracing for flue stack in design. 4 Design Loads: As required by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." Seismic Performance: Design and engineer metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." Thermal Movements: Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and _ surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal panel assemblies with the following maximum U-factors and minimum R-values for opaque elements when tested according to ASTM C 1363 or ASTM C 518: 1. Metal Roof Panel Assemblies: a. R-Value: 40 2. Metal Wall Panel Assemblies: a. R-Value: 25 Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90. 13 3419-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: For each type of metal building system component indicated. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans before foundation work begins. Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location. 3. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing; include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections. 4. Metal Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels including methods of support. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work; show locations of exposed fasteners. Samples: For each type of building component and for each color and texture required. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the State of Alaska. Include the following: Name and location of Project. Order number. Name of manufacturer. Name of Contractor. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for cold-rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. Governing building code and year of edition. Design loads and load combinations. Building-use category. 0. AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal building system and components were designed and produced in an AlSC-Certified Facility by an AlSC-Certified Manufacturer. DAPPWN> Se ON Welding certificates. Erector Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that erector complies with requirements. Manufacturer certificate. Surveys: Show final elevations and locations of major members. Have surveyor who performed surveys certify their accuracy. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 09603 Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 13 3419-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.6 1.7 1.8 09603 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer and member of MBMA. 1. AISC Certification for Category MB: An AlSC-Certified Manufacturer that designs and produces metal building systems and components in an AlSC-Certified Facility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." Structural Steel: Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings-- Allowable Stress Design, Plastic Design," or AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," for design requirements and allowable stresses. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members," or AISI's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel Structural Members," for design requirements and allowable stresses. Pre-Erection Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to metal building systems including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of foundations and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review structural load limitations. 3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness and with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor-bolt plans, establishing foundation dimensions and proceeding with fabricating structural framing without field measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions correspond to established dimensions. COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate installation of equipment supports and roof penetrations. 13 3419-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 3419 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No.8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. Cc. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 09603 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Butler Manufacturing Company. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Cc. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 Alliance Steel, Inc. 2 American Buildings Company. 3 American Steel Building Company, Inc.; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP. 4. Behlen Mfg. Co. 5. Butler Manufacturing Company. 6 Ceco Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation. 7, Crown Metal Buildings, Inc. 8 Garco Building Systems. 9. Gulf States Manufacturers, Inc. 10. Mesco Metal Buildings; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP. 11. Metallic Metal Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP. 12. Package Industries, Inc. 13. Southern Structures, Inc. 14. Spirco Manufacturing; Division of Metal Building Products, Inc. 15. Star Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation. 16. Steelox Systems Inc. 17. United Structures of America, Inc. 18. VP Buildings, Inc.; a United Dominion Company. STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. General: 1. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly. a. Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts. b. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous submerged arc-welding process. 13 3419-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 09603 c. Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold- formed structural tubing between frame web and purlin or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings. d. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC- SP 2. Shop prime primary structural members with specified primer after fabrication. 2. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by roll-forming or break-forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing. a. Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime uncoated secondary structural members with specified primer after fabrication. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing. Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated. 1. Rigid Clear-Span Frames: |-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior columns are not permitted. 2. Frame Configuration: Single gable. 3. Exterior Column Type: Tapered. 4 Rafter Type: Tapered. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated for field- bolted assembly to comply with the following: 1. End-Wall and Corner Columns: I-shaped sections fabricated from structural- steel shapes; shop-welded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0598 inch. 2. End-Wall Rafters: C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0598 inch; or |-shaped sections fabricated from shop-welded, built- up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing members, including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Fabricate framing from cold- formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating, unless otherwise indicated, to comply with the following: 1. Purlins: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch-thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch- wide flanges. a. Depth: As required to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Girts: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch-thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes. Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees to flange and with minimum 2-1/2- inch-wide flanges. a. Depth: As required to comply with system performance requirements. 3: Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for metal panels. 13 3419-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 3419 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.3 09603 4. Flange Bracing: Minimum 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles or 1-inch diameter, cold-formed structural tubing to stiffen primary frame flanges. 5. Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-by-1-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles. 6. Base or Sill Angles: Minimum 3-by-2-by-0.0598-inch zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 7. Purlin and Girt Clips: Minimum 0.0598-inch- thick, steel sheet. Provide galvanized clips where clips are connected to galvanized framing members. 8. Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick, structural-steel sheet. 9. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings. 10. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads. Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows: 1. Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50; or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50; minimum 1/2-inch- diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded a minimum of 6 inches at each end. 2. Cable: ASTM A 475, 1/4-inch-diameter, extra-high-strength grade, Class B zinc- coated, 7-strand steel; with threaded end anchors. 3. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required to withstand design loads. 4. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads. 5. Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads. 6. Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels: Design metal building to resist wind forces through diaphragm action of metal panels. 7. Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above, at manufacturer's option. Bolts: Provide plain finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish painted. Provide zinc-plated bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Prime primary, secondary, and end-wall structural-framing members to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil. a. Prime secondary steel framing formed from uncoated steel sheet to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil on each side. 2. Prime galvanized members with specified primer, after phosphoric acid pretreatment. STRUCTURAL-FRAMING MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTMA992/A992M; ASTMA572/A 572M, Grade50 or 55° or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 5. 13 3419-6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.4 09603 Cc. L. Plate and Bar: ASTMA36/A 36M; ASTMA572/A572M, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B or C, structural tubing. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 30 through, or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70; or cold- rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80, or High- Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex- head bolts; ASTM A563 carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers. 1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTMA 325, Type1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. 2. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex-head steel structural bolts with splined ends. a. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50 or mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTMB 695, Class 50, baked epoxy coated]. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTMA490, Type1, heavy hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers, plain. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 193/A 193M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50, ASTM A 307, Grade A. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardenedcarbon steel. 3. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide. METAL ROOF PANELS A. Roof panel shall be factory roll-formed VSR-fluted roof system panel as manufactured by Butler Manufacturing Company. 13 3419-7 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.5 2.6 2.7 09603 B. 24 gauge galvanized (G-90 coating) per ASTM specification A653 (G90) and painted with exterior colors of Butler-Cote® finish system, a full strength, 70% Kynar 500° or Hylar 5000° fluoropolymer coating. Cc. Provide all necessary trims and accessories necessary for a weather-tight and complete installation. METAL WALL PANELS A. General: Exterior wall panel shall be Fluted StylWall® II wall system panel as furnished by Butler Manufacturing Company and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Panel Dimensions: Panel shall be 16” wide with interlocking joint. Panel shall be roll formed with alternating 4” by 7/16” box corrugation also providing a hidden joint concealing the fasteners between panels. Cc. Panel Material and Finish: 1. Panel material as specified shall be a minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653 (G90) latest issued. Material shall be stucco embossed. The panel exterior shall be prefinished in standard Butler-Cote® colors, a full strength, 70% Kynar 500° or Hylar 5000° fluoropolymer coating, in choice of available colors. Manufacturer warrants that coating shall not blister, peel, crack, chip or experience material rust through for 20 years. For a period of 20 years chalking shall not exceed #8 —- ASTM D4214 and fading shall be 5AE Color Difference Units or less. 4. Provide all necessary trims and accessories for a weather tight and complete installation. 2. 3. METAL SOFFIT PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal wall panels. 1. Finish: Match finish and color of metal wall panels. Cc. Concealed-Fastener Metal Soffit Panels: Formed with vertical panel edges and flush surface; with flush joint between panels; with 1-inch-wide flange for attaching interior finish; designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. 1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.0269 inch thick. a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Panel Coverage: 16 inches. 3 Panel Height: 1 inch. ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, 13 3419-8 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 09603 by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated. ft Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof panels. 2. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, formed from [steel sheet] [stainless-steel sheet], designed to withstand negative-load requirements. 3. Cleats: Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats formed from [steel sheet] [stainless-steel sheet or nylon-coated aluminum sheet]. 4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 5. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin- foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated. i, Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same material as metal wall panels. 2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin- foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. Flashing and Trim: Formed from minimum 0.0159-inch-thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels. ll. Opening Trim: Minimum 0.0269-inch-thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings. Gutters: Formed from minimum 0.0159-inch-thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.” 1. Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 36 inches o.c. Downspouts: Formed from 0.0159-inch-thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10-foot-long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. la Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 10 feet o.c. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base. 13 3419-9 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.8 2.9 09603 INSULATION AND VAPOR BARRIER LINER A. Simple Saver System consists of batt insulation, roof insulation, wall insulation, vapor barrier liner fabric, thermal breaks, straps and other devices and components in a proprietary insulation system as follows: al oo On b. 9. 10. Roof Insulation: | Formaldehyde-free fiberglass batt or fiberglass blanket complying with ASTM C 991 type 1 and ASTM E 84 with a thermal resistance and thickness as follows: a. R-40, 12-1/2 inches, 9-1/2 inches plus 3 inches (two layers). Wall Insulation: Formaldehyde-free fiberglass blanket or batt complying with ASTM C 991 type 1, ASTM E 136 and ASTM E84 with a thermal resistance and thickness as follows: R-25; 8 inches. Vapor Barrier Liner Fabric: Syseal® type woven, reinforced, high-density polyethylene yarns coated on both sides with a continuous white polyethylene coatings, as follows: a. Product complies with ASTM C 1136, Types 1 through type VI. b. Flame/Smoke Properties 1) 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84. 2) Self-extinguishes with field test using matches or butane lighter. Vapor Barrier Lap Sealant: Solvent-based, Simple Saver polyethylene fabric adhesive. Vapor Barrier Tape: Double sided sealant tape % inch wide by 1/32 inch thick. Vapor Barrier Patch Tape: Single-sided, adhesive backed sealant tape 3 inches wide made from same material as Syseal® type liner fabric. Thermal Breaks: a. 3/16 inch thick by 3 inch wide white, closed-cell polyethylene foam with pre-applied adhesive film and peel-off backing (Roof). b. Provide %” thick closed-cell polyethylene foam at exterior wall girts. c. Polystyrene Snap-R snap-on thermal blocks. Straps: a. 100 KSI minimum yield tempered, high-tensile-strength steel. Size: Not less than 0.020 inch thick by 1 inch by continuous length. Fasteners: For heavy gauge steel: #12 by 1-1/2 inch plated Tek 4 type screws with sealing washer, painted to match specified color. Wall Insulation Hangers: Fast-R preformed rigid hangers, 32 inch long galvanized steel strips with barbed arrows every 8 inches along its length. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. a Fasteners for Metal Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex- head carbon-steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM or neoprene sealing washer. Fasteners for Metal Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex- head carbon-steel screws, with nylon or polypropylene washer. Fasteners for Metal Roof and Wall Panels: Self-drilling Type 410 stainless-steel or self-tapping Type 304 stainless-steel or zinc-alloy-steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels. 13 3419-10 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 3419 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.10 B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15- mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. Metal Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone-rubber sealant. FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual": Chapter IV, Section 9, "Fabrication and Erection Tolerances." Metal Panels: Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of metal panel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 09603 ERECTION A. Before erection proceeds, engage land surveyor to survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection drawings. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. 13 3419-11 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.2 09603 G. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Level and plumb individual members of structure. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than seven days after placement. 1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and snug-tightened or pretensioned joints. Secondary Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Fasten secondary framing to primary framing using clips with field connections using non-high- strength bolts. 4. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae. 2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. 3. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows, louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings. 1. Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. 2. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by manufacturer. 2. Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 4. Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in alignment. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 5. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. Arrange and nest side-lap 13 3419-12 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.3 3.4 09603 joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal panel manufacturer. METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. Panel clips shall be positioned by matching the hole in the clip with the factory punched holes in the secondary structural members. Panel shall be positioned and properly aligned by matching the factory punched holes in the panel end with the factory punched holes in the eave structural member and by aligning the panel with the panel clip. Panel sidelap shall be field seamed by a self-propelled and portable electrical lock seaming machine. The machine field forms the final 180 degrees of a 360 degree Pittsburgh double-lock standing seam; all sidelap sealant shall be factory applied. Panel endlap, when required, shall be at least 6”, sealed with Butler sealant and fastened together by clamping plates. Sealant shall contain hard nylon beads which preent it from flowing out due to clamping actions. The panel lap shall be joined by means of a two- piece clamped connection consisting of a bottom reinforcing plate and a top panel strap. The panel endlap shall be located directly over, but not fastened to, a supporting secondary roof structural member and be staggered, so as to avoid a four panel lap splice condition. METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Structural system (girts) for wall panel application shall be plumb, level and aligned as shown on the erection drawings. Any variation of intermediate girts, within tolerance, must be in an outward direction. Panel shall be sealed with a molded foam closure block that fits panel configuration at the bottom of the wall panel for WidespanTM and LandmarkTM 2000 building systems. All exterior trim shall match the exterior color and embossing of the Fluted Stylwal II wall system panel except the following: ia All gutter, downspout, eave trim, gable trim and base trim to be galvanized prepainted steel with Butler-Cote finish system fluoropolymer coating. 2 All gutter, downspout, eave, trim and gable trim shall match the wall panel color. The flashing and trim is also available in preprimed galvanized steel for field painting. 3. Base angle and base trim shall be prepainted a Lava or Birch White color. 4. All interior trim shall be painted. 5. All flashing, trim, closure and similar items shall be as defined on drawings as supplied by the manufacturer of the panel. 13 3419-13 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.5 3.6 3.7 09603 D. Field-Assembled, Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION A. Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing. B. Flash and seal metal soffit panels with weather closures where panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings. ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Straps: 1. Cut straps to length and install in the pattern and spacings indicated on shop drawings. B. Vapor Barrier Fabric: aw Install vapor barrier fabric in large one-piece custom fabricated pieces to substantially fit defined building areas with minimum practicable job site sealing. 2. Position pre-folded fabric on the strap platform along one eave purlin. 3. Clamp the two bottom corners at the eave and also centered on the bay. 4 Pull the other end of the pleat-folded fabric across the building width on the strap platform, pausing only at the ridge to fasten the straps and fabric in position where plane of roof changes and to release temporary fasteners on the opposite ridge purlins 5. All seams must be completely sealed and stapled seams NOT acceptable. Cc. Insulation: ds Ensure that cavities are filled completely with insulation. 2 Place on the vapor barrier liner fabric without voids or gaps. 3. Place thermal block on top of purlins or bottom of purlins for retrofit work, if no other thermal break exists. 4. Seal vapor barrier fabric to the wall fabric and elsewhere as required to provide a continuous vapor barrier. WALL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation: 1. Install thermal break to exterior surface of girts as wall sheathing is applied. 2. Position and secure Fast-R hangers to girts on the inside face of the wall sheathing. 3. Cut insulation to required lengths to fit vertically between girts. 4. Neatly position in place and secure to Fast-R hangers. B. Vapor Barrier Fabric: a Install vapor barrier fabric in large one-piece custom fabricated pieces to substantially fit defined building areas with minimum practicable job site sealing. 2. Apply the vapor barrier fabric by clamping it in position over eave strap and installing fasteners through the eave strap into each roof strap, permanently clamping the wall fabric between them. All seams must be completely sealed and stapled seams not acceptable. All vapor barrier penetrations must be sealed (tape ok with sealant) for a continuous vapor barrier. Po 13 3419-14 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 3419 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.8 3.9 09603 Cc. Seal wall fabric to the roof fabric, to the base angle and up the columns to provide a continuous vapor barrier. ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 4 feet o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. 2. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing and accessories. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or SSPC- SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 13 3419-15 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 13 34 19 09603 13 3419-16 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. All work specified in Division 21. SCOPE OF WORK Provide the entire plumbing work as shown and specified, including the following: 1. Connect new work so as to provide a complete and operating system. All work shall include complete installation of the piping, fittings, valves, controllers, specialties, and accessories. a. Fire sprinkler system. All equipment and installation shall be in compliance with OSHA regulations. Intent: 1. The Intent of the Contract is to include all labor and materials, tools, hoisting, scaffolding, supervision, equipment, and transportation necessary or reasonably inferable as being necessary for the execution of the work. 2. The Contract Documents endeavor to communicate intended completed work. Interim Stages, methods, and means may not be specifically indicated where such is reasonably inferable by qualified Contractors and workers. 3. The Contractor is responsible for providing the finished mechanical work, tested and ready for operation. 4. By submitting a proposal, the Contractor represents that they have made a thorough examination of the site, of the work, and all existing conditions and limitations, and that they have examined the Contract Documents in complete detail and have determined beyond doubt that the drawings, specifications, and existing conditions are sufficient, adequate and satisfactory for the execution of the work under the Contract. 5. Where minor adjustments of the work are necessary for purposes of fabrication, scheduling, or installation of items, for accommodation of site conditions reasonably inferable for this project, or resolution of conflicts between items within the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall make such adjustments at no added expense to the Owner. 6. Where such adjustments affect functional or aesthetic design of the work, they shall first be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for review and approval. COORDINATION Contractor shall be thoroughly acquainted with the work involved and shall verify at the site those measurements necessary for proper installation of the work. Contractor shall refer to architectural and other engineered drawings for building construction and other details which affect the fire suppression system installation. They shall confer with those trades for finish adjacent to their work and arrange to have visible portions of this work (such as access doors, grilles, sprinkler heads, escutcheons, etc.) fit in and harmonize with the finish in a manner satisfactory to the Owner’s Representative. Ceilings and Heights: Architectural and structural drawings shall be checked for ceiling 2100 00-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.4 1.5 09603 heights, building heights, walls, and cabinets that are intended to conceal work of this Section. Where conflicts occur, the Owner's Representative shall be notified prior to installation of the work. Location of exposed work such as lights, diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads take precedence over concealed work. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS Contractor: The word "Contractor," as used in these Specifications, means the mechanical subcontractor. Owner's Representative: The person or entity designated by the Owner. It may be different persons or entities for different applications. Provide: The word "provide," as used in these Specifications, means furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the reader locate the reference. Location is not limited. Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted," mean directed by the Owner’s Representative and similar phrases. Specialist: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. Nevertheless, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. SAFETY AND PROTECTION Safety Measures to be Taken: The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the jobsite, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement shall apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. Comply with "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction," Volume 36, No. 75, Part Il of the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of Labor. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all such safety measures and shall consult with the state or federal safety inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether it is or is not in compliance with state or federal regulations. 1. The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures required for the Contractor to perform its work. The Engineer’s observations of the Contractor's performance are not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on, or near the construction site. Drive Guards: Provide OSHA-approved drive and shaft guards for all exposed, rotating drive shafts and drive connections between motors and driven equipment including fans, pumps, compressors, etc. Guards shall include heavy-duty steel frames securely fastened for easy removal to the equipment frame. Guards, in general, shall be solid sheet metal with 21 0000-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.6 1.7 09603 tachometer cutout at shafts where applicable. Fan belt guards shall be heavy mesh or expanded metal to permit airflow. Guards may be provided by the equipment manufacturer or fabricated by this Contractor to the manufacturer's clearances, configurations, etc. Head Protection: Where pipe, hangers, equipment support angles and frames, and etc. are exposed in walkways, or in access ways for any maintenance. Cover all such potentially injurious protrusions within 6'-0" of the floor with padding. Padding shall be securely and permanently fastened and finished comparable to adjacent finishes. CODES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS Work shall be installed in conformity with applicable local ordinances and state statutes. Standards and sizes which meet or exceed preceding requirements shall be installed as indicated. Give necessary notices, obtain permits, and pay taxes, fees and other costs, including utility connections or extensions for the work. File necessary plans, prepare documents and obtain necessary approvals of governmental departments having jurisdiction. Apply for and pay for all utility meters and gauges required. Obtain required certificates of inspection for work; retain in the Project Closeout manual and deliver to the Owner's Representative before request for acceptance and final payment for the Work. Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the work. Material and equipment within the scope of the UL Testing Laboratory Service shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear their listing mark. Contractor shall call for all inspections by the authority having jurisdiction when they become due and shall not cover any work until approved by the governing authorities. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 01 Section, "Materials and Equipment". Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all materials shall be new. Contractor shall properly store all materials and equipment for protection from physical damage or damage due to corrosion. Standardization of Manufacturer: This Contractor shall make every effort to furnish all equipment of any equipment type (such as all sprinkler heads, all valves, and etc.) from one manufacturer. Confirm before ordering, requirements of standardization with Owner’s existing equipment. Rigging and Appliances: Provide all rigging, scaffolding, staging, and ladders required for complete installation of all equipment. 2100 00-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA E. 1.8 09603 Manufacturer's Directions: Each material for which the manufacturer issues written directions shall be used according to its manufacturer's directions, as approved and if not at variance with these specifications. 1. If manufacturer's directions are at variance to the contract documents, install to the more stringent requirement within the terms of the manufacturer's warranty. If warranty conflicts arise, refer the question to the Owner's Representative before proceeding. Equipment Furnished by Others: For installation of equipment furnished by others and installed by this Contractor, roughing-in dimensions shall be obtained from approved shop drawings, by measurements from the actual equipment, details shown on drawings, or as directed by Owner’s Representative. Accessibility: Install all equipment to be easily accessible for operation, maintenance, or repair. Equipment deemed inaccessible shall be relocated as directed. Drawings and specifications shall be taken together. Provide work specified and not drawn or work drawn and not specified as though mentioned in both. General Locations and Arrangements: 1. Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of Plumbing systems and do not attempt to show exact details or all offsets in piping. Do not scale drawings to obtain final cut lengths, quantities, or the like. Examine the architectural drawings for exact location of fixtures and equipment. 2. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and to calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install systems as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved in advance on coordination drawings. 3. Follow drawings in laying out work and check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Install piping and ducts in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, and keep openings and passageways clear. Lines that must pitch, or that must have a constant elevation, shall have the right-of-way over lines not so restricted. Maintain maximum headroom. If space conditions appear inadequate, notify the Owner's Representative before proceeding with the work. Make reasonable modifications in the work without extra cost as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades and for proper execution of the work. 4. Site Conditions: The mechanical documents indicate certain site conditions to assist the Contractor. These drawings are not intended to indicate all conditions. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all site conditions and include the removal or relocation of equipment and wiring in the Contract. SUBSTITUTIONS Brand Names: The use of brand names is for the purpose of description and establishing quality and does not eliminate the requirements of meeting specifications. Exceptions: Other brands will be allowed except where an item or class of material is specified exclusively by trade name and followed by word "only." Requests for Substitutions: Approval of alternative and/or substitute products will be considered only under terms and conditions specified in Division 01. Changes Due to Substitutions: Design is based on equipment as listed in the equipment schedules and/or specified elsewhere in Division 21. Where implementation of an approved substitution requires redesign to any part of the work, provide such redesign. Obtain approval of redesign from the Owner's Representative. Redesign cost and additional construction cost, 21 00 00-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.9 09603 including related and incidentally affected work, resulting from the redesign shall be at the Contractor's expense. SUBMITTALS, APPROVALS, AND REVIEWS Provide submittals for all products and systems described in Division 21 and shown on the drawings to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the project. Furnish equipment submittals, include data for review, and organize data in the manner described below. Submittals procedures shall comply with applicable requirements of Division 1 specifications. Review of submittals will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for dimensions and/or errors that may be contained in them, or deviations from the Contract Documents' requirements. It shall be clearly understood that the noting of some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the submittals, the requirements of the Contract Documents shall govern and are not waived or superseded in any way by the review of the submittals. A. Submittals processed by the Owner's Representative and/or Architect/Engineer design team are NOT Change Orders. The purpose of Contractor Submittals is to demonstrate to the Architect/Engineer design team that the Contractor understands the design concept and demonstrates its understanding by indicating which equipment and material it intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods it intends to use. General: Submittals shall be legible. Degraded faxes, faded or smudged literature, or literature too tiny as to be reasonably read if reproduced at % size will be rejected without further review. 1. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between Submittals and Specifications are discovered either prior to or after Submittals are processed by the Architect, the Design Drawings and Specifications shall govern and shall be followed. Product Literature Requirements: 1. Bind in 8-1/2 x 11 three hole, hard backed, loose-leaf binders no larger than 3” thick. Do NOT overstuff binders. Indicate the following: a. Contractor’s name and contact information; and project title on the front of each binder. If there are multiple volumes required to cover the work, identify the volume on the front of each binder numbered sequentially. b. Table of contents on the first page of each binder. 1) List sections and each item in the section. c. Divide the binder(s) into sections by specification section. Place a numbered divider between each section. 1) Table of contents for each section. 2) Place each submitted item within its specification section. 3) Include a separate section for items indicated on the drawings only. d. On each item or product, customize the submittal to thoroughly convey the contractor’s intent. The terminology "As Specified" used without marked up listing is not acceptable. (Show exactly what will be provided to include options or deletions.) 1) Mark submittal literature to indicate the make and model, materials, accessories, and options proposed. Cross out those not proposed. Unmarked literature indicates ALL accessories options will be provided. 2) Identify each item. Mark the project Tag or ID. Mark the specification reference and/or drawing reference which the submittal satisfies. 210000-5 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.10 09603 3) Mark the manufacturer's name and address, and supplier's name, address and phone number. 4) Rough-in data and dimensions. 5) Operating characteristics. a) Performance curves and rated capacities. Indicate the point on the performance curve which satisfies the contract requirements. b) Temperature range and limitations, if applicable. c) Motor and electrical characteristics. d) Wiring diagrams for the specific system operation. 6) Indicate whether item is “As Specified” or “Proposed Substitution”. a) For substitutions, indicate any deviations from the specified item on the submittal. Include physical size, materials, and performance characteristics, as well options and features. 7) Working construction drawings (shop drawings) for other than stock manufactured items. Partial Submittals are permitted with cause only after prior approval such as for long lead items require special attention. Piecemeal submittals, and submittals not organized and tabbed by specification section will be returned without review. Shop Drawing Requirements: 1. Shop Drawings are for the benefit of the contractors to resolve spatial conflicts and appropriate design before the opportunities for acceptable solutions diminish. They are to convey work customized by the tradesmen for this project including, but not limited to, layouts of all piping and equipment; detailed drawings of connections equipment; assemblies of field-fabricated components; pipe, and equipment coordination drawings for congested areas; bidder design systems (controls, sprinklers, and etc); issues to benefit by Shop Drawings, and any other areas of concern. a. Spatial conflicts which arise as the project progresses which have not first been addressed by shop drawings are expressly assigned to the contractor for resolution within the contract requirements without additional cost to the owner. b. Where work obstructs the space needed for O&M, work shall be removed and redone to satisfy O&M spatial requirements without additional cost to the owner. 2. Shop Drawings utilizing manufactured equipment shall be reviewed by the manufacturer to determine correct product application before submitting. The manufacturer's determination shall be evident on the submitted shop drawing. 3. Shop drawings shall be drawn to scale by skilled drafters to conventions and norms prevailing in the field of architectural drafting. Specialized terms, symbols, and techniques which add accuracy and concisely convey the intent are encouraged. a. Shop Drawings shall include horizontal and vertical dimensions. Multiple views (top, side, front, cross-section, isometric, and etc) shall be used if necessary to illustrate the purpose of the Shop Drawing. RECORD DRAWINGS (“AS-BUILTS”) The Contractor shall, during the progress of the work, keep a current and careful record of all work indicated on the Contract Documents. Work installed as indicated on the Contract Documents may simply be confirmed with a mark on the As-builts. Changes from the Contract Documents shall be made as detailed revisions on the As-builts. 1. As-Builts shall be kept neat and clear. The final set must be reproducible at ”% scale with acceptable legibility. 2100 00-6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.11 B. 09603 2. Records from the tradesmen’s field drawings shall be transferred to a permanent set maintained in the project office. The permanent set shall be protected from damage and loss. It shall be available for inspection by the Owner's Representative at any time. Accurately locate and indicate the following: Pipes locations. All isolating and operating valves complete with valve tag numbers. Dimensions to buried pipes. Piping configuration at equipment, if changed from the Contract Documents. Access doors. All points requiring access for operation or maintenance. Make, model, and pertinent information on equipment schedules. Outside utilities accurately located by dimension-to-permanent construction. sa*oa0co OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals. Furnish in time for training of Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of systems and related equipment. Organize manual and include data and narrative as noted below. Use 8-1/2" x 11" white paper. 1. Bind O&M Manuals in 8-1/2 x 11 three hole, hard backed, loose-leaf binders no larger than 3” thick. Do NOT overstuff binders. Indicate the following: a. Contractor’s name and contact information; and project title on the front of each binder. If there are multiple volumes required to cover the work, identify the volume on the front of each binder numbered sequentially. b. Table of contents on the first page of each binder. 1) List sections and each item in the section. c. Divide the binder(s) into sections by specification section. Place a numbered divider between each section. 1) Table of contents for each section, including page numbers. 2) Organize items within their specification section with subchapters for each class of equipment or system. Operating and Maintenance Sequence and Procedures: 1. 2. All written information shall be typewritten. Handwritten notes, lists, or the like will not be accepted. Contents: In each chapter, describe the procedures necessary for personnel to operate the system and equipment covered in that chapter. Provide procedures for start-up, operation, emergency operation, and shutdown. a. Start-up: Give complete step-by-step instructions for initial energizing equipment from cold status, making initial settings and adjustments whenever applicable. b. Operation: Give instructions for continued operation including ongoing settings. commands, overrides, and adjustments whenever applicable. Cc. Shutdown Procedure: Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment after operation. If a particular sequence is required, give step-by-step instructions in order. d. Emergency Operation: Give detailed instructions for emergency procedures required to prevent damage to equipment and property, freeze-up, human discomfort, etc. e. Provide a schedule of preventive maintenance for each product. Recommend frequency of performance for each preventive maintenance task; i.e., cleaning, inspection, etc. f. Provide instructions and schedules for all routine cleaning, lubrication and inspection with recommended lubricants for all equipment and systems. Schedule times of the year that inspection and maintenance should be performed. 2100 00 -7 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.12 09603 g. Provide instructions for minor repair or adjustments required for preventive maintenance routines, limited to repairs and adjustments which may be performed without special tools or test equipment, and which require no extensive special training or skills. h. Special Maintenance: Provide all information of a maintenance nature covering warranty items, etc., which have not been discussed elsewhere. Manufacturer's Catalog Cuts: Include manufacturers’ descriptive literature covering all appurtenances used in each system, together with illustrations, exploded views and renewal parts lists. Include name, address and phone number of supplier. Shop Drawings: Provide a copy of all corrected, approved shop drawings covering equipment for the project either with the manufacturers’ catalog cuts or properly identified in a separate subsection. Spare Parts Lists: Include a list of all equipment furnished for project, with a tabulation of descriptive data of all the spare parts proposed for each type of equipment or system. Properly identify each part-by-part number and manufacturer, include address and phone number. Test Report: Provide the final approved test report. Other Items: 1. Valve Directory: Indicate valve number, size, location, function and normal position for each numbered valve. a. Provide a complete Valve Directory in the O&M Manual. b. Permanently mount a framed, glass-front copy of the Valve Directory in the each mechanical room covering the valves in that room and adjacent areas. 2. Name Plate Directory: Provide list of fans, pumps, air handling units, heating coils, concealed automatic dampers, and all other major equipment nameplates, giving manufacturer's nameplate data, nameplate designation, location of equipment, area served, switch location, normal position of switch, and equipment label designations specified. Submit directory for review and obtain approval prior to substantial completion of project. Number all pages to assure correct placement in manual. In addition to the number required by Division 1 section, “Closeout Documents’, install one copy of the approved O & M Manual in a permanently mounted sheet metal box on wall of the main mechanical equipment room. OPERATING PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION General: Provide instruction of all pertinent mechanical systems to facility operating personnel prior to facility acceptance, upon mutually satisfactory arrangement with Owner. Additional requirements may be found in other Division 21 sections which apply to the specific items in that section. 1. Instruction: Instruction shall begin only after the component, assembly, or system is complete and has been tested and is in acceptable operating condition. Instruction shall encompass normal operation, emergency operation, fire and other hazards, safety provisions, pollution prevention provisions, and maintenance procedures for all work provided. 2. Access points: A guided tour of all mechanical systems and their access points for every item requiring O&M access shall utilize the As-builts. 21 00 00 -8 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.13 1.14 09603 3. Instructors: Instructors shall be qualified on the system being instructed. Include the Contractor's staff supplemented by authorized representatives of the component, assembly, or system manufacturer. 4. Aids: Instruction process shall utilize the O&M manuals which, if deemed unsatisfactory in any content, shall be supplemented in a manner to achieve useful, pertinent, and complete instruction. 5. Time: Provide all necessary instruction to the complete understanding of the operating personnel. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows except that where instruction periods for longer terms are specified herein, such longer term shall apply: a. Fire protection system: 2 Hours. TEMPORARY SERVICES Temporary water and sanitary facilities are specified in Division 1. Cooperate with the General Contractor and prepare these facilities for operation. Fire Suppression Systems: Place fire suppression systems in service at such time during construction as determined by the general contractor. Protect the systems from damage as might be reasonably expected from ongoing construction. Provide fuel and water for operation of these temporary services.. Cleaning: Promptly remove all waste material and rubbish. At completion of the work, clean all dirt and construction debris such as paint, plaster, glue, cement, mastic, tar, paper, tape, and dirt from the fire suppression installation including equipment, piping, accessories, and etc. In finished areas to be occupied, protect equipment during course of construction. Where this is not practical, clean and/or refinish item to new condition. PROJECT CLOSEOUT General: Comply with all Division 1 requirements. “Substantial Completion” Inspection: Experience has proven that if the following minimum list cannot be confirmed in writing, then the occurrence of deficiencies is considerable and follow up substantial completion inspections are usually necessary. In order to complete this inspection on one site visit and to avoid other costly problems, we require written confirmation prior to making the substantial completion inspection. All of the following items shall be completed prior to final inspections. Provide written documentation certifying that all items highlighted_in_bold_ underline are complete and the project is ready for Substantial completion inspection. 1. General Contactor: a. The GC’s superintendent should exercise his authority as chief CQC manager to pre-inspect and certify that the subs are done. The inspector's purpose is not to perform the contractor’s quality control program, but rather to examine the results after CQC and to verify that work is complete. Provide a letter from the General Contractor stating that the project is ready for substantial completion. b. All training should be finished and sign-off sheets available for inspection. 2. Fire Suppression: a. All items done & clean. Insulating, painting & touch-up, ID tags, access doors, valve schedules, etc done and available for inspection. b. All pumps & pipes under automatic control. c. Punch list from prior inspections completed. d. Fire Pump Startup report. e. As-Builts available and all access doors located on the As-Builts. M 3. janpower and tools: 2100 00-9 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA General Contractor's superintendent or CQC manager. Other subs should be available in case an item in their trade needs examination. Inspectors will need ladders or lifts to reach all equipment & access doors. Inspectors will need tools of the trades involved to open panels and check internals where required. 2oo7M Cc. Requirements for “Final Inspection”: All of the following items shall be completed prior to final inspections. No exceptions will be made and no approval for final payment will be made until all items are completed. PON>= Equipment and premises entirely clean. Operating instructions and maintenance manuals, final approved copy. Record drawings ("as-built"), final approved copy. Guarantee. D. Guarantee: 1. All work performed under this Contract shall be guaranteed against faulty and improper materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified herein, such longer term shall apply, and this Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall promptly correct any deficiencies which occur during the guarantee period, all to the satisfaction of the Owner. This Contractor shall require similar guarantees from its subcontractors. All equipment and installation shall be guaranteed by the Contractor to be in compliance with OSHA regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable. END OF SECTION 21 00 00 09603 21 00 00 - 10 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. Cc. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. Cc. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 21 00 00, “General Fire Suppression Work”. Follow all provisions of Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work’. WORK INCLUDED This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 21 Sections. In addition to the requirements in section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work’, the following additional work is stated herein. f. Testing of Fire Suppression systems. DEFINITIONS See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work”. QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel". Equipment and pipe identification shall conform to ASME A13.1 for lettering size. Length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work’. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 09603 MANUFACTURERS See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work”. 21 05 00 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS 2.2 COMMON MATERIALS & METHODS A. See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work,” for the following: abs Joining Materials. 2. Piping Specialties. 3. Grout. 4. Firestopping. 5. Sleeve Sealants and Caulks. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS—COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work,” article 3.1, “HVAC Systems — Common Requirements’. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION—COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work,” for work listed below: Sealing Through Air Plenums, Shafts, and Floors. Installation of firestopping. Housekeeping pads. Mechanical demolition. Cutting and patching. Touch-up painting. Provisions for later installation. NOaOARWN> 3.3 CLEANING AND TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. General: Provide corrosion protection for all ferrous metal portions of mechanical work exposed to weather including pumps, piping and accessories, supports and other items. During construction, properly cap all lines, to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc. Each system of piping shall be flushed through after completion (for the purpose of removing grit, dirt, sand, etc., from piping) for as long as required to thoroughly clean the apparatus. 3.4 TESTING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING SYSTEMS A. Sprinkler Piping: Sprinkler piping shall be tested in conformance applicable sections of NFPA 13. Repeat testing until satisfactory results are obtained for all sections of piping. Retain all documentation of testing, including witnesses, for inclusion in the O&M Manuals. 3.5 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide wiring, except equipment control wiring and interlock wiring unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide power wiring complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including power wiring through starters. END OF SECTION 21 05 00 09603 2105 00-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 13 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. T2 1.3 09603 SUMMARY This Section specifies automatic sprinkler systems for buildings and structures. Materials and equipment specified in this Section include: 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, and specialties. 2. Sprinklers, spare sprinkler head cabinet, and accessories. The authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) is the Office of the Alaska State Fire Marshal. In addition to the requirements contained herein, the fire sprinkler system shall meet the requirements of the AHJ. Below is listed their name and address: Office of the State Fire Marshal 5700 East Tudor Anchorage, AK 99503 (907) 269-5604 This is a “Performance Specification.”. Approved design work is required of the Contractor as part of this work. DEFINITIONS Pipe sizes used in this Section are nominal pipe size NPS specified in inches. Tube sizes are standard tube size specified in inches. Other definitions for fire protection systems are listed in NFPA Standard 13 latest edition. “Working Plans” as used in this Section means those documents (including plans and calculations) prepared pursuant to the requirements contained in Chapter 8, NFPA 13, 1999, for obtaining approval of the authority having jurisdiction. “Drawings” as used in this Section means those documents prepared by the Architect and included with this specification for the purpose of bidding and construction. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 21 00 00, "General Fire Suppression Work". Statement of qualifications of designer, including: a. Permit number from Alaska State Fire Marshal's Office for work performed under this contract shall be on the title block of the working plans. 2. Engineer's seal and signature, licensed for this work in Alaska, or certificate number of fire protection system designer who holds a current Class II-C permit as issued by the State of Alaska Fire Marshal under 13 AAC 50.035. shall be on the working plans. 21 13 00-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 13 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. 1.4 1.5 09603 “Working Plans” prepared in accordance with NFPA 13, including hydraulic calculations where applicable, and signature of designer. Acceptance of the shop drawings shall be contingent upon approval by the authority having jurisdiction. Using the requirements of NFPA 13 Articles 8-1 and 8-2, where applicable as a check list, submit complete Working Plans and Hydraulic Calculation Forms in a clear and legible format. Incomplete or unclear submittals will be rejected. 1. In addition to the number required elsewhere in this specification, submit three additional sets to AHJ for review, comment, and approval. Include system hydraulic calculations and water supply information. 2. Working plans as identified in NFPA 13 Article 8-1 shall also include: a. Pipe elevations adequate to determine slope. b. Location of inspector test. c. Location of water flow alarm and its time delay, if any. d. Location of water supply flow test. 3. Hydraulic Calculation Forms as identified in NFPA 13 Article 8-3 shall also include: a. Separate calculations where needed to identify the hydraulically most demanding area. The Owner's Representative shall be the judge of whether the hydraulically most demanding area is sufficiently identified. b. Factor of safety of 10 PSI between the water supply curve and the sprinkler system shall be clearly indicated on the graph sheet, NFPA 13, Article 8-3.4. 4. Water supply information, NFPA-13, Article 8-2 shall be based on the actual system pressure provided for this project. a. Attach Water Supply Information as identified in NFPA 13 Article 8-3.2 to the graph sheet. Product data for sprinkler heads, pipe, valves, and accessories. Closeout reports and documents, and extra material receipts, in the O&M Manual. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Fire protection system is a “Wet-Pipe” system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping system connected to the main builidngs sprinkler system’s water supply. Include the following: 1. New fire sprinkler mains, new branch piping, and new fire sprinkler heads where required to create a “sprinklered” building. All concealed spaces shall be sprinklered, including the crawl space, unless such spaces comply with the exceptions listed in NFPA 13 for sprinkling such spaces or are exempted by the AHJ. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Hydraulically design sprinkler systems according to: 1. Sprinkler System Occupancy Hazard Classifications are determined as follows: a. Boiler room: Ordinary hazard Group I. b. All other areas: Light hazard. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 175 psig minimum working pressure ratings except where indicated otherwise. Existing Conditions: The extent of the structure is detailed on the Architectural drawings. Phasing: Install the fire sprinkler system in conjunction with the phasing of the entire project. As a phase is built install the sprinkler system. 2113 00 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 13 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.6 A. 09603 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Installation and alterations of fire protection piping, equipment, specialties, and accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer, having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this project, familiar with all precautions required, and has complied with all the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon request, submit evidence of such qualifications to the Owner's Representative. 1. Installer shall posses a permit from the Alaska State Fire Marshal’s office to perform installation and certification of the work performed under this contract. Qualified Designer: Submit design drawings, design calculations, and installation inspection reports. Include seal and signature of fire protection system designer who holds a current Class II-C permit as issued by the State of Alaska Fire Marshal under 13 AAC 50.035 or registered engineer licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, certifying compliance with code and specifications. 4. Designer shall posses a permit from the Alaska State Fire Marshal's office to perform design of the work performed under this contract. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of AWS D10.9, Specifications for Qualifications of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, Level AR-3.” Comply with requirements of authority having jurisdiction for submittals, approvals, materials, hose threads, installation, inspections, and testing. Comply with requirements of Owner's insurance underwriter for submittals, approvals, materials, installation, inspections, and testing. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes and standards, latest edition: 1. NFPA 13 — Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2007 Edition. a. Exceptions and Additions: 1) The “Special Sprinkler Rule”, Article 4-3.2 is not allowed without approval prior to bid, except such special sprinklers as specified herein. 2) Polybutylene pipe is not allowed, regardless of its listing. 2. UL and FM Compliance: Fire protection system materials and components shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and labeled, and Factory Mutual approved for the application anticipated. 3. NFPA 231 “Standard for General Storage”. 4. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. 5. International Building Code 2006. Single Source Responsibility: Fire protection system products of a similar type and construction shall be from one manufacturer. Product categories are: Specialty Valves and Alarm Check Valves. Water Flow Indicators on Supervisory Switches. Sprinklers. Indicator Valves. Pipe and Tubing Materials. Pipe Fittings. QARWN> 2113 00-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 13 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.7 A. B. Cc. 1.8 A. SEQUENCING, SCHEDULING, AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES Schedule rough-in installations with installations of other building components. Piping layout shall not interfere with other engineered building components such as structure, mechanical ductwork, sloped DWV piping, lighting, and electrical panels, feeders, etc. Maintain 12-inch minimum clearance between removable ceiling tiles and horizontal sprinkler piping. Where structure, HVAC, electrical, or plumbing systems interfere with this location, adjust sprinkler piping upwards if possible. Horizontal pipe installation in the upper 6” of interstitial space is preferred wherever practical. EXTRA MATERIALS General: Furnish extra materials to Owner's construction representative. Obtain signed receipt. a! Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, 2 valve wrenches for each type of sprinkler head installed. 2. Sprinkler Heads and Cabinets: Furnish six extra sprinkler heads of each style included in the project. Furnish each style with its own sprinkler head cabinet and special wrenches as specified in this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. ei A. 2.3 A. B. 09603 MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: dl. Specialty Valves and Water Motor Alarms: a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. c. Viking Corp. 2. Waterflow Indicators and Supervisory Switches: a. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. b. Potter Electric Signal Co. c. Victaulic Company of America. 3. Sprinklers: a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. c. Viking Corp. 4. Indicator Valves: a. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. b. Sprink-Line by Sprink, Inc. c. Victaulic Company of America. PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS General: Pipe and tube used in fire sprinkler systems shall meet or exceed Article 2-3 of NFPA-13. PIPE FITTINGS Pipe fittings shall meet or exceed Article 2-4 of NFPA-13. Pipe fittings shall be compatible with and meet same requirements as pipe tubing materials. 2113 00-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 13 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.4 A. 2.5 2.6 2.7 JOINING MATERIALS Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded. Gasket Materials: Asbestos-free. Pipe Threads: NPT with non-corrosive thread lubricant. FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE VALVES Indicating Valves, 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and Smaller: Butterfly or ball type, bronze body with threaded ends, and integral indicating device. 1. Indicator: Electrical 115 volts a.c., prewired, 2-circuit, supervisory switch. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element, UL listed and FM approved. Sprinkler types and categories are as indicated and as required by application. Furnish automatic sprinklers with nominal %-inch orifice for “Ordinary” temperature classification rating except where otherwise indicated and required by application. 1. Where ordinary temp range is inappropriate, provide higher temp heads. Sprinkler Head Finishes: Provide heads with the following finishes: 1. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Styles: chrome plated in finish spaces, exposed to view; rough bronze finish for heads in unfinished spaces and not exposed to view. Heads shall be wax-coated where installed exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes. Recessed Style: bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon plate. Dry-Pendent or -Side Wall Style: Orifice and deflector exposed to freezing area connected to valve recessed into non-freeze area. Exposed head shall be chrome plated. 4. Heads in the gym and multi-purpose area shall have chrome protective guards. ON Sprinkler Head Cabinet and Wrench: finished steel cabinet, suitable for wall mounting, with hinged cover and space for 6 spare sprinkler heads plus sprinkler head wrench. Provide a separate cabinet for each style sprinkler head on the project. ALARM DEVICES Waterflow Indicators: UL 346, electrical-supervision type, pressure-type waterflow detector, rated to 250 psig and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include 2 SPDT (single- pole, double-throw) circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere, 125 volts a.c. and 0.25 ampere, 24 volts d.c.; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamper-proof cover that sends a signal when cover is removed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 09603 EXAMINATION Examine field conditions thoroughly for suitability. 2113 00-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 13 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. Cc. 3.2 3.3 3.4 09603 Notify Owner’s Representative of unsuitable conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. WATER SUPPLY CONNECTION Connect fire protection piping to existing water supply system in main building to be used as system water supply piping. SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Design head and piping layout and prepare working drawings suitable for submittals. Obtain approval from AHJ for fire protection systems specified. Conduct flow tests as required to obtain hydraulic data needed to prepare design for hydraulically calculated systems. All areas are to be sprinkled in accordance with NFPA 13, 1999 Ed. All piping shall be exposed except as noted otherwise on these drawings. 1. The Contractor is responsible for proper design of all spaces. Approval of working plans does not relieve the Contractor of full compliance with AHJ. 2. Areas with unfinished surfaces, including crawispaces and mechanical rooms, may have exposed piping and rough bronze sprinkler heads. 3. All other areas shall have concealed piping and recessed chrome plated sprinkler heads with chrome-plated escutcheons. In the preparation of the “working plans’, the most efficient piping and head layout may be used except in the following areas: 1. All corridors. Heads shall be installed along the centerline of the corridor and in the exact center of the ceiling tiles. 2. In all cases, comply with the requirements, of Paragraph 1.7, Sequencing, Scheduling, and Coordination with other trades, in this section. PIPING INSTALLATIONS Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. 1. Deviations from approved “Working Plans” for sprinkler piping require written approval of the authority having jurisdiction. Written approval shall be on file with the Owner's Representative prior to deviating from the approved “Working Plans’. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. Install unions in pipes 2-inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch and larger connections. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13. Hanger and support 2113 00 -6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 13 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 09603 spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer’s written instructions, for rigid systems. Provide protection from damage where subject to earthquake in accordance with NFPA 13. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION Welded Joints: AWS D10.9, Level AR-3. For shop welding only. There shall be no on-site welding. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS “Brazing Manual.” Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the Copper Development Association “Handbook for Fire Sprinkler Systems.” End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, ream pipe to full pipe |.D. VALVE INSTALLATIONS General: Install fire protection valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions, NFPA 13, and the authority having jurisdiction. Gate Valves: Install supervised-open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. Refer to Division 21 Section, 220553 “Mechanical Identification” for valve tags and signs. SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATIONS Use proper tools to prevent damage during installations. COORDINATION Certain elements of the design are at the option of the Contractor and thus are not coordinated with other trades at the time of Bidding. Coordinate all electrical requirements for fire sprinkler system with electrical contractor. Provide equipment compatible with fire alarm system. Include all electrical work not specifically included in Division 26 (electrical) work. Locate piping so not to interfere with other engineered systems. 2113 00-7 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 13 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.9 A. 3.10 3.11 3.12 09603 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform field acceptance tests of each fire protection system. 1. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems according to NFPA 13 Chapter “System Acceptance.” Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures specified, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. 1. Report test results promptly and in writing to Owner’s Representative. Maintain drawings on the job site updated daily for modifications. Use these drawings to prepare record drawings at project close out. CLEANING Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. Replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish with new sprinklers. Cleaning and reuse of painted sprinklers is prohibited. COMMISSIONING Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures are prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows: 1. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories have been installed correctly and operate correctly. 2. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete. 3 Check that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified have been replaced with new, correct type of sprinklers. 4. Check that sprinklers are correct type, have correct finish and temperature ratings, and have guards where required for applications. 5. Check that fire department connections have threads compatible with local fire department equipment and have correct pressure rating. 6. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 7 Adjust operating controls and pressure settings. Coordinate with fire alarm system tests. Operate systems as required. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Provide O & M manuals with the following information: 1. A complete set of Record Drawings bearing the necessary approval signatures and showing the actual piping and head layout, sizes, etc. Highlight all points of manual operation including, but not limited to, drains, shut-off valves, and alarms. In the case that major deviations from the Working Plans submitted at the project onset occur, provide revised Hydraulic Calculations as described earlier in this specification. Owner's Representative shall be the judge of whether deviations are major. All items required under Article “Submittals”. Maintenance Data for each fire protection system component specified. Test Reports and Certificates include “Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping” as described in NFPA 13. 5. NFPA 25 “Standard for the Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection System.” Provide original copy; this copyrighted material may not be reproduced. RON Provide a qualified representative to instruct the Owner in use and maintenance of the system. 2113 00-8 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 21 13 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEM DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Allow for two hours of instruction. Use the Record Drawings and Maintenance Manual to show the Owner the location and proper use of all points of manual operation. END OF SECTION 21 13 00 09603 21 13 00-9 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL PLUMBING WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. All work specified in Division 22. SCOPE OF WORK Provide the entire plumbing work as shown and specified, including the following: He Connect new work so as to provide a complete and operating system. All work shall include complete installation of the piping, fittings, valves, specialties, and accessories. a. Domestic cold to hose bibb, boiler fill assembly, and a one inch line run to boiler fire extinguishing system (provided by the Biomass Boiler Supplier/Contractor) All equipment and installation shall be in compliance with OSHA regulations. Intent: a! The Intent of the Contract is to include all labor and materials, tools, hoisting, scaffolding, supervision, equipment, and transportation necessary or reasonably inferable as being necessary for the execution of the work. 2 The Contract Documents endeavor to communicate intended completed work. Interim Stages, methods, and means may not be specifically indicated where such is reasonably inferable by qualified Contractors and workers. 3. The Contractor is responsible for providing the finished mechanical work, tested and ready for operation. 4. By submitting a proposal, the Contractor represents that they has made a thorough examination of the site, of the work, and all existing conditions and limitations, and that they have examined the Contract Documents in complete detail and has determined beyond doubt that the drawings, specifications, and existing conditions are sufficient, adequate and satisfactory for the execution of the work under the Contract. 5. Where minor adjustments of the work are necessary for purposes of fabrication, scheduling, or installation of items, for accommodation of site conditions reasonably inferable for this project, or resolution of conflicts between items within the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall make such adjustments at no added expense to the Owner. 6. Where such adjustments affect functional or aesthetic design of the work, they shall first be submitted to the Owner's Representative for review and approval. COORDINATION Contractor shall be thoroughly acquainted with the work involved and shall verify at the site those measurements necessary for proper installation of the work. Contractor shall refer to architectural and other engineered drawings for building construction and other details which affect the mechanical installation. They shall confer with those trades for finish adjacent to their work and arrange to have visible portions of this work (such as access doors, grilles, sprinkler heads, escutcheons, etc.) fit in and harmonize with the finish in a manner satisfactory to the Owner’s Representative. Ceilings and Heights: Architectural and structural drawings shall be checked for ceiling 22 00 00 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL PLUMBING WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 14 1.5 09603 heights, building heights, walls, and cabinets that are intended to conceal work of this Section. Where conflicts occur, the Owner's Representative shall be notified prior to installation of the work. Location of exposed work such as lights, diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads take precedence over concealed work. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS Contractor: The word "Contractor," as used in these Specifications, means the mechanical subcontractor. Owner's Representative: The person or entity designated by the Owner. It may be different persons or entities for different applications. Provide: The word "provide," as used in these Specifications, means furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the reader locate the reference. Location is not limited. Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted," mean directed by the Owner’s Representative and similar phrases. Specialist: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. Nevertheless, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. SAFETY AND PROTECTION Safety Measures to be Taken: The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the jobsite, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement shall apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. Comply with "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction," Volume 36, No. 75, Part Il of the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of Labor. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all such safety measures and shall consult with the state or federal safety inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether it is or is not in compliance with state or federal regulations. 1. The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures required for the Contractor to perform its work. The Engineer's observations of the Contractor's performance are not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on, or near the construction site. Drive Guards: Provide OSHA-approved drive and shaft guards for all exposed, rotating drive shafts and drive connections between motors and driven equipment including fans, pumps, compressors, etc. Guards shall include heavy-duty steel frames securely fastened for easy removal to the equipment frame. Guards, in general, shall be solid sheet metal with 22 00 00 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL PLUMBING WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.6 1.7 09603 tachometer cutout at shafts where applicable. Fan belt guards shall be heavy mesh or expanded metal to permit airflow. Guards may be provided by the equipment manufacturer or fabricated by this Contractor to the manufacturer's clearances, configurations, etc. Head Protection: Where pipe hangers, duct flanges and seams, equipment support angles and frames, and etc. are exposed in walkways, or in access ways for any maintenance. Cover all such potentially injurious protrusions within 6'-0" of the floor with padding. Padding shall be securely and permanently fastened and finished comparable to adjacent finishes. CODES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS Work shall be installed in conformity with applicable local ordinances and state statutes. Standards and sizes which meet or exceed preceding requirements shall be installed as indicated. Give necessary notices, obtain permits, and pay taxes, fees and other costs, including utility connections or extensions for the work. File necessary plans, prepare documents and obtain necessary approvals of governmental departments having jurisdiction. Apply for and pay for all utility meters and gauges required. Obtain required certificates of inspection for work; retain in the Project Closeout manual and deliver to the Owner's Representative before request for acceptance and final payment for the Work. Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the work. Material and equipment within the scope of the UL Testing Laboratory Service shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear their listing mark. Contractor shall call for all inspections by the authority having jurisdiction when they become due and shall not cover any work until approved by the governing authorities. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 01 Section, "Materials and Equipment". Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all materials shall be new. Contractor shall properly store all materials and equipment for protection from physical damage or damage due to corrosion. Standardization of Manufacturer: This Contractor shall make every effort to furnish all equipment of any equipment type (such as all fans, all motors, all motor controls, all pumps, all valves, and etc.) from one manufacturer. Confirm before ordering, requirements of standardization with Owner's existing equipment. Rigging and Appliances: Provide all rigging, scaffolding, staging, and ladders required for complete installation of all equipment. 22 00 00 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL PLUMBING WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA E: 1.8 09603 Manufacturer's Directions: Each material for which the manufacturer issues written directions shall be used according to its manufacturer's directions, as approved and if not at variance with these specifications. 1. If manufacturer's directions are at variance to the contract documents, install to the more stringent requirement within the terms of the manufacturer's warranty. If warranty conflicts arise, refer the question to the Owner's Representative before proceeding. Equipment Furnished by Others: For installation of equipment and casework furnished by others and installed by this Contractor, roughing-in dimensions shall be obtained from approved shop drawings, by measurements from the actual equipment, details shown on drawings, or as directed by Owner’s Representative. Accessibility: Install all equipment to be easily accessible for operation, maintenance, or repair. Equipment deemed inaccessible shall be relocated as directed. Drawings and specifications shall be taken together. Provide work specified and not drawn or work drawn and not specified as though mentioned in both. General Locations and Arrangements: 1. Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of Plumbing systems and do not attempt to show exact details or all offsets in piping. Do not scale drawings to obtain final cut lengths, quantities, or the like. Examine the architectural drawings for exact location of fixtures and equipment. 2. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size ducts and pipe and to calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install systems as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved in advance on coordination drawings. 3. Follow drawings in laying out work and check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Install piping and ducts in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, and keep openings and passageways clear. Lines that must pitch, or that must have a constant elevation, shall have the right-of-way over lines not so restricted. Maintain maximum headroom. If space conditions appear inadequate, notify the Owner’s Representative before proceeding with the work. Make reasonable modifications in the work without extra cost as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades and for proper execution of the work. 4. Site Conditions: The mechanical documents indicate certain site conditions to assist the Contractor. These drawings are not intended to indicate all conditions. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all site conditions and include the removal or relocation of equipment and wiring in the Contract. SUBSTITUTIONS Brand Names: The use of brand names is for the purpose of description and establishing quality and does not eliminate the requirements of meeting specifications. Exceptions: Other brands will be allowed except where an item or class of material is specified exclusively by trade name and followed by word "only." Requests for Substitutions: Approval of alternative and/or substitute products will be considered only under terms and conditions specified in Division 01. Changes Due to Substitutions: Design is based on equipment as listed in the equipment schedules and/or specified elsewhere in Division 22. Where implementation of an approved substitution requires redesign to any part of the work, provide such redesign. Obtain approval of redesign from the Owner's Representative. Redesign cost and additional construction cost, 22 00 00 - 4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL PLUMBING WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.9 09603 including related and incidentally affected work, resulting from the redesign shall be at the Contractor's expense. SUBMITTALS, APPROVALS, AND REVIEWS Provide submittals for all products and systems described in Division 22 and shown on the drawings to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the project. Furnish equipment submittals, include data for review, and organize data in the manner described below. Submittals procedures shall comply with applicable requirements of Division 1 specifications. Review of submittals will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for dimensions and/or errors that may be contained in them, or deviations from the Contract Documents’ requirements. It shall be clearly understood that the noting of some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the submittals, the requirements of the Contract Documents shall govern and are not waived or superseded in any way by the review of the submittals. 1. Submittals processed by the Owner's Representative and/or Architect/Engineer design team are NOT Change Orders. The purpose of Contractor Submittals is to demonstrate to the Architect/Engineer design team that the Contractor understands the design concept and demonstrates its understanding by indicating which equipment and material it intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods it intends to use. General: Submittals shall be legible. Degraded faxes, faded or smudged literature, or literature too tiny as to be reasonably read if reproduced at % size will be rejected without further review. ils Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between Submittals and Specifications are discovered either prior to or after Submittals are processed by the Architect, the Design Drawings and Specifications shall govern and shall be followed. Product Literature Requirements: A; Bind in 8-1/2 x 11 three hole, hard backed, loose-leaf binders no larger than 3” thick. Do NOT overstuff binders. Indicate the following: a. Contractor's name and contact information; and project title on the front of each binder. If there are multiple volumes required to cover the work, identify the volume on the front of each binder numbered sequentially. b. Table of contents on the first page of each binder. 1) List sections and each item in the section. c. Divide the binder(s) into sections by specification section. Place a numbered divider between each section. 1) Table of contents for each section. 2) Place each submitted item within its specification section. 3) Include a separate section for items indicated on the drawings only. d. On each item or product, customize the submittal to thoroughly convey the contractor's intent. The terminology "As Specified" used without marked up listing is not acceptable. (Show exactly what will be provided to include options or deletions.) 1) Mark submittal literature to indicate the make and model, materials, accessories, and options proposed. Cross out those not proposed. Unmarked literature indicates ALL accessories options will be provided. 2) Identify each item. Mark the project Tag or ID. Mark the specification reference and/or drawing reference which the submittal satisfies. 22 00 00 -5 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL PLUMBING WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.10 09603 3) Mark the manufacturer's name and address, and supplier's name, address and phone number. 4) Rough-in data and dimensions. 5) Operating characteristics. a) Performance curves and rated capacities. Indicate the point on the performance curve which satisfies the contract requirements. b) Temperature range and limitations, if applicable. c) Motor and electrical characteristics. d) Wiring diagrams for the specific system operation. 6) Indicate whether item is “As Specified” or “Proposed Substitution”. a) For substitutions, indicate any deviations from the specified item on the submittal. Include physical size, materials, and performance characteristics, as well options and features. 7) Working construction drawings (shop drawings) for other than stock manufactured items. Partial Submittals are permitted with cause only after prior approval such as for long lead items require special attention. Piecemeal submittals, and submittals not organized and tabbed by specification section will be returned without review. Shop Drawing Requirements: 1. Shop Drawings are for the benefit of the contractors to resolve spatial conflicts and appropriate design before the opportunities for acceptable solutions diminish. They are to convey work customized by the tradesmen for this project including, but not limited to, layouts of all piping and equipment; detailed drawings of connections equipment; assemblies of field-fabricated components; pipe, and equipment coordination drawings for congested areas; bidder design systems (controls, sprinklers, and etc); issues to benefit by Shop Drawings, and any other areas of concern. a. Spatial conflicts which arise as the project progresses which have not first been addressed by shop drawings are expressly assigned to the contractor for resolution within the contract requirements without additional cost to the owner. b. Where work obstructs the space needed for O&M, work shall be removed and redone to satisfy O&M spatial requirements without additional cost to the owner. ia, Shop Drawings utilizing manufactured equipment shall be reviewed by the manufacturer to determine correct product application before submitting. The manufacturer's determination shall be evident on the submitted shop drawing. 3. Shop drawings shall be drawn to scale by skilled drafters to conventions and norms prevailing in the field of architectural drafting. Specialized terms, symbols, and techniques which add accuracy and concisely convey the intent are encouraged. a. Shop Drawings shall include horizontal and vertical dimensions. Multiple views (top, side, front, cross-section, isometric, and etc) shall be used if necessary to illustrate the purpose of the Shop Drawing. RECORD DRAWINGS (“AS-BUILTS”) The Contractor shall, during the progress of the work, keep a current and careful record of all work indicated on the Contract Documents. Work installed as indicated on the Contract Documents may simply be confirmed with a mark on the As-builts. Changes from the Contract Documents shall be made as detailed revisions on the As-builts. 1. As-Builts shall be kept neat and clear. The final set must be reproducible at % scale with acceptable legibility. 22 00 00 -6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL PLUMBING WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.11 B. 09603 2. Records from the tradesmen’s field drawings shall be transferred to a permanent set maintained in the project office. The permanent set shall be protected from damage and loss. It shall be available for inspection by the Owner's Representative at any time. Accurately locate and indicate the following: sa>9Q00®m Pipes locations. All isolating and operating valves complete with valve tag numbers. Dimensions to buried pipes. Piping configuration at equipment, if changed from the Contract Documents. Access doors. All points requiring access for operation or maintenance. Make, model, and pertinent information on equipment schedules. Outside utilities accurately located by dimension-to-permanent construction. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals. Furnish in time for training of Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of systems and related equipment. Organize manual and include data and narrative as noted below. Use 8-1/2" x 11" white paper. 1 Bind O&M Manuals in 8-1/2 x 11 three hole, hard backed, loose-leaf binders no larger than 3” thick. Do NOT overstuff binders. Indicate the following: a. Contractor's name and contact information; and project title on the front of each binder. If there are multiple volumes required to cover the work, identify the volume on the front of each binder numbered sequentially. Table of contents on the first page of each binder. 1) List sections and each item in the section. Divide the binder(s) into sections by specification section. Place a numbered divider between each section. 1) Table of contents for each section, including page numbers. 2) Organize items within their specification section with subchapters for each class of equipment or system. Operating and Maintenance Sequence and Procedures: 1. All written information shall be typewritten. Handwritten notes, lists, or the like will not be accepted. 2. Contents: In each chapter, describe the procedures necessary for personnel to operate the system and equipment covered in that chapter. Provide procedures for start-up, operation, emergency operation, and shutdown. a. b. c. Start-up: Give complete step-by-step instructions for initial energizing equipment from cold status, making initial settings and adjustments whenever applicable. Operation: Give instructions for continued operation including ongoing settings. commands, overrides, and adjustments whenever applicable. Shutdown Procedure: Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment after operation. If a particular sequence is required, give step-by-step instructions in order. Emergency Operation: Give detailed instructions for emergency procedures required to prevent damage to equipment and property, freeze-up, human discomfort, etc. Provide a schedule of preventive maintenance for each product. Recommend frequency of performance for each preventive maintenance task; i.e., cleaning, inspection, etc. Provide instructions and schedules for all routine cleaning, lubrication and inspection with recommended lubricants for all equipment and systems. Schedule times of the year that inspection and maintenance should be performed. 22 00 00 -7 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL PLUMBING WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.12 09603 g. Provide instructions for minor repair or adjustments required for preventive maintenance routines, limited to repairs and adjustments which may be performed without special tools or test equipment, and which require no extensive special training or skills. h. Special Maintenance: Provide all information of a maintenance nature covering warranty items, etc., which have not been discussed elsewhere. Manufacturer's Catalog Cuts: Include manufacturers’ descriptive literature covering all appurtenances used in each system, together with illustrations, exploded views and renewal parts lists. Include name, address and phone number of supplier. Shop Drawings: Provide a copy of all corrected, approved shop drawings covering equipment for the project either with the manufacturers’ catalog cuts or properly identified in a separate subsection. Spare Parts Lists: Include a list of all equipment furnished for project, with a tabulation of descriptive data of all the spare parts proposed for each type of equipment or system. Properly identify each part-by-part number and manufacturer, include address and phone number. Test, Adjust, and Balance (TAB) Report: Provide the final approved TAB report. Other Items: 1. Valve Directory: Indicate valve number, size, location, function and normal position for each numbered valve. a. Provide a complete Valve Directory in the O&M Manual. b. Permanently mount a framed, glass-front copy of the Valve Directory in the each mechanical room covering the valves in that room and adjacent areas. 2. Name Plate Directory: Provide list of fans, pumps, air handling units, heating coils, concealed automatic dampers, and all other major equipment nameplates, giving manufacturer's nameplate data, nameplate designation, location of equipment, area served, switch location, normal position of switch, and equipment label designations specified. Submit directory for review and obtain approval prior to substantial completion of project. Number all pages to assure correct placement in manual. In addition to the number required by Division 1 section, “Closeout Documents”, install one copy of the approved O & M Manual in a permanently mounted sheet metal box on wall of the main mechanical equipment room. OPERATING PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION General: Provide instruction of all pertinent mechanical systems to facility operating personnel prior to facility acceptance, upon mutually satisfactory arrangement with Owner. Additional requirements may be found in other Division 22 sections which apply to the specific items in that section. 1. Instruction: Instruction shall begin only after the component, assembly, or system is complete and has been tested and is in acceptable operating condition. Instruction shall encompass normal operation, emergency operation, fire and other hazards, safety provisions, pollution prevention provisions, and maintenance procedures for all work provided. 2. Access points: A guided tour of all mechanical systems and their access points for every item requiring O&M access shall utilize the As-builts. 22 00 00-8 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL PLUMBING WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.13 1.14 09603 3. Instructors: Instructors shall be qualified on the system being instructed. Include the Contractor's staff supplemented by authorized representatives of the component, assembly, or system manufacturer. 4. Aids: Instruction process shall utilize the O&M manuals which, if deemed unsatisfactory in any content, shall be supplemented in a manner to achieve useful, pertinent, and complete instruction. 5. Time: Provide all necessary instruction to the complete understanding of the operating personnel. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows except that where instruction periods for longer terms are specified herein, such longer term shall apply: a. Plumbing fill & drainage: 2 Hours b. Backflow Preventer: 1 Hour TEMPORARY SERVICES Temporary water and sanitary facilities are specified in Division 1. Cooperate with the General Contractor and prepare these facilities for operation. Plumbing Systems: Do not use plumbing systems during construction. Cover fixture openings with taped-on plastic sheet or equivalent to keep all construction dust out of the fixture. Cleaning: Promptly remove all waste material and rubbish. At completion of the work, clean all dirt and construction debris such as paint, plaster, glue, cement, mastic, tar, paper, tape, and dirt from the plumbing installation including equipment, piping, plumbing fixtures. In finished areas to be occupied, keep equipment covered during course of construction. Where this is not practical, clean and/or refinish item to new condition. PROJECT CLOSEOUT General: Comply with all Division 1 requirements. “Substantial Completion” Inspection: Experience has proven that if the following minimum list cannot be confirmed in writing, then the occurence of deficiencies is considerable and follow up substantial completion inspections are usually necessary. In order complete this inspection on one site visit and to avoid other costly problems, we require written confirmation prior to making the substantial completion inspection. All of the following items shall be completed prior to final inspections. Provide written documentation certifying that all items highlighted in bold underline are complete and the project is ready for Substantial completion inspection. 1. General Contactor: a. The GC’s superintendent should exercise his authority as chief CQC manager to pre-inspect and certify that the subs are done. The inspector's purpose is not to perform the contractor’s quality control program, but rather to examine the results after CQC and to verify that work is complete. Provide a letter from the General Contractor stating that the project is ready for substantial completion. b. All training should be finished and sign-off sheets available for inspection. 2. Plumbing: a. All items done & clean. Insulating, painting & touch-up, ID tags, key plans inside valve access doors, valve schedules, etc done and available for inspection. b. All pumps & pipes under automatic control with clean filters & strainers. C. Punch list from prior inspections completed. d Water Heater Startup report. e. As-Builts available and all access doors located on the As-Builts. Manpower and tools: a. General Contractor's superintendent or CQC manager. b. Other subs should be available in case an item in their trade needs examination. 22 00 00-9 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL PLUMBING WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA c. Inspectors will need ladders or lifts to reach all equipment & access doors. d. Inspectors will need tools of the trades involved to open panels and check internals where required. C. Requirements for “Final Inspection”: All of the following items shall be completed prior to final inspections. No exceptions will be made and no approval for final payment will be made until all items are completed. A Equipment and premises entirely clean 2 Operating instructions and maintenance manuals, final approved copy 3. Record drawings ("as-built"), final approved copy 4 Guarantee D. Guarantee: 4 All work performed under this Contract shall be guaranteed against faulty and improper materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified herein, such longer term shall apply, and this Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall promptly correct any deficiencies which occur during the guarantee period, all to the satisfaction of the Owner. This Contractor shall require similar guarantees from its subcontractors. 2s All equipment and installation shall be guaranteed by the Contractor to be in compliance with OSHA regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable. END OF SECTION 22 00 00 09603 22 00 00 - 10 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. C. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. B. Cc. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 22 00 00, “General Plumbing Work’. Follow all provisions of Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work’. WORK INCLUDED This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 22 Sections. In addition to the requirements in section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work’, the following additional work is stated herein. 1. Testing of plumbing systems. DEFINITIONS See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work”. QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel". Equipment and pipe identification shall conform to ASME A13.1 for lettering size. Length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work’. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 09603 MANUFACTURERS See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work”. 22 05 00 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS 2.2 COMMON MATERIALS & METHODS A. See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work,” for the following: 1 Joining Materials. 2. Piping Specialties. 3. Grout. 4. Firestopping. 5. Sleeve Sealants and Caulks. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 3.3 3.4 09603 PIPING SYSTEMS—COMMON REQUIREMENTS See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work,” article 3.1, “HVAC Systems — Common Requirements’. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION—COMMON REQUIREMENTS See Section 23 05 00, “General Mechanical Work,” for work listed below: Sealing Through Air Plenums, Shafts, and Floors. Installation of firestopping. Housekeeping pads. mechanical demolition. cutting and patching. Touch-up painting. provisions for later installation. connecting equipment furnished under other divisions. ONOAARWN> CLEANING AND TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS General: Provide corrosion protection for all ferrous metal portions of mechanical work exposed to weather including fans, piping and accessories, supports and other items. During construction, properly cap all lines, to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc. Each system of piping shall be flushed through after completion (for the purpose of removing grit, dirt, sand, etc., from piping) for as long as required to thoroughly clean the apparatus. TESTING OF PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PIPING SYSTEMS Water Piping: All piping inside building shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure at least 1-1/2 times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 100 psi, for a minimum of 24 hours. Only potable water shall be used for testing. Backflow Prevention: Backflow prevention into connected water systems shall be tested for proper functioning under conditions normal to their application. Testing shall be performed in compliance with the requirements of the local water purveyor or health authority. Drains: All floor drains, garage drains, planter drains, trench or area drains shall be flow tested to demonstrate proper operation. All traps and sumps shall be cleaned out. Each piece of plumbing equipment and the entire plumbing system shall be adjusted and readjusted as required to ensure proper functioning and shall be left in first-class operating condition. Sterilization and Flushing: All water piping, eight-hour sterilization contact time, 50 parts per 2205 00-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS million chlorine concentration; open all valves several times, following by flushing with clean water until residual chlorine is less than 0.2 ppm. F. Owner Approval: Sterilization tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner's Representative and shall be approved by him. Include copy of approval in the O&M manual. G. Provisions for Testing: Provide temporary valving or cap piping at connections to existing systems as required to confine testing to the new piping systems. 3.5 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS A. Provide rough-in and final connections to equipment as listed in architectural specifications and equipment schedules. B. Obtain all rough-in data from approved shop drawings on all equipment. C. Equipment and fixtures furnished under other divisions of these specifications will be received, uncrated, and set in place under other divisions unless otherwise specified. D. Unless otherwise specified, make all final piping connections to equipment furnished under other divisions to include, but not be limited to, installation of all brass and fittings, strainers, pressure reducing valves, flow control valves, relief valves, and grease traps provided with or as an integral part of equipment. E. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide wiring, except temperature control wiring, equipment control wiring and interlock wiring unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide power wiring complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including power wiring through starters. END OF SECTION 22 05 00 09603 22 05 00 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 05 29 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL Le A. B. Cc. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. B. Cc. 1.4 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 22 00 00, “General Plumbing Work”. Refer to Section 230529, “Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment”, for plumbing hanger and support requirements. WORK INCLUDED Work under this section shall include furnishing and installing hangers and supports common to the mechanical piping and duct systems and shall include, but not be limited to: a Pipe Hangers and Supports. 2. Expansion Devices. 3. Equipment Bases and Supports. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 22 00 00, "General Plumbing Work". Submit product information on all hangers, hanger rods, inserts, anchors, expansion shells, beam clamps, and other hanger or support attachments. Submit shop drawings of bases and housekeeping pads. QUALITY ASSURANCE Codes and Regulations: Anchor Bolts: Comply with the Uniform Building Code and resist lateral seismic forces and overturning forces (applied to the center of gravity). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 09603 REFER TO SECTION 230529, “HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT” FOR THE FOLLOWING PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Manufacturers. Structural attachments. Intermediate attachments. Pipe attachments. Equipment bases and supports. Piping hanger inserts and shields. 22 05 29 - 1 415110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 05 29 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA G. Bolted metal framing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REFER TO SECTION 230529, “HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT” FOR THE FOLLOWING EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS A. Hanger spacing for piping. B. Installation of hangers, anchors, supports. END OF SECTION 22 05 29 09603 22 05 29-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 05 53 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. Cc. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. B. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 22 00 00, “General Plumbing Work”. Refer to Section 23 05 53, “Mechanical Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment”, for plumbing identification requirements. WORK INCLUDED Work under this section shall include furnishing and installing painting and identification of the mechanical systems including equipment, piping, ductwork, and accessories as specified. Work shall include, but be limited to, the following: Ae Paint mechanical work, including insulated and non-insulated piping. 2. Provide color-coded bands and legend for all piping systems. 3. Repaint factory-finished equipment if damaged. 4. Label each piece of mechanical equipment and system with equipment or system name. 5. Provide tag on each valve with identifying number. Providing valve tag chart. 6. Provide flow directional arrows on all piping. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 22 00 00, "General Plumbing Work". Submit product information for paint, identification bands, and valve tags. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. Cc. D. REFER TO SECTION 23 05 53, “MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT” FOR THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS. Acceptable manufacturers. Paint. Piping identification bands. Valve identification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 09603 REFER TO SECTION 23 05 53, “MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT” FOR THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS: Installation of Mechanical Identification. Painting. 22 05 53 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 05 53 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. Valve Tags. D. Color-Coded Identification bands and flow arrows. END OF SECTION 22 05 53 09603 22 05 53-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 07 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PLUMBING INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. Cc. 12 A. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. B. Cc. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 22 00 00, “General Plumbing Work”. Refer to Section 23 07 00, “HVAC Insulation”, for plumbing insulation requirements. WORK INCLUDED Description: Work under this section shall include furnishing all labor, material, tools and equipment necessary for the complete installation of all mechanical insulation including: a Pipe Insulation. 2. Equipment Insulation. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 22 00 00, "General Plumbing Work". Submit product information for all insulation, jackets, adhesives, closure devices, strapping, and special covers for fittings, valves, and pumps. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire Hazard Rating: All insulation, facings, coatings, adhesives, and other accessories shall have a fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for Flame Spread and 50 for Fuel Contributed and Smoke Developed; ratings determined by UL Standard No. 723, NFPA Standard No. 255, or ASTM Standard No. E-84. UL-labeled listing or satisfactory test results from the approved testing laboratory shall be available to indicate that fire hazard ratings for materials do not exceed the above amounts. Approval of a manufacturer of insulation is not to be taken as approval of the manufacturer's "usual" or "regular" accessory materials, such as facings, adhesives, etc. Manufacturer's Stamp or Label: Every package or standard container of insulation, jackets, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered to the project site for use must have the manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving name of manufacturer, brand, and description of material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. 09603 REFER TO SECTION 23 07 00, “HVAC INSULATION”, FOR THE FOLLOWING PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: Manufacturers. Insulation Materials. 22 07 00 - 1 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 07 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PLUMBING INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 3 - EXECUTION <The REFER TO SECTION 23 07 00, “HVAC INSULATION’, FOR THE FOLLOWING EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS: A. Insulation Work—General. B. Insulation Installation, Piping. Cc. Installation Of Rigid Glass Fiber Board On Equipment And Tanks. D. Jackets For Pipe Insulation. E. Fitting Insulation Covers, And Flange Covers. F. Insulation Of Equipment. 3.2 PLUMBING INSULATION—APPLICATIONS A. General: Pipe insulation shall be provided for all piping systems listed below. 1 Interior domestic cold water: Below 60°F. 2, Domestic hot water and recirculating piping: All. 3. Tempered water lines: a. Emergency Shower: N/A. b. Faucets: All. B. Thickness: Thickness of pipe insulation for each application shall be in accordance with the following table: MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR INSULATION NOMINAL PIPE SIZE* Length Temp. inside 1” and 1-1/4” 2-1/2” 5" to System (°F) Material building less to 2" to 4" 6" Domestic Hot and i Cold Water 35-120 Glass Fiber All 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 Plumbing Vents 0-75 Glass Fiber 4.0 Ft. - 1.0 1.0 1.0 Through Roof Rain Leaders 33-75 Glass Fiber All - - 1.0 1.0 *For piping exposed to ambient outdoor air, increase thickness by 1.0". END OF SECTION 22 07 00 09603 22 07 00-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 09 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. Cc. bn 4 A. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. B. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 22 00 00, “General Plumbing Work’. Refer to Section 23 09 13, “General Duty Valves for HVAC’, for plumbing valve requirements. WORK INCLUDED Work under this Section shall include furnishing and installing general duty valves common to the several mechanical piping systems specified in Division 22. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 22 00 00, "General Plumbing Work". Submit product information for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application. QUALITY ASSURANCE Standardization: Where possible, provide valves of the same manufacturer throughout. One manufacturer for bronze valves, and one manufacturer for iron valves throughout, where possible. Identification: Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of body. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. Cc. 09603 REFER TO SECTION 23 09 13, “GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC”, FOR THE FOLLOWING PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: Manufacturers. Valves—domestic water systems (see Valves, Low Pressure Water Systems). Valves—miscellaneous. 22 09 13 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 09 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REFER TO SECTION 23 09 13, “GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC”, FOR THE FOLLOWING EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS: A. Valve inspection. B. Installation. C. Valve end selection. D. Adjusting. END OF SECTION 22 09 13 09603 22 0913-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 11 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 2 1.3 1.5 1.6 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 22 00 00, “General Plumbing Work”. Refer to Section 23 21 13, “Hydronic Piping”, for plumbing pipe and fitting requirements. WORK INCLUDED Work under this section shall include furnishing and installing piping, fittings, and connections common to the various piping systems specified in Division 22. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 22 00 00, "General Plumbing Work". Submit product information for each type of pipe and fitting. Include construction material description, and pressure and temperature classification. Provide pipe connection details, dimensions, and required clearances; and installation instructions for items not covered by ASME B31.9-2004, “Building Services Piping”. Submit engineer's design shop drawings and calculations for engineered seismic restraint system, if applicable. Submit shop drawings for all piping over 2” in size. QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualify welding processes, procedures, and operators for piping according to ASME B31.9- 2004, “Building Services Piping”. Flanges and fittings shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25 to permanently identify the manufacturer. STORAGE AND PROTECTION Cover stored piping and fittings, materials to protect from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. 1 Store pipes and tubes with protective end caps to maintain pipe end condition and to prevent entry of foreign material. 2. Retain protective plugs and caps on other materials when provided by manufacturers. Protect all pipe and fittings from paint or grease, except for specified final finishes. DEFINITIONS Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing. 2211 16-1 415110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 11 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. Cc. PIPING SYSTEMS Domestic Water Piping: hs Above Ground: a. Pipe: Copper, Type L, hard drawn, seamless, ASTM B88. b. Fittings: Wrought copper or bronze soldered, ANSI/ASME B16.22. 2. Below Ground: a. Pipe: Copper, Type K, annealed, seamless, ASTM B88. b. Fittings: Wrought copper or bronze soldered, ANSI/ASME B16.22. Pipes Subject to Exterior Environment or Exterior Below Ground: fl Arctic Pipe with Electric Freeze Protection Heat Tracing, per Division 2 requirements. Refer to Section 23 21 13, “Hydronic Piping”, for the following product requirements: 1. Pipe Joining. 2. Pipe sleeves and seals. 3. Escutcheons. 4. Firestopping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 3.2 A. B. Cc. 3.3 A. B. 09603 REFER TO SECTION 23 21 13, “HYDRONIC PIPING’, FOR THE FOLLOWING EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS For General requirements, see “Installation of piping”. For requirements specific to Domestic Water Piping, see “Plumbing Piping Installation’. CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS Clean and flush domestic water plumbing according to the provisions in 23 21 13, same as for hydronic piping. Sanitize with chlorine solution according to the state Department of DEQ requirements. Submit water samples to an independent testing lab for analysis. Include analysis report in the O&M Manual. TESTING OF PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PIPING SYSTEMS Provisions for Testing: Provide temporary valving or cap piping at connections to equipment as required to confine testing to the affected piping systems. a Protect equipment from pressures that exceed their ratings. IZ, Notify Owner's Representative 7 days prior to pipe cleaning to allow witness of this work. 3. Retain certificates of each pressure test, with signature from the witness authorized by the Owner's representative. Water Piping: All piping inside building shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure at least 1-1/2 times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 100 psi, for a minimum of 24 hours. Only potable water shall be used for testing. 221116 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 11 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. Backflow Prevention: Backflow prevention into connected water systems shall be tested for proper functioning under conditions normal to their application. Testing shall be performed in compliance with the requirements of the local water purveyor or health authority. Drains: All floor drains, garage drains, planter drains, trench or area drains shall be flow tested to demonstrate proper operation. All traps and sumps shall be cleaned out. Each piece of plumbing equipment and the entire plumbing system shall be adjusted and readjusted as required to ensure proper functioning and shall be left in first-class operating condition. Sterilization and Flushing: All water piping, eight-hour sterilization contact time, 50 parts per million chlorine concentration; open all valves several times, following by flushing with clean water until residual chlorine is less than 0.2 ppm. Owner Approval: Sterilization tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner's Representative and shall be approved by him. Include copy of approval in the O&M manual. END OF SECTION 22 11 16 09603 22 1116-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 1117 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Follow all provisions of Section 22 00 00, General Plumbing Work. Cc. Refer to Section 23 05 19, “Meters, Gauges, and Specialties for HVAC Piping”, for Plumbing Specialties requirements. te WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this section shall include furnishing and installing domestic water piping systems, including piping, fittings, piping specialties, and associated components, as specified or indicated. This Section also includes the following: 1. Trap Primers, Hose Bibbs, Water hammer Arresters, and Backflow Preventers. 2. Dielectric Fittings. 3. Disinfecting Domestic Water Piping. 4. Potable Water Piping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 22 00 00, "General Plumbing Work". B. Submit product information for each item of equipment, component, or specialties required for the domestic water piping system. Include construction material description, pressure and temperature classification, pipe connection details, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Cc. Test Reports: Disinfection. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standardization: Provide components of the same manufacturer throughout where possible. B. Identification: Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of body. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Hose Bibb: a. Smith. b. Chicago. c. Woodford. 09603 221117-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 11 17 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 09603 2. Water Hammer Arrestors: a. Sioux Chief. b. Smith. c. Zurn. 3. Backflow Preventer: a. Hersey “Beeco’. b. Zurn/Wilkins. Cc. Febco. WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS Provide shock absorbing water hammer arresters in hot and cold water piping to plumbing fixtures, nitrogen precharged and permanently factory sealed, piston type shock arrester, unit constructed entirely of copper, threaded nipple connection, PDI tested and certified for concealed installation. Option: Stainless steel bellows construction. HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS Wall Hydrant—Cold Water Indoor Type: 3/4" hose connection, anti-siphon type hydrant with integral vacuum breaker; bronze casing, hose connection and working parts: 1. Finish: rough bronze. Dielectric Fittings — Dielectric Unions are not acceptable. a Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. a. Calpico, Inc. or Lochinvar Corp "V-Line”. 2 Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. a. Perfection Corp., Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., Sioux Chief, or Victaulic Corporation. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Backflow Preventers in General: Backflow preventers, valves, fittings and piping exposed in finished rooms shall be chromium-plated unless otherwise indicated. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: Reduced pressure type, line pressure operated; state and local approved; low-pressure drop with accessories and fittings required for testing by water purveyor or authority having jurisdiction; gate valve on each side, supported on steel wall brackets. THERMOMETERS, AND GAUGES Refer to Section 230519, “Meters, Gauges, and Specialties for HVAC Piping” for requirements. MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS TO MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT General: Contractor shall make all water connections complete with necessary valves to all equipment furnished by others requiring mechanical hook-up. All exposed piping shall be brass, chromium plated in finished areas. Equipment: Icemakers, washers, and any other equipment equipped with quick closing automatic valve, shall be provided water connection through a gate valve and a Watts No. U5B 221117 -2 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 11 17 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Or approved, high capacity pressure reducing valve with integral strainers set at 40 psi maximum, or as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 09603 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING INSTALLATION General: 1. The handling of piping system materials and installation of the work shall be performed in a manner which will minimize possible contamination and minimize the necessity of sterilization. 2) All pipe, tubing, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories shall be clean and free of all extraneous foreign material before being installed into their respective systems. Pipe shall be cleaned by hammering, shaking, swabbing, purging and flushing or by a combination of methods. 3. At completion, all lines shall be flushed with water. Arrange for disposition of all flushing water. Leaks in Piping: Repair or replace piping immediately if a leak appears. Temporary Piping: Provide all temporary pipe, valves, fittings, etc. required to provide temporary service for construction. Dielectric Fittings: Provide dielectric type, fittings or flanges where pipe sections made of dissimilar metals are to be joined. Piping: al Support at Connections to Equipment: Piping connected to equipment shall be installed to provide flexibility for thermal stresses and for vibration and shall be adequately Supported and anchored so that strain from weight and thermal movement of piping is not imposed on the equipment. 2. Shutoff Valves: Shutoff valves shall be installed at the base of each plumbing riser serving more than one fixture, in each branch line serving more than one fixture, and elsewhere as shown. All valves shall be installed in positions accessible for operation and repair. 3. Grading of Piping: All piping shall be graded so that it can be drained. Hose end drains shall be provided at low points which cannot drain through fixtures or hose bibbs. Connections to Fixtures: 1. General: Rigidly anchor supply connections at fixtures, to steel or copper straps secured to studs. At flush valves, provide fitting with lugs secured to strap. At lavatories and other fixtures, secure piping directly to strap. 2. Water Hammer Arresters: Install on hot and cold water piping, locate one to each faucet, control valve, flush valve, or any other type quick closing valve. 3. Compression-Type Stops: Provide on water supply to all fixtures that are not connected through integral stops, or stops in pipe space. Connect to schedule 40 brass nipple. Backflow Preventers: iP Install according to manufacturer's listing. 2. Backflow preventers shall be installed so as to be fully accessible for testing and maintenance by the water purveyor. 3. Provide funnel below each backflow preventer discharge. Funnel shall include approved air gap and drain line to funnel floor drain or other approved receptor. 4. Provide steel wall brackets for support of backflow preventers. 221117 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 22 11 17 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.2 A. 3.3 TESTING Test water distribution piping as follows: 1. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig above the operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source, and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 2. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest the system or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 3. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. CLEANING Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: 1. it 3. 4. Purge new potable water distribution piping systems and parts of existing potable water systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or, if a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill system, or part thereof, with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off), and allow to stand for 24 hours. Cc. Drain system, or part thereof of previous solution, and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate, and allow to stand for 3 hours. d. Flush system with clean, potable water, until chlorine does not remain in water coming from system following allowed standing time. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to State certified laboratory for examination. Provide Owner's Representative with laboratory test report. Repeat procedure if examination made by the laboratory shows evidence of contamination. f. Place warning signs on all water outlets during test. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfection activities. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. END OF SECTION 22 11 17 09603 221117-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. All work specified in Division 23. SCOPE OF WORK Provide the entire mechanical work as shown and specified, including the following: ff 2. Connect new work to existing so as to provide a complete and operating system. Furnish and install Mechanical HVAC systems, including: HVAC piping. HVAC ductwork. HVAC equipment. HVAC Supports and restraints. HVAC Testing, Adjustment, and Balancing services. HVAC Equipment Startup services. Training and warranty. All appurtenances, accessories, fittings, valves, dampers, and devices related to HVAC systems. sa->pagTD All equipment and installation shall be in compliance with OSHA regulations. Intent: A. The Intent of the Contract is to include all labor and materials, tools, hoisting, scaffolding, supervision, equipment, and transportation necessary or reasonably inferable as being necessary for the execution of the work. a. The Contract Documents endeavor to communicate intended completed work. Interim stages, methods, and means may not be specifically indicated where such is reasonably inferable by qualified Contractors and workers. The Contractor is responsible for providing the finished mechanical work, tested and ready for operation. By submitting a proposal, the Contractor represents that they has made a thorough examination of the site, of the work, and all existing conditions and limitations, and that they have examined the Contract Documents in complete detail and has determined beyond doubt that the drawings, specifications, and existing conditions are sufficient, adequate and satisfactory for the execution of the work under the Contract. Where minor adjustments of the work are necessary for purposes of fabrication, scheduling, or installation of items, for accommodation of site conditions reasonably inferable for this project, or resolution of conflicts between items within the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall make such adjustments at no added expense to the Owner. a. Where such adjustments affect functional or aesthetic design of the work, they shall first be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for review and approval. COORDINATION Contractor shall be thoroughly acquainted with the work involved and shall verify at the site those measurements necessary for proper installation of the work. Contractor shall refer to architectural and other engineered drawings for building construction 23 00 00 -1 415110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 14 1.5 09603 and other details which affect the mechanical installation. They shall confer with those trades for finish adjacent to their work and arrange to have visible portions of this work (such as access doors, grilles, sprinkler heads, escutcheons, etc.) fit in and harmonize with the finish in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. Ceilings and Heights: Architectural and structural drawings shall be checked for ceiling heights, building heights, walls, and cabinets that are intended to conceal work of this Section. Where conflicts occur, the Owner’s Representative shall be notified prior to installation of the work. Location of exposed work such as lights, diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads take precedence over concealed work. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS Contractor: The word "Contractor," as used in these Specifications, means the mechanical subcontractor. Owner's Representative: The person or entity designated by the Owner. It may be different persons or entities for different applications. Provide: The word "provide," as used in these Specifications, means furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the reader locate the reference. Location is not limited. Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted," mean directed by the Owner’s Representative and similar phrases. Specialist: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. Nevertheless, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. SAFETY AND PROTECTION Safety Measures to be Taken: The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the jobsite, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement shall apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. Comply with "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction," Volume 36, No. 75, Part Il of the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of Labor. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all such safety measures and shall consult with the state or federal safety inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether it is or is not in compliance with state or federal regulations. 1. The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures required for the Contractor to perform its work. The Engineer's observations of the Contractor's performance are not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on, or near the construction site. 23 00 00 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. 1.6 1.7 09603 Drive Guards: Provide OSHA-approved drive and shaft guards for all exposed, rotating drive shafts and drive connections between motors and driven equipment including fans, pumps, compressors, etc. Guards shall include heavy-duty steel frames securely fastened for easy removal to the equipment frame. Guards, in general, shall be solid sheet metal with tachometer cutout at shafts where applicable. Fan belt guards shall be heavy mesh or expanded metal to permit airflow. Guards may be provided by the equipment manufacturer or fabricated by this Contractor to the manufacturer's clearances, configurations, etc. Head Protection: Where pipe hangers, duct flanges and seams, equipment support angles and frames, and etc. are exposed in walkways, or in access ways for any maintenance. Cover all such potentially injurious protrusions within 6'-0" of the floor with padding. Padding shall be securely and permanently fastened and finished comparable to adjacent finishes. CODES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS Work shall be installed in conformity with applicable local ordinances and state statutes. Standards and sizes which meet or exceed preceding requirements shall be installed as indicated. Give necessary notices, obtain permits, and pay taxes, fees and other costs, including utility connections or extensions for the work. File necessary plans, prepare documents and obtain necessary approvals of governmental departments having jurisdiction. Apply for and pay for all utility meters and gauges required. Obtain required certificates of inspection for work; retain in the Project Closeout manual and deliver to the Owner’s Representative before request for acceptance and final payment for the Work. Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the work. Material and equipment within the scope of the UL Testing Laboratory Service shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear their listing mark. Contractor shall call for all inspections by the authority having jurisdiction when they become due and shall not cover any work until approved by the governing authorities. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 01 Section, "Materials and Equipment". Warranty: Products, material, and installations shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects in material and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance. Any portion of the work repaired or replaced under warranty shall be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period. 1. Certain items have longer warranty requirements stated in their respective specification sections. The foregoing shall not limit such warranties, and the longer warranty provisions shall apply. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all materials shall be new. Contractor shall properly store all materials and equipment for protection from physical damage or damage due to corrosion. Standardization of Manufacturer: This Contractor shall make every effort to furnish all 23 00 00 - 3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.8 09603 equipment of any equipment type (such as all fans, all motors, all motor controls, all pumps, all valves, and etc.) from one manufacturer. Confirm before ordering, requirements of standardization with Owner's existing equipment. Rigging and Appliances: Provide all rigging, scaffolding, staging, and ladders required for complete installation of all equipment. Manufacturer's Directions: Each material for which the manufacturer issues written directions shall be used according to its manufacturer's directions, as approved and if not at variance with these specifications. q. If manufacturer's directions are at variance to the contract documents, install to the more stringent requirement within the terms of the manufacturer's warranty. If warranty conflicts arise, refer the question to the Owner's Representative before proceeding. Equipment Furnished by Others: For installation of equipment and casework furnished by others and installed by this Contractor, roughing-in dimensions shall be obtained from approved shop drawings, by measurements from the actual equipment, details shown on drawings, or as directed by Owner's Representative. Accessibility: Install all equipment to be easily accessible for operation, maintenance, or repair. Equipment deemed inaccessible shall be relocated as directed. Drawings and specifications shall be taken together. Provide work specified and not drawn or work drawn and not specified as though mentioned in both. General Locations and Arrangements: fe Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of HVAC systems and do not attempt to show exact details or all offsets in piping and ductwork. Do not scale drawings to obtain final cut lengths, quantities, or the like. Examine the architectural drawings for exact location of fixtures and equipment. 2: Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size ducts and pipe and to calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install systems as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved in advance on coordination drawings. 3. Follow drawings in laying out work and check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Install piping and ducts in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, and keep openings and passageways clear. Lines that must pitch, or that must have a constant elevation, shall have the right-of-way over lines not so restricted. Maintain maximum headroom. If space conditions appear inadequate, notify the Owner’s Representative before proceeding with the work. Make reasonable modifications in the work without extra cost as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades and for proper execution of the work. 4. Site Conditions: The mechanical documents indicate certain site conditions to assist the Contractor. These drawings are not intended to indicate all conditions. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all site conditions and include the removal or relocation of equipment and wiring in the Contract. SUBSTITUTIONS Brand Names: The use of brand names is for the purpose of description and establishing quality and does not eliminate the requirements of meeting specifications. Exceptions: Other brands will be allowed except where an item or class of material is specified exclusively by trade name and followed by word "only." Requests for Substitutions: Approval of alternative and/or substitute products will be considered 23 00 00 - 4 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.9 09603 only under terms and conditions specified in Division 01. Changes Due to Substitutions: Design is based on equipment as listed in the equipment schedules and/or specified elsewhere in Division 23. Where implementation of an approved substitution requires redesign to any part of the work, provide such redesign. Obtain approval of redesign from the Owner's Representative. Redesign cost and additional construction cost, including related and incidentally affected work, resulting from the redesign shall be at the Contractor's expense. SUBMITTALS, APPROVALS, AND REVIEWS Provide submittals for all products and systems described in Division 23 and shown on the drawings to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the project. Furnish equipment submittals, include data for review, and organize data in the manner described below. Submittals procedures shall comply with applicable requirements of Division 1 specifications. Review of submittals will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for dimensions and/or errors that may be contained in them, or deviations from the Contract Documents’ requirements. It shall be clearly understood that the noting of some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the submittals, the requirements of the Contract Documents shall govern and are not waived or superseded in any way by the review of the submittals. 1. Submittals processed by the Owner’s Representative and/or Architect/Engineer design team are NOT Change Orders. The purpose of Contractor Submittals is to demonstrate to the Architect/Engineer design team that the Contractor understands the design concept and demonstrates its understanding by indicating which equipment and material it intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods it intends to use. General: Submittals shall be legible. Degraded faxes, faded or smudged literature, or literature too tiny as to be reasonably read if reproduced at % size will be rejected without further review. a, Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between Submittals and Specifications are discovered either prior to or after Submittals are processed by the Architect, the Design Drawings and Specifications shall govern and shall be followed. Product Literature Requirements: 4: Bind in 8-1/2 x 11 three hole, hard backed, loose-leaf binders no larger than 3” thick. Do NOT overstuff binders. Indicate the following: a. Contractor's name and contact information; and project title on the front of each binder. If there are multiple volumes required to cover the work, identify the volume on the front of each binder numbered sequentially. b. Table of contents on the first page of each binder. 1) List sections and each item in the section. c. Divide the binder(s) into sections by specification section. Place a numbered divider between each section. 1) Table of contents for each section. 2) Place each submitted item within its specification section. 3) Include a separate section for items indicated on the drawings only. 23 00 00 - 5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 09603 d. On each item or product, customize the submittal to thoroughly convey the contractor's intent. The terminology "As Specified" used without marked up listing is not acceptable. (Show exactly what will be provided to include options or deletions.) 1) Mark submittal literature to indicate the make and model, materials, accessories, and options proposed. Cross out those not proposed. Unmarked literature indicates ALL accessories options will be provided. 2) Identify each item. Mark the project Tag or ID. Mark the specification reference and/or drawing reference which the submittal satisfies. 3) Mark the manufacturer's name and address, and supplier's name, address and phone number. 4) Rough-in data and dimensions. 5) Operating characteristics. a) Performance curves and rated capacities. Indicate the point on the performance curve which satisfies the contract requirements. b) Temperature range and limitations, if applicable. c) Motor and electrical characteristics. d) Wiring diagrams for the specific system operation. 6) Indicate whether item is “As Specified” or “Proposed Substitution”. a) For substitutions, indicate any deviations from the specified item on the submittal. Include physical size, materials, and performance characteristics, as well options and features. 7) Working construction drawings (shop drawings) for other than stock manufactured items. Partial Submittals are permitted with cause only after prior approval such as for long lead items require special attention. Piecemeal submittals, and submittals not organized and tabbed by specification section will be returned without review. Shop Drawing Requirements: 1. Shop Drawings are for the benefit of the contractors to resolve spatial conflicts and appropriate design before the opportunities for acceptable solutions diminish. They are to convey work customized by the tradesmen for this project including, but not limited to, layouts of all air handlers, and HVAC units; fan plenums; detailed drawings of sheet metal connections at all air handlers, HVAC units, and fans over 2000 CFM; assemblies of field-fabricated components; duct, pipe, and equipment coordination drawings for congested areas; bidder design systems (controls, sprinklers, and etc); issues to benefit by Shop Drawings, and any other areas of concern. a. Spatial conflicts which arise as the project progresses which have not first been addressed by shop drawings are expressly assigned to the contractor for resolution within the contract requirements without additional cost to the owner. b. Where work obstructs the space needed for O&M, work shall be removed and redone to satisfy O&M spatial requirements without additional cost to the owner. Shop Drawings utilizing manufactured equipment shall be reviewed by the manufacturer to determine correct product application before submitting. The manufacturer's determination shall be evident on the submitted shop drawing. Shop drawings shall be drawn to scale by skilled drafters to conventions and norms prevailing in the field of architectural drafting. Specialized terms, symbols, and techniques which add accuracy and concisely convey the intent are encouraged. a. Shop Drawings shall include horizontal and vertical dimensions. Multiple views (top, side, front, cross-section, isometric, and etc) shall be used if necessary to illustrate the purpose of the Shop Drawing. 23 00 00 -6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS (“AS-BUILTS”) A. The Contractor shall, during the progress of the work, keep a current and careful record of all work indicated on the Contract Documents. Work installed as indicated on the Contract Documents may simply be confirmed with a mark on the As-builts. Changes from the Contract Documents shall be made as detailed revisions on the As-builts. is As-Builts shall be kept neat and clear. The final set must be reproducible at % scale with acceptable legibility. 2. Records from the tradesmen’s field drawings shall be transferred to a permanent set maintained in the project office. The permanent set shall be protected from damage and loss. It shall be available for inspection by the Owner's Representative at any time. Accurately locate and indicate the following: Pipes and duct locations. All isolating and operating valves complete with valve tag numbers. Dimensions to buried pipes and ducts. Piping configuration at HVAC equipment, if changed from the Contract Documents. Fans, dampers, terminal boxes, and duct coils. Access doors. All points requiring access for operation or maintenance. Make, model, and pertinent information on equipment schedules. Outside utilities accurately located by dimension-to-permanent construction. Fa-ea009 B. Upon completion of the installation, furnish the complete permanent set of as-built drawings on reproducible transparencies to the Owner's Representative. his Contractor shall obtain transparencies of the Contract Drawings from the Owner's Representative and pay all costs associated. Electronic files in drawing format (AutoCAD) will be available at no charge. 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals. Furnish in time for training of Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of systems and related equipment. Organize manual and include data and narrative as noted below. Use 8-1/2" x 11" white paper. 1. Bind O&M Manuals in 8-1/2 x 11 three hole, hard backed, loose-leaf binders no larger than 3” thick. Do NOT overstuff binders. Indicate the following: a. Contractor's name and contact information; and project title on the front of each binder. If there are multiple volumes required to cover the work, identify the volume on the front of each binder numbered sequentially. b. Table of contents on the first page of each binder. 1) List sections and each item in the section. c. Divide the binder(s) into sections by specification section. Place a numbered divider between each section. 1) Table of contents for each section, including page numbers. 2) Organize items within their specification section with subchapters for each Class of equipment or system. B. Operating and Maintenance Sequence and Procedures: iA All written information shall be typewritten. Handwritten notes, lists, or the like will not be accepted. 2. Contents: In each chapter, describe the procedures necessary for personnel to operate the system and equipment covered in that chapter. Provide procedures for start-up, operation, emergency operation, and shutdown. a. Start-up: Give complete step-by-step instructions for initial energizing equipment from cold status, making initial settings and adjustments whenever applicable. 09603 23 00 00-7 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 09603 b. Operation: Give instructions for continued operation including ongoing settings. commands, overrides, and adjustments whenever applicable. Cc. Shutdown Procedure: Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment after operation. If a particular sequence is required, give step-by-step instructions in order. d. Emergency Operation: Give detailed instructions for emergency procedures required to prevent damage to equipment and property, freeze-up, human discomfort, etc. e. Provide a schedule of preventive maintenance for each product. Recommend frequency of performance for each preventive maintenance task; i.e., cleaning, inspection, etc. f. Provide instructions and schedules for all routine cleaning, lubrication and inspection with recommended lubricants for all equipment and systems. Schedule times of the year that inspection and maintenance should be performed. g. Provide instructions for minor repair or adjustments required for preventive maintenance routines, limited to repairs and adjustments which may be performed without special tools or test equipment, and which require no extensive special training or skills. h. Special Maintenance: Provide all information of a maintenance nature covering warranty items, etc., which have not been discussed elsewhere. Manufacturer's Catalog Cuts: Include manufacturers' descriptive literature covering all appurtenances used in each system, together with illustrations, exploded views and renewal parts lists. Include name, address and phone number of supplier. Shop Drawings: Provide a copy of all corrected, approved shop drawings covering equipment for the project either with the manufacturers’ catalog cuts or properly identified in a separate subsection. Spare Parts Lists: Include a list of all equipment furnished for project, with a tabulation of descriptive data of all the spare parts proposed for each type of equipment or system. Properly identify each part-by-part number and manufacturer, include address and phone number. Test, Adjust, and Balance (TAB) Report: Provide the final approved TAB report. Other Items: 1. Valve Directory: Indicate valve number, size, location, function and normal position for each numbered valve. a. Provide a complete Valve Directory in the O&M Manual. b. Permanently mount a framed, glass-front copy of the Valve Directory in the each mechanical room covering the valves in that room and adjacent areas. 2. Name Plate Directory: Provide list of fans, pumps, air handling units, heating coils, concealed automatic dampers, and all other major equipment nameplates, giving manufacturer's nameplate data, nameplate designation, location of equipment, area served, switch location, normal position of switch, and equipment label designations specified. Submit directory for review and obtain approval prior to substantial completion of project. Number all pages to assure correct placement in manual. In addition to the number required by Division 1 section, “Closeout Documents’, install one copy of the approved O & M Manual in a permanently mounted sheet metal box on wall of the main mechanical equipment room. 23 00 00 -8 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.12 A. 1.13 09603 OPERATING PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION General: Provide instruction of all pertinent mechanical systems to facility operating personnel prior to facility acceptance, upon mutually satisfactory arrangement with Owner. Additional requirements may be found in other Division 23 sections which apply to the specific items in that section. Aa Instruction: Instruction shall begin only after the component, assembly, or system is complete and has been tested and is in acceptable operating condition. Instruction shall encompass normal operation, emergency operation, fire and other hazards, safety provisions, pollution prevention provisions, and maintenance procedures for all work provided. 2. Access points: A guided tour of all mechanical systems and their access points for every item requiring O&M access shall utilize the As-builts. 3. Instructors: Instructors shall be qualified on the system being instructed. Include the Contractor's staff supplemented by authorized representatives of the component, assembly, or system manufacturer. 4. Aids: Instruction process shall utilize the O&M manuals which, if deemed unsatisfactory in any content, shall be supplemented in a manner to achieve useful, pertinent, and complete instruction. 5. Time: Provide all necessary instruction to the complete understanding of the operating personnel. No individual session shall last more than 4 hours per day. Minimum total instruction periods shall be as follows except that where instruction periods for longer terms are specified herein, such longer term shall apply: a. Boilers, Piping, and HVAC systems: 8 Hours. b. Controls: 16 hours. 6: Statement of completion: At the conclusion of each training session, provide the Owner’s Representative with a form containing the following information: Name and contact information of Trainer, including company represented. Name of each trainee. Date of the training. Relevant specification section satisfied by the training. Time spent in classroom training and in hands-on practical training. Signature of trainees confirming delivery and time of training. ~pa2o009 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE FOR EXISTING SERVICES Temporary Services: This Contractor shall provide those temporary services to existing services as required to maintain them in continuous operation and without reducing efficiency. The extent of temporary services shall be carefully conferenced and coordinated with the Owner. In order to provide temporary services or to cutover permanent services, it may be necessary to perform work on an overtime basis. All overtime work shall be scheduled at the time required by building's function as determined by the Owner and the General Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. Continuity of Service in Existing System: Do all new work so that there is no shutdown of more than one-hour duration of any existing system. 1, Interruptions of any existing service or system shall be fully coordinated with Owner and agreed upon in writing. 2: Contractor shall provide advance notice as specified in Division 1 before performing the work which would cause or require the shutdown. Interference with Owner's Employees: Do all work with existing systems with respect for the necessity of Owner's employees to perform their regular work. When directed, perform work at hours other than regular working hours or times that school is in session. 23 00 00 -9 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.14 A. 1.15 09603 TEMPORARY SERVICES Temporary Heat: Temporary heat is specified in Division 1. Cooperate with the General Contractor and prepare the terminal heating equipment for operation when the remodeled areas are ready for finishing. HVAC Systems: Do not use HVAC systems during construction. Cover duct and grille openings with taped-on plastic sheet or equivalent to keep all construction dust possible out of the ductwork. Cleaning: Promptly remove all waste material and rubbish. At completion of the work, clean all dirt and construction debris such as paint, plaster, glue, cement, mastic, tar, paper, tape, and dirt from the mechanical installation including equipment, piping, ductwork, and plumbing fixtures. In finished areas to be occupied, keep equipment covered during course of construction. Where this is not practical, clean and/or refinish item to new condition. PROJECT CLOSEOUT General: Comply with all Division 1 requirements. “Substantial Completion” Inspection: All of the following items shall be completed prior to substantial inspections. In order complete this inspection efficiently and effectively, and to avoid negative impacts due to unacceptable conditions, written confirmation is required prior to making the inspection. Provide written documentation certifying that all items highlighted _in bold underline are complete and the project is ready for Substantial Completion inspection. 1. General Contactor: a. The GC’s superintendent should exercise his authority as chief CQC manager to pre-inspect and certify that the subs are done. The inspector's purpose is to examine the results after CQC and to verify that work is complete. Provide a letter_from_the General Contractor stating that_the project_is ready for for substantial completion. b. All training should be finished and statement of completion forms available for inspection. oa Controls: Point-to-Point checkout sheet, completed. O&M Manual. (done As-Built Drawings with revised final sequences of operations. The automatic control system functions will be observed with the DDC Technician while on site. It is essential that the DDC Technician and other subs pre-test the sequences of operation. Acceptance of the controls and the systems under control can only be made when they are witnessed working properly. Confirm in writing the DDC Technician is ready to demonstrate proper operation. 3. Mechanical: a. All items done & clean. Insulating, painting & touch-up, ID tags, key plans inside valve access doors, valve schedules, etc done and available for inspection. All fans, pumps, & ducts under automatic control with clean filters & strainers. Punch list from prior inspections completed. b C. d. Boiler Startup report. e. As-Builts available and all access doors located on the As-Builts. T a. aooD esting Adjusting, and Balancing: Final TAB report, indicating final setting of all _devices_and_list_of deficiencies. 5. Fire Sprinkler: a. As-Builts. 23 00 00 - 10 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 00 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL WORK DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA b. Fire Pump Test Reports, or be prepared to demonstrate the pump test during this inspection. Certificate of completion per code. janpower and tools: General Contractor's superintendent or CQC manager. Other subs should be available in case an item in their trade needs examination. Ladders or lifts as required for inspectors to reach all equipment & access doors. Inspectors will need tools of the trades involved to open panels and check internals where required. aoowzo Cc. Requirements for “Final Inspection”: All of the following items shall be completed prior to final inspections. No exceptions will be made and approval for final payment will be recommended only when all items are completed. QaARWN> All unacceptable items from the substantial completion inspection have been corrected. Equipment and premises entirely clean. Operating instructions and maintenance manuals, final approved copy. Testing, adjusting and balancing, final report. Record drawings ("as-built"), final approved copy. Guarantee. D. Guarantee: ai All work performed under this Contract shall be guaranteed against faulty and improper materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified herein, such longer term shall apply, and this Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall promptly correct any deficiencies which occur during the guarantee period, all to the satisfaction of the Owner. This Contractor shall require similar guarantees from its subcontractors. All equipment and installation shall be guaranteed by the Contractor to be in compliance with OSHA regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable. END OF SECTION 23 00 00 09603 23 00 00 - 11 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, General Mechanical Work. WORK INCLUDED This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 23 Sections. 1 Storage and Protection of Equipment and Materials. 2 Sequencing and Scheduling. 3 Products. 4. HVAC Installation—Common Requirements. 5. Equipment Installation—Common Requirements. 6 Sealing Through Air Plenums, Shafts and Floors. 7 Installation of Firestopping. 8 Mechanical Demolition. 9. Cutting and Patching. 10. Touchup Painting and Finishing. 11. Provisions for Later Installation. 12. Connecting Equipment Furnished Under Other Divisions. 13. Connecting to the biomass boiler. Coordinate with the Biomass Boiler Supplier/Contractor. DEFINITIONS Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, spaces above ceilings, crawl spaces, and tunnels. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. Service Areas: Mechanical rooms such as boiler room, fire pump room, air handler room and other machine rooms; and unfinished attic spaces provided with access to equipment. These areas are provided only for access to equipment and mechanical systems. 23 05 00 -1 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 00 00, "General Mechanical Work". 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cleaning: It is specifically noted that all piping, ductwork, and equipment shall be free of foreign matter to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. B. Materials: be General: a. Asbestos: All materials shall be asbestos-free. b. Lead: All materials shall be lead-free. 2. Composite materials: All composite materials, such as gaskets, seals, and o-rings, shall be compatible with the fluids and temperatures present in the system which it serves. Inhibited propylene glycol up to 220°F at 125 PSI will be used in the hydronic system. Cc. Pipe and wet equipment leakage: Contractor shall provide all propylene glycol refilling as required during one-year guarantee period. 1.6 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. General: At all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect all material and equipment from damage. 1 Cap, plug, or otherwise protect all temporary openings in materials and equipment to prevent entry by foreign matter. 2. Protect from injury by others. B. Keep mechanical installations clean: 1. Restore mechanical installations including piping, ductwork, and equipment, which is damaged by any means including weather, rust, paint, dirt, and physical damage or to new condition prior to installation. Replace rejected piping, equipment, etc. with new materials. 2 Deliver systems to Owner with clean filters, clean strainers, and all bearings properly lubricated. Cc. Cover stored materials and specialties to protect from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. 1. Retain protective covers and caps on materials and equipment when provided by manufacturers. D. Store equipment a minimum of 2 feet above ground and under protective cover. If storage location is subject to moisture, keep covered with plastic sheeting, arranged to provide adequate ventilation and prevent trapping of moisture. 1. Cover all motors and bearings with watertight and dustproof covers during storage and construction. Ee Rejected items shall remain property of Contractor. na SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. 1. Sequence mechanical equipment installation with other building components. 09603 23 05 00 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS 2. Install required supporting devices. Coordinate their location to fit within and around B. other building components, and to bear on construction of adequate strength. 3. Coordinate connection of electrical services. 4. Coordinate with other trades to maintain access routes to mechanical systems. 5 Integrate chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations. Coordinate with other trades as required to accomplish the necessary building structures. Schedule inspections and tests of mechanical materials and equipment while they are exposed. a If defective installations are discovered or suspected by Architect, uncover work for inspection and correction of defective condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. B. Cc. 2.3 A. 09603 MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufactures offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: i Firestopping: a. HEVI-DUTY Nelson, a unit of General Signal. b. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing. c. Dow. d. HILTI. PIPING SPECIALTIES Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. 1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around the pipe, tube, and insulation. 2. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. 3. Polished Chrome-plated finish. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: nb Sleeves in Walls: 20-gauge galvanized steel sheet metal; round tube closed with lock seam joints. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM AS53, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 3. Floor Plate: One-piece steel fabrication with raised collar. Waterproofing Device: Provide Link-Seal, or approved, around each pipe which penetrates any floors, walls, or similar construction where a waterproofing membrane is provided in the general construction work. GROUT Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B: 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged. 23 05 00 - 3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS 2.4 A. 2.5 A. FIRESTOPPING Firestopping: Perform all work required, and furnish all materials necessary to complete proper installation of firestops in fire rated walls, floors and partitions, around penetrations of pipe, tubing, and ducts, as indicated by the Contract Documents. 1. Firestop shall conform to ASTM E-814, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire Stops; UL 1479, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 2. Firestop classification shall be listed in UL Fire Resistance Directory for the application, and shall be Factory Mutual approved. 3. Firestop material shall be a ready to use, permanently intumescent putty, FSP, "Flameseal", as manufactured by Hevi-Duty/Nelson, a Unit of General Signal, or 3M Fire Barrier 25WB Caulk. SLEEVE SEALANTS AND CAULKS: Silicone acoustical sealant or non-hardening butyl caulking, suitable to withstand moderate joint movement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. Cc. 09603 HVAC INSTALLATION—COMMON REQUIREMENTS Ductwork and Piping diagrams are schematic only and must not be used for obtaining lineal runs or number and type of fittings and fixtures. 1. Ducts and Piping and their related materials shall be installed in accordance with the written recommendations of the manufacturer or governing trade association. 2 Run all ductwork and piping parallel with building construction and 90° angles to same. 3 Install exposed work neatly and workmanlike. Clean to like-new condition. Apply finish, if specified 4. Expansion and Contraction: Good trade practices shall be followed, using proper swing joints or expansion joints to accommodate normal pipe movement. 5. Offsets in Ductwork and Piping: The drawings do not attempt to show exact details of all HVAC ductwork and piping. Provide all transitions and offsets required in order to accommodate obstructions, the work of other trades, or work under this contract. No extra payments will be given for transitions and offsets HVAC systems. Clearance around work: Provide adequate and acceptable clearances for future access, servicing, and maintenance. Ad Install dampers and valves in serviceable locations, within 3 feet of ceilings for above- ceiling components. 2. Locate ductwork and piping to maintain access routes to equipment. 3 Install ductwork and piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to facilitate ceiling panel removal. 4. Arrange ductwork and piping to avoid interference with work of other trades such as light outlets, fixtures, and other obstructions. 5. Provisions for Ductwork and Piping Covering: Allow sufficient space for the proper installation of the duct and pipe covering. If ductwork and piping is installed too close to other ductwork and piping or equipment, the ductwork and piping shall be moved to avoid such interferences. 6. Locate groups of ducts and pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit damper and valve servicing. Conceal all ductwork and piping except in service areas, or where drawings specifically indicate 23 05 00 - 4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS otherwise. vi Protect piping in walls with shields to prevent damage from future nailing and screwing. D. Alignment Prior to Supporting and Anchoring: Place all ductwork and piping in proper alignment and position prior to connection to restraints, anchors, flexible connectors, expansion loops, and equipment. Furnish jacking devices, temporary steel structural members and assembled structures as necessary. Remove temporary equipment and structures supplied by the Contractor at completion; such items to remain his property. fi Ducts and Pipes shall be supported by the building construction. DO NOT support by equipment or equipment connections. E: Piping Supports: All piping shall be properly suspended from hangers of approved design and make specified in Section 23 05 29, “Hangers and Supports For HVAC Piping and Equipment”. Supports shall be designed to permit free expansion and contraction while minimizing vibration. Pipes shall be anchored where shown or directed by means of steel clamps or other approved means, securely fastened to the pipe and rigidly attached to the building construction. a Install inserts and shields with the support system; NOT part of the insulation system. 2. Install piping free of sags and bends. F. Piping penetrations of building components: 7 Sleeves: Provide sleeves for all wall, partition, and floor penetrations, except for holes core drilled in masonry or concrete. a. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. b. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. Cc. Install sleeves sized to provide 1/4" annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: 1) Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches that penetrate concrete and masonry construction. 2) Steel Sheet Metal Sleeves: For pipes that penetrate gypsum wallboard partitions, and for all pipes larger than 6”. 3) Floor Plate: Provide at all floor penetrations. For floors having membrane waterproofing, secure membrane between clamping flanges. Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. e. Seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using sleeve sealant, caulk, or firestopping. 1) For sealing of annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation at fire rated penetrations, install firestopping, specified elsewhere in this Section. f. Counterflashing: All piping passing through waterproof roof construction shall be provided with counterflashing to overlap flashing. 2. Escutcheons: Install escutcheon plate for all uninsulated piping exposed to public view which passes through floors, walls, furrings, partitions, ceilings, and etc. 2. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION—COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment Connections: ae Provide piping unions, either ground joint or flanged, where necessary for access to equipment. a. Provide unions so equipment can be disconnected without dismantling the piping system. b. Unions shall not be directly screwed to coil header piping, except when coil header is factory-made with flanged connections. 09603 23 05 00-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS 3.3 3.4 09603 c. Make up all piping connections to coils and equipment with offsets arranged that the equipment can be serviced or removed without dismantling the piping beyond the union. d. Welded piping systems: Wherever a welded piping system connects to equipment, valves, or other units which may require maintenance, servicing, or removal, the connecting joint shall be flanged. Install equipment in serviceable locations: i. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. a. Install equipment with clear access routes, and within 3 feet of ceilings for above- ceiling components. b. Maintain access route to equipment, and coordinate with other trades to prevent blocking these routes by other work. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not indicated. on Install equipment according to approved submittal data and the manufacturer's or governing trade association’s written instructions. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. fll. Shim equipment on housekeeping pads level. Pack grout under base rails prior to tightening anchor bolts. Tighten bolts after grout has cured. Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. SEALING THROUGH AIR PLENUMS, SHAFTS AND FLOORS General: Provide all sealing around pipes, ducts, fire damper sleeves and frames, motorized damper frames, and other mechanical work penetrating walls and floors which are boundaries for recirculating and exhaust air. Sealing of Sleeves: Where pipe sleeves, duct sleeves, or fire damper sleeves are used, the annular space around pipes or ducts shall be 1/2". Pack the annular space with an approved packing, leaving 1%" depth for sealing compound. Apply sealing compound filling this remaining annular space out to a point flush to the wall line. it. For sleeves larger than 10” long or diameter, install 1” flat sheet metal trim over the sealant, unless such trim is prohibited by a UL listed assembly. INSTALLATION OF FIRESTOPPING General: Follow all written instructions from the firestopping manufacturer in order to attain a fire-rated assembly. Examination: Verify that all penetrating elements and supporting devices have been installed and all temporary lines have been removed. 23 05 00 -6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS Cc. Preparation: Surfaces which will be in contact with penetration seal materials shall be clean and free of dust, dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust or other substances. D. Installation: ay Install penetration seal materials in accordance with design requirements, UBC and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Follow manufacturer's recommendations to obtain a smooth, professional finish. E. Repairs and Modifications: i Identify damaged or re-entered firestopping requiring repair or modification. 2. Remove loose or damaged materials. 3. Remove enough material to accommodate repair or modification, being careful not to cause damage to the balance of the firestopping. 4. Install materials in accordance with Paragraph C. above. Use only materials approved by manufacturer as suitable for repair or original firestopping. F. Field Quality Control: 1. Examine penetration firestopping for proper installation, adhesion and curing as may be appropriate for the respective firestopping materials. 2) Keep areas of work accessible and notify code authorities or designated inspectors of work released for inspection. 3. Document completion and inspection as required. G. Clean-Up: Remove equipment, materials, and debris, leaving area in a clean, undamaged condition. 3.5 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION A. General: Perform demolition to minimize damage to adjacent work or structures to remain intact. Comply with OSHA and this project's safety regulations in performance of demolition. uF Employ safety precautions throughout the demolition process. a. Wear the appropriate OSHA-approved PPE for the processes employed. b. Evaluate the demolition for hazardous materials. If a material is in question, notify the Owner's Representative. c. Erect and maintain dust control barriers around the immediate demolition area. 1) Maintain evacuation fans where appropriate. d. Provide fire extinguishers easily accessible to demolition workers. e. If spark and heat producing processes such as grinding, welding, and torch cutting are employed, maintain fire watch for 4 hours after the last sign of smoke is abated. 2. Remove systems completely, leaving no materials in the demolition zone abandoned in place. a. Cap any adjacent piping left in place. 3. Collect and remove demolished materials and debris regularly, but no less than once per day. a. Leave demolition areas safe and clean whenever not continuously occupied by work crews. b. Sweep with dust compound or water at the end of the demolition, or more frequently as needed to maintain a safe demolition site. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching—Existing or New Buildings: 1. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces 09603 23 05 00 -7 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA AND METHODS necessary for mechanical installations. 2. All round holes through concrete slabs or walls, if not cast-in-place, shall be core drilled with diamond drill; all rectangular openings shall be cut with a diamond saw. In no case shall structural members be cut. 3. Repair cored and cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3.7 TOUCH-UP PAINTING A. For minor repairs to surfaces scratched during shipping and installation. 1. Repair all dings and scratches to original color and luster. 2. Repair corrosion protection on metallic surfaces with to match manufacturer’s original. 3.8 PROVISIONS FOR LATER INSTALLATION A. Where any mechanical work cannot be installed as structure is being erected, provide and arrange for building-in of boxes, sleeves, insets, fixtures, or devices necessary to permit installation later. Lay out any chases, holes, or other openings which must be provided in masonry, concrete, or other work. B. Verify nature and arrangement of materials and construction to which this work attaches or passes through. 3.9 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS A. Provide rough-in and final piping connections to equipment as listed in architectural specifications and equipment schedules. 1. Obtain all rough-in data from approved shop drawings on all equipment. 2. Equipment and fixtures furnished under other divisions will be received, uncrated, and set in place under other divisions unless specifically noted otherwise in Division 23 or on the drawings. 3. Make required piping connections to equipment furnished under other divisions including, but not be limited to, installation of all fittings, strainers, valves, instruments, safety devices, and other piping appurtenances provided with or as an integral part of equipment. 4. Connect hydronic piping to the biomass boiler. Coordinate with the Biomass Boiler Supplier/Contractor. END OF SECTION 23 05 00 09603 23 05 00 -8 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. B. Cc. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 23 05 14, Variable Frequency Drives. WORK INCLUDED Work under this section includes the basic requirements for motors. This Section also includes motors that are factory-installed as part of equipment and appliances and field installed. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electric Code." NRTL Listing: Provide NRTL listed motors. ai Term "Listed": As defined in "National Electrical Code," Article 100. 2! Listing Agency Qualifications: "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as define in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. Comply with UL 1004, "Motors Electric." PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. 2.2 A. 09603 Manufacturers: fl Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Motors: 1) Baldor "Super E". 2) Century "E-plus III". 3) General Electric "Energy Saver". 4) Reliance "E 2000". 5) Siemens "PE.21". 6) Toshiba "EQP III" or 7) U.S. Motors "Premium Efficient". MOTORS-—GENERAL General: Requirements below apply to motors covered by this Section unless specifically indicated otherwise. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three-phase. Motors Smaller Than 1/2 HP: Single-phase. Frequency Rating: 60 HZ. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected for the following motor voltage ratings (utilization voltages). a. 120 V Circuit: 115 V - motor rating. b. 208 V Circuit: | 200 V - motor rating. ONS 23 05 13 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT B. Duty and Capacity: 2.3 2.4 09603 1. Sufficient to start and operate connected loads at designated speeds in indicated environment, and with indicated operating sequence, without exceeding nameplate ratings. Provide motors rated for continuous duty at 100 percent of rated capacity. 2. The temperature rise of the motor insulation shall not be exceeded under continuous operation of the motor at full horsepower output, within voltage variations permitted in NEMA Standard MG-1 nor shall it be exceeded under the conditions if motor is started up to 4 times per hour. 3. Variable Frequency Drive compatibility: Motors to be controlled by Variable Speed Drives shall be provided with all features required for compatibility with the application. Temperature Rise: Based on 40 deg. C. ambient unless otherwise indicated. Motor Enclosures: 1. NEMA Standard Open Drip-Proof, for general purpose indoor service. 2 Outdoor motors shall be catalogued and nameplated for weatherproof service with non- hygroscopic insulation or epoxy encapsulated windings. 3. Motor housing shall be ferrous metal. Aluminum not acceptable for end bells or housing. THREE-PHASE MOTORS General: Squirrel-cage induction-type conforming to the following requirements except as otherwise indicated. NEMA Design Letter Designation: "B." Energy Efficient Motors: Nominal efficiency equal to or greater than that stated in NEMA MG 1, Table 12-6B for that type and rating of motor. Internal Thermal Overload Protection for Motors: For motors so indicated, protection automatically opens control circuit arranged for external connection. Protection operates when winding temperature exceeds safe value calibrated to the temperature rating of the motor insulation. Bearings: Bearings shall be double-shielded, pre-lubricated ball type, suitable for radial and thrust loading of the application. Bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life rating of 100,000 hours per AFBMA Standard 9. Motor Mounting: Generally, foot mounted; face ("C") mounting. Motor slide rails shall be cast iron or steel and shall include twin take-up screws. Slide rails shall be equivalent to General Electric No. 3300-A74. Motor Speed: 1. Motors shall be single, constant speed, 1750 RPM, 1.15 minimum service factor, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Motors for Variable Frequency Drives: Motors shall be suitable for variable frequency drive operation. Service factor for all motors fed by variable frequency drives shall be 1.15 minimum. Motor manufacturer shall certify that motors to be provided have been satisfactorily driven continuously over the load range from 25% to 100% by variable frequency drives. SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS General: Conform to the following requirements except as otherwise indicated. 23 05 13 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT B. Energy Efficient Motors: One of the following types as selected to suit the starting torque and Cc. D. El 2.5 A. B. Cc. Dz. 2.6 A. other requirements of the specific motor application. 1. Permanent Split Capacitor. 2. Split-Phase Start, Capacitor-Run. 3. Capacitor-Start, Capacitor-Run. Shaded-Pole Motors: Use only for motors smaller than 1/20 HP. Internal Thermal Overload Protection for Motors: For motors so indicated, protection automatically opens the power supply circuit to the motor, or a control circuit arranged for external connection. Protection operates when winding temperature exceeds safe value calibrated to the temperature rating of the motor insulation. Provide device that automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal range except as otherwise indicated. Bearings: Belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft shall be ball bearing type. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings may be used for other single- phase motors. MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT Single Speed Motor Starters: Motor starters for all single-speed motors are specified to be provided in Division 16 section of work, except where the motor starter is furnished by the equipment manufacturer as an integral part of the mechanical equipment. Motor Protection: Where motor starters are furnished by manufacturer as an integral part of the mechanical equipment, all motors larger than 1 hp shall be provided with overload protection to protect motor against normal overload conditions and against excessive current resulting from a single-phasing condition. Nameplates: Provide 1" high green engraved phenolic type nameplates for each unit with 1/4" minimum lettering, indicating load served. Electric Wiring for Motors: Wiring is specified under other sections of these specifications. Furnish the exact locations of all electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to the electrician. Provide control components for multiple-speed motors under the mechanical work. Motor starters and equipment disconnect switches are to be coordinated so all units are of the same manufacturer. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Electrical Requirements: Electrical components of mechanical equipment and systems such as motors, starters and controls shall be provided under this division as necessary for complete and operable systems. All interconnecting power wiring and conduit for field erected equipment and all control wiring rated for 100 volts and conduit shall conform to Divisions 26, 27, and 28 as applies. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 09603 INSTALLATION General: The following requirements apply to field-installed motors. Install motors in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and the following: Al Direct Connected Motors: Mount securely in accurate alignment. 23 05 13 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 2) Belt Drive Motors: Use adjustable motor mounting bases. Align pulleys and install belts. Use belts identified by the manufacturer and tension belts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 23 05 13 09603 23 0513-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METERS, GAUGES AND SPECIALTIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, General Mechanical Work. WORK INCLUDED Work under this section includes furnishing and installing specialties common to the various mechanical piping systems specified in Division 23, including, but not limited to the following: Balance and flow control valves. Air control devices. Strainers and suction diffusers. Thermometers, gauges, and test fittings. Pressure control and relief valves. Expansion tanks. OARWON>= SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 00 00, "General Mechanical Work". Submit receipt for delivery of meter kit with the closeout documents, signed by an authorized owner representative. QUALITY ASSURANCE Piping specialties shall have the manufacturer's trademark, name and/or model number affixed to permanently identify the manufacturer of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 09603 MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: i Balance and Flow Control Valves: a. Manual Balance Valves: 1) Bell & Gossett “Circuit Setter. 2) Tour-Andersson Model “STAD/STAS”. 3) Armstrong “DVB”. b. Automatic Flow Control Valves: 1) Griswold “Threaded Mini”. c. Combination Check / Balance Valves: 1) Bell & Gossett. 2. Air Control Devices: a. Manual (Coin) Air Vents: 1) Arbest No. 15FA. 2) Bell & Gossett. 3) Dole No. 14 or 23 0519-1 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METERS, GAUGES AND SPECIALTIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING 4) Taco. b. Automatic Air Vents: 1) Hoffman. 2) Spirovent. 3) Taco. c. Air Separators: 1) Amtrol. 2) Bell & Gossett. 3) Spirovent. 4) Taco. 3. Strainers and Suction Diffusers: a. Wye Strainers, threaded, 1/4" through 3". 1) Armstrong No. A5SC-250. 2) Spirax/Sarco AT. 3) Taco. b. Wye Strainers, flanged, 2" and larger: 1) Armstrong No. A5FL-125 or No. A1FL-125 (4" and larger). 2) Hammond. 3) Spirax/Sarco AF-125. 4) Taco. cc, Wye Strainers in Copper Tubing: 1) Armstrong. 2) Hammond. 3) Spirax/Sarco BT. d. Pump Suction Diffusers: 1) Armstrong. 2) Bell & Gossett. 3) PACO. 4) Taco. 4. Thermometers, Gauges, and Test Fittings: a. Thermometers: 1) Ashcroft Series EL. 2) Marsh "Master Therm Adjustable”. 3) Weiss Model 5VBM "Vari-Angle”. 4) Weksler Type AF "Adjust-Angle’”. b. Pressure Gauges: 1) Ashcroft Type 1009. 2) Marsh "Liquid-filled Mastergauge”. 3) Weiss Model LF4S-2. 4) Weksler Type AY. c. Pressure and Temperature Test Plugs: 1) Peterson Equipment. 2) Sisco. 5. Pressure Control and Relief Valves: 09603 a. Pressure Regulating Valves. 1) Clark-Reliance. 2) Spence. 3) Watts Regulator. 4) Wilkins. Expansion Tanks: a. Amtrol. b. Bell & Gossett. Cc. Taco. 23 0519-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METERS, GAUGES AND SPECIALTIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING 2.2 BALANCE AND FLOW CONTROL VALVES A. Manual Balancing Valves: ib Balance valve shall provide four functions: (a) precise flow measurement, (b) precision flow balancing, (c) positive shut-off, and (d) drain connection with protective cap. a. Valves shall have calibrated handle, pressure/temperature taps, and adjustable “memory stop”. b. Valves shall be capable of installation in any position without affecting flow measurement. B. Combination Check/Balancing Valves: 1. Balance valve shall provide at least three functions: (a) precise flow measurement, (b) precision flow balancing, (and (c) check reverse flow. a. Valves shall have calibrated handle, pressure/temperature taps, and adjustable “memory stop”. b. Valves shall be capable of installation in any position without affecting flow measurement. C. Automatic Flow Control Valves: 1. Flow control valve shall provide four functions: (a) precise flow measurement, (b) Precision flow balancing, (c) positive shut-off, and (d) drain connection with protective cap. a. Valves shall be pressure-compensating, constant-flow control valves, 1) Ratings: 300 PSI at 250°F; 2) Materials: bronze housing and 300 Series stainless steel cartridge, with valve kits installed on side tappings for pressure/temperature measurements. 3) Accessories: Provide manufacturer's dual-hose meter kit with liquid-filled gauge for valve testing and setting. Turn over to Owner at completion of work. D. Accessories: Dualhose meter kit with liquid-filled gauge for valve testing and setting, compatible with the balancing or flow control valves. 2.3 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual Air Vents: 1. Compression-type, screwdriver-operated air cocks shall be furnished and installed where shown and where required for venting. Cocks shall be 1/4" in size and shall be all bronze construction. B. Automatic Air Vents: 1. High Volume Automatic Air Vents: Single lever float type, a. Ratings: 250 PSI, 1/2" or 3/4" pipe connection as indicated. b. Materials: Cast iron body, float and internal mechanisms shall be stainless steel. c. All automatic air vents associated with a glycol system shall be installed with ball valve and piped back to the glycol make up tank. Cc. Air Separators: i Turbulence-suppressive device for elimination of air in system, a. Ratings: ASME-constructed and labeled, 125-psi wp, 375°F maximum operating temperature; b. Features: High-efficiency flow pattern, flanged connections, with micro-bubble accumulator, bottom drain, and top air vent connection. 09603 23 05 19 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METERS, GAUGES AND SPECIALTIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING 2.4 STRAINERS AND SUCTION DIFFUSERS A. Wye Strainers: 1. Construction: All strainers shall have cast-iron or bronze bodies of ample strength for the pressure to which they shall be subjected and suitable flanges or trappings to connect with the piping they serve, and monel or stainless steel screen.. They shall be of such a design to allow blowing out of accumulated dirt and to facilitate removal and replacement of a strainer screen, without disconnections of the main piping. 2. System Strainers: a. 1/4" through 3", 250 Ib., 20 mesh (0.034" openings), b. Flanged, 2" and larger, 125 lb. Y-pattern, 20 mesh for 2" to 3", 3/64" perforations for 4" and larger. 3. Strainers in Copper Tubing: 250 Ib., heavy-duty cast bronze body, Y-type, 20-mesh stainless steel screen, sweat or threaded connections, threaded blowdown end. B. Pump Suction Diffusers: Angle-type body with inlet vanes and combination diffuser-strainer- orifice cylinder with 3/16" diameter openings. A permanent magnet shall be located within the flow stream and shall be removable for cleaning. Orifice cylinder shall be equipped with a disposable, fine-mesh strainer which shall be removed after system startup. Orifice cylinder shall be designed to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head and shall have a free area equal to five times cross-section area of pump suction openings. Vane length shall be no less than 2-1/2 times the pump connection diameter. Unit shall be provided with adjustable support foot to carry weight of suction piping. 2.5 THERMOMETERS, GAUGES, AND TEST FITTINGS A. Thermometers: Industrial 3-inch dial type, with separate brass thermowells, bimetal actuated, having a variable angle stem. Thermometer shall have a hermetic seal and an external calibration adjustment in the rear of the case. Provide thermometer wells with extension necks of suitable length for insulated piping. 1; Thermometers shall conform to the following: *Range Deg. F. per Service Degrees F. Division. Hydronic Heating Fluid 0 - 250 2 *Thermometer range shall be adequate to indicate all operating conditions, but not so wide that the highest operating condition is less than % of full scale. B. Pressure Gauges, Liquid Filled: 1. Glycerin or silicone oil filled. White or aluminum face-plate, with black letters inscribed with units of measurement, ANSI B40.1-1985 Grade 2A, 4-1/2" size, with shutoff cock. Gauge case shall be polished steel or chrome-plated brass with chrome-plated bayonet ring, rear blowout disc, without flanges. a. All pump suction gauges shall be compound type. 23 Shutoff Cocks for Gauges: 1/4" NPT; Globe valve, bronze plug disc, renewable seat, 500°F at 200 PSI; or ball valve, solid chrome-plated brass ball construction and lever handle, Hancock No. 4620,. Milwaukee Model BA-100. 3. Pressure Snubbers for Gauges: Filter type snubbing element, brass housing. For water, Ashcroft No. 1112B-E or Weksler Type BW42. Service *Range Deg. F. per Hydronic Heating Fluid Feet Water Gauge Division. HVAC Pump -30” Hg — 150’ 2 09603 23 05 19-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METERS, GAUGES AND SPECIALTIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING HVAC Coil 0-100’ 1 HVAC Heat Exchanger 0-100’ 1 C. D. 2.6 A. B. Cc. “Pressure gauge range shall be adequate to indicate all operating conditions, but not so wide that the highest operating condition is less than % of full scale. Pressure and Temperature Test Plugs (P/T Plug; Pete’s Plug): Fitting shall be 1/2" size, solid brass with two valve cores, suitable for inhibited propylene glycol, 275°F at 500 psi. Each fitting shall include cap with gasket. Pressure and Temperature Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of 0-100 psi, (0-230 feet of water pressure) gauge with P/T Plug gauge adapter attached, a 25°F -125°F pocket testing thermometer, a 0-220°F pocket testing thermometer and gauge adapter. WATER PRESSURE CONTROL AND RELIEF VALVES Pressure Reducing Valves, diaphragm type: fe 1/2" and 3/4" size; bronze body and bell housing, threaded, union connection, 300 psi rated inlet, adjustable setting, factory set at 25 psi, with Y-strainer in inlet 2. 1" to 2" threaded, 2-1/2" and larger flanged; cast-iron body, composition disc, bronze trim 250-Ib. Pressure Relief Valves: 1. Type: Valves shall be screwed pattern, iron body, flanged inlet, screwed outlet. Valve shall be provided with drain pipe threaded connection with piping run to funnel floor drain. Valves shall be inscribed with set pressure and capacity; ASME-labeled and National Board (NB) certified. 2. General: Provide a relief valve in the main on the low-pressure side of each pressure- reducing valve installation and where shown on the dwgs. Expansion Tanks: fl! Pressurized, full acceptance, diaphragm-type expansion tank with replaceable, sealed-in air cushion, charging valve, and gauge tapping. Tank shall be welded steel, constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with Section VIII of ASME Code for a working pressure of 125 psi. 2 Expansion Tank Air Vent: Provide as recommended by tank manufacturer. Location as indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 09603 INSTALLATION OF BALANCING VALVES General: Install according to manufacturer's installation requirements. Arrange as necessary to test, adjust, and balance the entire hydronic system. Provide service clearance for O&M and accessing test ports with test instruments. 1. Provide Balance Valves for: Air Handler Coils. Preheat Coils. Make-Up-Air Unit Coils. Hot Water Generator Tank Coils. Terminal Units. Elsewhere as indicated. >~paog® Accessories: Where balancing valves, combination check/balancing valves, or flow control 23 0519-5 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METERS, GAUGES AND SPECIALTIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 09603 valves are required, provide one dual-hose meter kit for the project. Turn kit over to owner’s representative and obtain receipt. INSTALLATION OF AIR VENTS General: Install as required to eliminate all air from the hydronic system. Provide at high point air traps in piping. ue Manual Air Vents: Provide at terminal units, coils, and elsewhere as indicated. Where piping is oriented to flow downward to any pump suction, install manual air vent on the suction side of pump configured to vent the entire downward-flowing pipe. 2. Automatic Air Vents: Provide at air separator, boiler air vent connection, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide flexible tubing on automatic vent discharge, turned down to accessible location, or to receptacle if indicated. Provide ball valve between vented piping and vent connection. INSTALLATION OF AIR SEPARATORS Provide in location indicated. Blowdown valve on bottom shall have male hose thread connection and brass cap. Air vent on top shall have permanent tubing installed from vent discharge to receptacle. INSTALLATION OF STRAINERS. Install strainers at the inlet side of each control valve, pressure reducing valve, solenoid valve, trap, feeder, pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Strainers shall be Y-pattern set in a horizontal (or vertical downward) run of pipe. In all cases, strainers shall be arranged with clearance for O&M, disconnection, blowdown, and opening-up for cleaning, and so as not to form pipe "trap" and. Strainers 2" and smaller shall be threaded end; 2-1/2" and larger shall be flanged; or in any case to match the original manufacturer's connection on equipment requiring strainer. Provide approved valved dirt blowout connections for each strainer. Each blowdown valve shall be located at hand height with male hose end connection and brass cap. All strainers installed upstream of automatic control valves shall be installed line size, which shall mean the size of the inlet pipe shown on the drawings, not the reduced size serving the control valve. INSTALLATION OF PUMP SUCTION DIFFUSERS Provide for any pump where straight inlet pipe five times the pipe diameter can not be installed on the pump suction, and as indicated. Provide an adjustable support foot to eliminate pipe strain at suction diffuser connection to pump. Startup: a. Remove, clean, and replace permanent magnets in the flow stream of diffuser to protect the pump seal. 2. Retain start-up strainer at each pump suction diffuser for system cleaning and flushing. Following piping system cleaning and prior to balancing, remove start-up strainer. 23 05 19-6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METERS, GAUGES AND SPECIALTIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING 3.6 INSTALLATION OF THERMOMETERS A. Location of Thermometers: Provide where indicated and at the following locations: 1. In return water pipe at all 3-way mixing valves. 2. Suction pipe at all pumps. 3. Both inlets and both outlets at each heat exchanger (4 thermometers total). 4. Supply and return to all hot water coils, coil banks and reheat coils. 5. Elsewhere as indicated. B. On thermally insulated equipment or piping, provide thermometer wells with extension necks, clearance not less than the thickness of the insulation. C. Pack all well sockets with thermally conductive putty. D. Install not more than 7' above floor or operating platform. Temperature sensing locations higher than 7' above the floor or platform shall be installed with remote bulb temperature indicators, with indicator located with 7’ of the floor or platform. 1. Orient the thermometer face so it can be read from the floor or operating platform. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES A. Location of Pressure Gauges: Provide where indicated and at the following locations: 1. At hydronic pumps: a. Pipe a single gauge to the suction and discharge sides of each pump. b. Where suction diffuser is used, extend the gauge piping to include the inlet side of the suction diffuser. This will provide three connections for the single gauge. 2. At expansion tank. 3. Elsewhere as shown. B. Extend 1/4" pipe or tubing from gauge to its respective pipe connection. Tubing shall be rigidly supported. 1. Provide each piping connection with shutoff valve or cock. 2. Connect all gauges through snubbers. Cc. On thermally insulated equipment or piping, standoff mounting brackets, bases, adapters, or extended tubes shall be provided; clearance not less than the thickness of the insulation. D. Install not more than 7' above floor or operating platform. Pressure sensing locations higher than 7' above the floor or platform shall be installed with extended piping to gauge, with gauge installed between 5 and 7 feet above floor E. Properly calibrate and zero all gauges at job site for pressure head and temperature in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS A. Location of Test Plugs: Provide where indicated and at the following locations: 1. Each side of all terminal unit hydronic coils (entering and leaving pipes). 2. Each side of all hydronic coils and coil banks (entering and leaving pipes). 3. Each side of all pumps (in flange tapping or immediately adjacent to flanges). 4. Each side of all boilers. 5. Entering and leaving water piping to all heat exchangers. 6. Adjacent to each point where a temperature sensing device is required by control specifications. 09603 23 0519-7 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METERS, GAUGES AND SPECIALTIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING 3.9 3.10 a Elsewhere as shown. Test plugs in insulated piping shall have stem length as determined by insulation thickness. Clearance not less than the thickness of the insulation. INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES Comply with requirements of the latest revision of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, and the State Boiler Code. A 2. 3. as Valves shall be installed in an upright position. No other valves shall be located on entering side of a pressure relief valve, or between the relief valve and the atmosphere. Valve outlets shall be located or piped so that the discharge is carried clear of any normal access area. Valve discharge piping shall be sleeved through wall, floor, or roof penetrations. Pipe outside shall be galvanized and shall be flashed and counter-flashed where it passes through a roof. Where two or more valves discharge into a common pipe, the cross sectional area of the pipe must be at least equal to the total outlet areas of the connected valves. Where valve discharge piping rises to form a trap, use a drip pan elbow at the base of the trap. INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION TANKS Provide isolation valve in connecting piping: 1. a 3. Provide pressure relief valve on piping between the isolation valve and the tank. Provide male hose end drain valve with brass cap on tank drainage fitting. Provide service clearance for O&M, pressure reading and adjustment, and tank diaphragm replacement. END OF SECTION 23 05 19 09603 23 05 19-8 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 4 A. B. 2 A. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. B. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, General Mechanical Work. WORK INCLUDED Work under this Section shall include furnishing and installing general duty valves common to the several mechanical piping systems specified in Division 23. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 00 00, "General Mechanical Work". Submit product information for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application. QUALITY ASSURANCE Standardization: Where possible, provide one manufacturer for bronze valves, and one manufacturer for iron valves throughout. 1. Provide written justification for non-standardized suppliers. Identification: Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of body. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 09603 MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 41. Ball Valves: a. Milwaukee. b. Apollo. ie. NIBCO. ya Butterfly Valves: a. Apollo. b. Crane. c. Metraflex. d. Milwaukee. 3. Check Valves, Non-Slam and Silent Type: a. Crane. b. Metraflex. 23 05 23 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.2 2.3 09603 c. Watts. 4. Check Valves, Swing Type: a. Milwaukee. b. NIBCO. c. Grinnell. 5. Gate and Globe Valves: a. Milwaukee. b. NIBCO. c. Grinnell. 6. Plug Valves: a. NIBCO. b. Stockham. VALVES—GENERAL DUTY IN LOW PRESSURE WATER SYSTEMS Construction of Valves: Rating shall be not less than 125-psi wsp. Valves larger than 2" shall be flanged pattern. Ball Valves 2" and Smaller: 2 piece body style, full port, chromium plated solid brass ball, RPTFE seats, adjustable hex gland follower, bronze body, lever handle, blowout proof stem, 150 wsp, 600 wog. Butterfly Valves 2 1/2" and Larger: Lug pattern, cast iron body construction, stainless steel shaft, mounting pad for 10 position lever, gear operator or actuator. Pressure Rating: 200psi WOG with ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or stainless steel discs and EPDM, Buna, or Viton seats to suit fluid and duty. Check Valves, Nonslam and Silent Type: Wafer style, cast iron or semi-steel body, disc and seat, center guided, stainless steel spring and screws, 200 non-shock wog. Check Valves, Swing Type, 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, horizontal swing check, bronze trim, with brass-faced disc, brass body seat ring, flanged pattern, 125 wsp, 200 wog. Check Valves in Copper Tubing 2" and Smaller: Bronze body and disc, soldered joint end connections, horizontal swing check, screwed cap, 125 wsp, 200 wog. Gate Valves 2" and Smaller: Bronze body, solid wedge disc, rising stem, union bonnet, malleable iron handwheel, 125 wsp, 200 wog. Gate Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast iron body, bronze trim, OS&Y, bolted bonnet, flanged ends, 150 wsp, 300 wog. Gate Valves in Copper Tubing 2" and Smaller: Bronze body, soldered joint end connections, screwed bonnet, rising stem, solid wedge disc, 125 wsp, 200 wog. Globe Valves 2" and Smaller: Bronze body, composition disc, integral seat, union bonnet, malleable iron handwheel, 150 wsp, 300 wog. VALVES—MISCELLANEOUS Combination Check/Balance Valves: 1. The valve shall consist of a non-slam check valve and calibrated balance valve in one 23 05 23 -2 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.4 A. body. The body shall be cast iron for valves 3” and larger with 125 psig ANSI flange connections. Maximum working pressure of 175 psig. Stainless steel stem and spring to prevent chattering. Include a calibrated name plate for marking the balanced position. The disc and seat shall be replaceable. The valve shall include brass readout taps for taking differential pressure readings across the orifice. COMPOSITE MATERIALS All composite materials, such as gaskets, seals, and o-rings, shall be compatible with the fluids and temperatures present in the system which the valve serves. Inhibited propylene glycol will be used in the heating system up to 250° F at 125 PSI. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. D. 3.2 09603 VALVE INSPECTION Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage. Do not attempt to repair defective valves. Replace with new valves. INSTALLATION Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide stem extensions for ball valves, being installed on insulated piping. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment, arranged to allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. Locate valves for easy access, and provide separate support where necessary. Install valves in horizontal piping, with stem at or above the center of the pipe. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. Valves in mechanical equipment rooms, fan rooms, or boiler rooms that are more than 8' above the floor, shall be provided chain-operated sheaves and chains. For chain-wheel 23 05 23 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.3 3.4 3.5 operators, extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows: 1) Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level. IZ, Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. DEAD-END SERVICE For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper shutoff and retention. VALVE END SELECTION Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: a Copper Tube Size, 2" and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends where needed for removal. 2! Steel Pipe Sizes, 2" and Smaller: Threaded. 3. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2" and Larger: Flanged. ADJUSTING Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists. END OF SECTION 23 05 23 09603 23 05 23 -4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, “General Mechanical Work”, and Section 23 05 00, “Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods”. SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems (SMACNA) WORK INCLUDED Work under this section shall include furnishing all labor, material, tools, and equipment necessary for the complete installation of all sound controls, vibration isolation and seismic controls for equipment, piping and ductwork as specified and shown. Methods and materials specified in this section are minimum requirements and shall not excuse the Contractor from the responsibility of meeting the criteria specified. All necessary work required to meet the criteria shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 05 10, "Mechanical Work—General." Submit an itemized list showing the items of equipment, piping, etc. to be isolated, the isolator and seismic restraint type and model number selected, isolator loading and deflection, and reference to specific drawing showing frame construction where applicable. Catalog cuts and data sheets on specific products to be utilized, showing compliance with the specification. Include number, size and locations for each piece of equipment. 1. Provide all details of suspension and support for systems and equipment. 2. Provide all details of seismic restraints and anchors. a. Restraint manufacturer's submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points. 3. Provide written installation instructions for proper installation and adjustment of each vibration isolation device. 4. Provide certification that manufacturer has the engineering and testing facilities and registered engineering personnel required for inspection and supervision. Engineered Systems: 1. Provide a certified seismic control system. a. Provide supplemental calculations for all applications not covered by SMACNA. 2. Calculations shall be stamped by a registered structural engineer licensed in the state of the project location. 3. Provide seismic restraint calculations for all connections of equipment to the structure. a. Where building walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work is used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. b. Analysis shall indicate dead loads, static seismic loads and Capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail 23 05 48 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1.4 D, anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in "Seismic Force Levels" acting through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. QUALITY ASSURANCE Conflicts and Discrepancies: Corrective work necessitated by conflicts and discrepancies after installation shall be without additional cost to owner. 1. The Contractor shall bring attention to the Owner’s Representative prior to installation any conflicts with other trades which will result in unavoidable contact to the equipment, piping, etc. described herein, due to inadequate space, etc. iat The Contractor shall bring attention to the Owner’s Representative prior to installation any discrepancies between the specifications and field conditions, changes required due to specific equipment selection, etc. Inspection and Instruction: The Contractor shall obtain inspection and approval from the Owner's Representative any installation to be covered or enclosed prior to such closure. The Contractor shall follow written instructions from the vibration isolation manufacturer as to the proper installation and adjustment of vibration isolation devices. Seismic Force Levels: Force levels shall be in compliance with the International Building Code requirements as they apply at the construction site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. Cc. 09603 VIBRATION ISOLATION MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Vibration Isolators: a. Mason Industries Inc. b. Kinetics Noise Control. c. Amber/Booth Co. d. Vibration Eliminator Co. 2. Caulking Compounds: a. General Electric. b. Product Research. c. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing. 3. Cushion Inserts: a. Potter-Roemer. b. Elcen. c. Pipe Shields, Inc. To qualify for approval, manufacturer shall certify in writing that it has the required engineering and testing facilities and registered engineering personnel for inspection and supervision. A single manufacturer as named above shall furnish all isolation products including steel bases and inertial base forms. fs Exceptions: a. Canvas or lead vinyl duct connections and concrete in inertia bases. b. Spring isolators installed as an integral part of equipment mounted within cabinets fabricated by the equipment manufacturer (internally isolated air handling units). . 23 05 48 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.2 2.3 09603 2. Exceptions notwithstanding, all such isolators shall conform to the product requirements of these specifications. ISOLATORS—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Isolator Identification: All vibration isolators shall be clearly marked to show undeflected heights so that after installation and adjustment, deflection under load can be verified, thus determining that the load is within the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being attained. Provide a balanced set of isolators for each piece of equipment. Select isolators in accordance with equipment weight distribution to allow for no less than static deflection specified. All isolators for a single piece of equipment shall have approximately equal spring deflection. A minimum of four isolators per unit is required unless otherwise indicated. Each isolator shall be numbered and color-coded to show location. Code number and color shall be marked on plans, on each equipment isolator, and on each base to ensure proper placement. Operating Limits: All isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer and must be linear over a deflection range of not less than 50% above the design deflection. The spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. The theoretical vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon the load per isolator and isolator stiffness, shall not differ from the design objectives for the equipment as a whole by more than +10%. Neoprene Mountings: All neoprene mountings shall have a shore hardness of 40-65 after minimum aging of 20 days, or corresponding oven-aging. ISOLATOR TYPES Type 1 Isolators: Adjustable, freestanding, open-spring mounting with combination leveling bolt and equipment fastening bolt. Springs shall be welded to mounting baseplate and to the spring compression plate to improve stability of the system. The isolator shall be designed for a minimum horizontal-to-vertical spring rate of 1.0. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel of 50% between the design height and the solid height. The spring isolators shall have boltholes in bases and be anchored to structure with isolated restraining bolts. Isolate bolts from the isolator base with neoprene grommets and neoprene washers. Anchor bolts shall not compress neoprene grommets and washers more than 10% of normal thickness. Type 2 Isolators: Adjustable open spring isolator, similar to Type 1, with a frame to include vertical resilient limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. For equipment whose operating weight may differ from installed weight. Mounts shall be designed with fail-safe feature to protect against wind loads and overturning of mounts in earthquakes. Mounts shall be capable of withstanding lateral accelerations of 1 g. Allow 1/2-inch clearance around vertical restraining bolts, with neoprene grommets and washer to prevent restraining bolts from short-circuiting isolation. Limit stops must be out of contact during normal operation. Type 3 Isolators: Pad-type mounting consisting of two layers of approximately 5/16-inch thick 23 05 48 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 09603 ribbed or waffled neoprene pads bonded to a galvanized steel load distribution plate. Thickness of the load distribution plate shall be sufficient to evenly distribute (10%) the load over the entire pad. Pad must be furnished with sufficient area to achieve the static deflection shown in the schedule. When anchoring is required, provide neoprene grommets and washers to prevent anchor bolt from short circuiting isolation. Type 4 Isolators: Double deflection neoprene mountings having a minimum static deflection of 0.35". All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top and bottom equipped with a steel baseplate with bolt holes to permit attachment to the building structure, and a threaded insert at the top of the mounting for attaching equipment. When anchoring is required, provide neoprene grommets and washers to prevent anchor bolt from short circuiting isolation. Type 5 Isolators: A suspension hanger with a steel box frame, open on two sides, containing an open spring capable of supporting twice the rated load without reaching the yield point. Spring shall be mounted in a molded neoprene rod isolation bushing. Spring diameters and lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through 30-degree arc before contacting hole and short-circuiting spring. Provide hole in top of box for bolting to structure. Submittals shall include scale drawing of hanger showing misalignment capability. Type 6 Isolators: A pre-compressed suspension hanger with a steel box frame and a steel spring resting on a neoprene cup. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to evenly distribute the load to the neoprene and prevents its overload or extrusion. The hanger shall also include a load transfer device so that the system may be initially piped up rigidly. After the final load is imposed, provision shall be provided for transferring the load back to the spring. The spring diameter and hanger box lower hole size shall be large enough to permit the hanger tod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the hole and short-circuiting the spring. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Hangers shall be provided with an eye bolt on the spring end. Submittals shall include a scale drawing of the hanger showing the 30° capability. Submittals shall include scale drawing of hanger showing misalignment capability. Type 7 Isolators: A cone-shaped elastomeric mounting made from neoprene with a steel box frame. Hanger rod shall penetrate neoprene element and steel frame with sufficient clearance to allow it to swing through a 30-degree arc before contacting neoprene bushing at the perimeter of the hole in the frame. A hole shall be provided in the top of the box for bolting to structure. Submittals shall include scale drawing of hanger showing misalignment capability. Type 8 Isolators: An air spring mount consisting of a rolling lobe design, air supply to the base of the mount, and an aluminum or steel pot on top with a tapped hole for attachment to equipment frame. The natural frequency shall be 1.5 Hz at 100 psi. Air spring mount shall be furnished with automatic level control valves. Type 9 Isolators: Adjustable, freestanding spring contained within a cast-iron housing specifically designed to limit equipment motion in all directions without compromising vibration isolation during normal operation. Housing shall be removable to facilitate spring replacement in the field. Snubbing shall take place in all modes with an adjustment to limit upward, downward, and horizontal travel to a maximum of 1/4" before contacting snubbers. During normal operation the neoprene snubbers shall not contact the leveling bolt or any other part of the isolator which is in direct contact with the equipment. Spring housing must contain inspection ports to enable inspection of the spring during normal operation. Similar to Mason Industries Inc. Type SSLFH, Kinetics Type FPS. Type 10 Isolators: Bridge bearing neoprene mountings having a minimum deflection of 0.2" 23 05 48 -4 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.4 09603 and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge- bearing specifications. Schedule of Isolators: Manufacturer's Code — Isolator Type Type Description A B Cc D au Spring mount SW FBS SLF Os 2. Spring mount with limit = CT FLS SLR KW stop 3. Neoprene pad NR NPD WMWwW 100 4. Neoprene mount RV RD ND 368S 5! Spring hanger BSS SH HS SN 6. Spring hanger with PBS SFH PC30 PR transfer 7. Neoprene hanger BR RH HD Cc 8. Air spring AS KAM MAS _ 9. Seismic spring isolator — FPS SSLFH _ 10. Seismic neoprene _ _— BR _ mount 11. Seismic snubber _ — Z-1225 _ 12. Seismic snubber _ _ Z-1011 _ 13. Thrust restraint _ — WBIWBD — Notes: Notwithstanding this table, the manufacturer's isolator must meet all the requirements of this specification. 1. Manufacturer's Code: a. Amber/Booth. b. Kinetics Noise Control. Cc. Mason Industries. d. Vibration Eliminator. BASES Type B-1 Base: A rectangular structural steel base for increasing rigidity of equipment mounting thereon. The base shall be complete with welded height-saving brackets, for side mounting of vibration isolators. The steel members shall be welded, wide flange or channel structural steel. Junior beams and junior channels shall not be used. Cross-members shall be provided where necessary to support the equipment or to prevent twisting of the main members. The section depth of any frame member shall be not less than 1/10th of the length of the longest frame member and not less than 1/10th of the greatest span between support points. All frame members shall have the same depth. Type B-2 Base: A welded structural steel base constructed of angle iron or channels, designed to spread base area of equipment to increase stability and permit suspension with hanger rods. Type B-3 Base: A concrete inertia base, consisting of a perimeter welded structural steel pouring form, 1/2" diameter reinforcing bars welded in place on 6" centers each way, prelocated equipment anchor bolts and pipe sleeves, and isolator brackets to reduce the 23 05 48 - 5 415110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.5 2.6 2.7 09603 mounting height of the equipment. The bottom edge of the steel reinforcing bars shall be 1-1/2" from bottom of the base. Drilled steel members shall have sleeves below the holes to receive anchor bolts. Thickness of the base shall be a minimum depth of 1/12th of the longest span, but not less than 6" deep. The base shall be sized a minimum overlap of 4" around the base of the equipment, and in the case of belt-driven equipment, 4" beyond the end of the drive shaft. Clearance of 2" shall be maintained between the concrete base and the floor slab or housekeeping pad. Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of welding slag, primed with zinc chromate, and finished with two coats of industrial enamel. FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS, GENERAL Connector Less than 200°F: Flexible composite connectors shall be used on all equipment as indicated on drawings or on equipment schedule. Connectors shall be constructed of multiple plies of nylon tire cord fabric embedded and molded in composite fabric. Resilient material shall be EPDM. Isolator shall be suitable for service with 60% propylene glycol solution service in hydronic heating application. ISOLATORS SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUCTED OF NEOPRENE. Steel wire or rings shall not be used. 1. Connectors shall be rated at a minimum of 150 psi at 220°F. 2. Connectors for piping 2" and smaller may have threaded ends. For piping larger than 2", connectors shall be manufactured with floating steel flanges recessed to lock the connector's raised face composite flanges. 3. Connectors shall be Mason Industries MFTNC "Mason-Flex" twin sphere, or Metraflex, or Unaflex. Elbow pattern connectors shall be Mason Industries MFNEC "Mason-Flex" single sphere. Submittals shall include test reports. FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS, PUMP CONNECTIONS Connectors for pump suction and discharge shall be flexible stainless steel hoses consisting of stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings, with internal flow correcting vanes integral to the connector. 1. CRV Flex: Designed for pump suction; vanes correct for 90° elbow at the impeller eye. 2. Vane Flex: Designed for pump discharge, vanes correct for turbulence imparted by pump impeller at the discharge. RESTRAINTS Seismic Cable Restraints: 1. Seismic cable restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables, sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2, and shall be arranged to provide all- directional restraint. 2. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle, and utilize two clamping bolts to provide cable engagement. 3. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Seismic Solid Braces: 1. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2, and shall be arranged to provide all-directional restraint. 2. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle, and utilize two through-bolts to provide proper attachment. Type 11 Seismic Snubbers: All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members, restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge-bearing neoprene. 23 05 48 -6 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.8 09603 Bushing shall be replaceable, and a minimum of 1/4-inch thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1/8-inch shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions, before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable, to allow inspection of internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated so that no short circuits exist before systems are activated. Type 12 Seismic Snubbers: All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members, restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge-bearing Specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable, and a minimum of 3/4-inch thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be manufactured with an air gap between hard and resilient material of not less than 1/8-inch, nor more than 1/4-inch. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8-inch deflection shall be equal or greater than the load assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber multiplied by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the load deflection curves up to 1/2-inch deflection in the x, y, and z planes. Anchors: 1 Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall have a safety shoulder that fully supports the wedge ring under the load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc., verifying its allowable loads. 2. Female wedge anchors shall be used in floor locations so that isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc., verifying its allowable loads. Acoustical Pipe Anchor and Guides: 1 All-directional acoustical pipe anchor shall consist of two sizes of steel tubing, separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch thick 60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 psi. The design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. 2. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing, separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch thick 60 durometer neoprene. The height of the guides shall be preset with a shear pin, to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and re-insertable, to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of + 1-5/8-inch motion, or to meet location requirements. Type 13 Thrust Restraint: The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene molded cup, as described for Type 1 isolators with the same deflection as specified for mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so that it can be preset for thrust at the factory, and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with 1 rod, and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the ductwork or the equipment and the structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust, and shall be placed symmetrically on either side of the unit. CORROSION PROOFING All vibration isolation hardware shall be designed or treated for corrosion resistance. 23 05 48 -7 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Isolators exposed to the weather shall have steel parts zinc electroplated, PVC coated, plus a Cc. D. coating of neoprene or bitumastic paint. Aluminum components for outdoor installation shall be etched and painted with industrial enamel. Nuts, bolts, and washers shall be zinc electroplated. Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of welding slag, primed with zinc chromate, and finished with two coats of industrial enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. Cc. 3.2 A. 3.3 A. 09603 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION The isolator manufacturer or its qualified representative shall be responsible for providing such supervision as may be necessary to assure correct installation and adjustment of the isolators. The installation or use of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment or piping that would result in stresses in piping connections or misalignment of shafts or bearings. In order to meet this objective, equipment and piping shall be maintained in a rigid position during installation. The load shall not be transferred to the isolator until the installation is complete and under full operational load. At the end of the job, the mechanical contractor shall make the final inspection of its portion of the entire project and submit its report to the Owner’s Representative. The report must certify that all isolators are installed as shown in the shop Drawings, that all isolators are free to work properly, that the deflections are as specified, and that no excessive stresses or binding exist on isolated equipment piping and ducts. DUCTWORK ISOLATION Spring-Type Vibration Isolators: Provide Type 5 hanger, for fan- and AHU discharge ductwork 4” WC Class and above, to a point minimum 15 feet from fan or to the farthest end of the attenuators, whichever is farther. Isolators to be 1/2" minimum static deflection with spring loaded in compression. a For engineered seismic restraint system, provide flexible supports consistent with the engineer’s calculations to a point minimum 15 feet from fan or to the farthest end of the attenuators, whichever is farther. INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC RESTRAINTS General: 1. All seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and all certified submittal data. a. Comply with SMACNA seismic restraint guidelines for all components not covered by an approved, engineered system. b. Restraint spacing: Comply with SMACNA. 2 Installation of seismic restraints and vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork, resulting in stresses or misalignment. 3. Connections of equipment to the structure shall not exceed the limits of the approved seismic restraint calculations. Generally, bracing may occur from: a. Flanges of structural beams. b. Upper truss chords in bar joist construction. c. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. 4. Cable assemblies 23 05 48 -8 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.4 09603 a. Install slightly slack on isolated systems, to avoid short-circuiting the vibration isolation. b. Install taut on non-isolated systems. Solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only. 5. Support rods shall be braced to accept compressive loads. Seismic Restraint of Piping: fi Seismically restrain all piping listed below. a. Fuel oil piping, and gas piping, that is 1" |.D. or larger. b. Piping 1-1/4" and larger located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment rooms, and fan rooms c. All other piping, 2-1/2" diameter and larger. 2: Thermal expansion guides and anchors may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints, provided they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. 3. Transverse restraint for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it, if the restraint is installed within 24" of the elbow or tee, or combined stresses are within allowable limits at longer distances. Seismic Restraint of Ducts: 1. Seismically restrain all ductwork with seismic cable restraints or seismic solid braces per SMACNA. 2. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger frame, so that the combined weights and dimensions of the ducts are less than or equal to the maximum weight and dimensions of the duct for which bracing details are selected. 3. Walls, including gypsum board non-bearing partitions, that have ducts running through them, may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide channel framing around ducts, and solid blocking between the duct and the frame. Mechanical Equipment: All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained. INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS All piping connections to vibration isolated equipment and all piping connections between isolated pipes and coils shall be made with flexible connections, unless otherwise noted. 1. Exception: Coil connections on air handlers whose fans have internal spring isolation do not require flexible connections. Take the following precautions when installing flexible connections: a. Place the connectors as close to the isolated equipment as possible. 2. Install axis of the end fittings parallel to each other and in line. a. Do not bend. b. Do not twist hose or force-rotate one end of the connector to match bolt holes in the mating pipe. Install so that the flexing occurs perpendicular to the axis of the rotating equipment. Do not compress or stretch to make it fit. Do not allow the hose to support any load. Protect from welding sparks. DarRwW 23 05 48-9 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.5 SCHEDULE OF VIBRATION ISOLATION The following shall apply to equipment not internally isolated to an equal degree by the factory design and construction. A. Above-Grade Installation—Up to 30' Floor Span: Min. Static *Isolator Deflection Base Type of Equipment Type Inches Type Pumps (base mounted): Through 5 hp 9 1.50 B-1 7-1/2 hp and up 9 1.76 B-3 Vent sets and cabinet fans: 175 to 500 rpm 9 1.75 B-1 501 rpm and up 9 1.00 B-1 Centrifugal fans and A.H. units through 20 hp: 175 to 300 rpm 9 2.50 B-3 301 to 500 rpm 9 1.75 B-3 501 rpm and up 9 1.00 B-3 *Isolator may be type 1 where the base has engineered snubber design to restrain lateral movement B. Suspended equipment shall include vent sets and low pressure packaged air handlers, air conditioners, and heat and vent units. Min. Static Deflection Type of Equipment lsolator Type Inches Base Type Units 175 to 500 rpm 5 1.25 None 501 rpm and up 5 1.00 None 3.6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT A. Electrical connections to all mechanical equipment motors shall be made through a flexible conduit designed to reduce motor vibration transfer into the rigid conduit which is directly attached to the building structure. B. Flexible conduit shall be sufficiently long to provide a 360-degree loop in the flex between the motor and the rigid conduit. Cc. Provide a soft neoprene bushing at the connection point between the flex and the rigid conduit to break the metal-to-metal contact. D. All ground wires from vibrating equipment shall be flexible with sufficient slack to prevent vibration transfer. Ground wires must not directly contact structural membranes (floors, walls or ceilings) of the building. END OF SECTION 23 05 48 09603 23 05 48 - 10 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 53 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. B. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, General Mechanical Work. WORK INCLUDED Work under this section shall include furnishing and installing painting and identification of the mechanical systems including equipment, piping, ductwork, and accessories as specified. Work shall include, but be limited to, the following: Paint mechanical work, including insulated and non-insulated piping. Provide color-coded bands and legend for all piping systems. Repaint factory-finished equipment if damaged. Label each piece of mechanical equipment and system with equipment or system name. Provide tag on each valve with identifying number. Providing valve tag chart. Provide flow directional arrows on all piping. DaAakRWN>= SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 00 00, "General Mechanical Work". Submit product information for all products specified in this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. Cc. D. E. 09603 MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Paint: Quigley, Cowman & Campbell, Dupont, Fuller, General Paint, Sherwin-Williams, Glidden. 2. Piping Bands: Seton, Brady, 3M. 3. Valve Tags: Seton. PAINT Industrial Enamel: Alkyd base, Quigley AAA, Sherwin Williams, "Kem Industrial", Glidden "Daylite" enamel. Primer for Steel Surfaces: Zinc-chromate primer, Cowman & Campbell No. 1134 or equal. Zinc Paint Compound for zinc coated surfaces: Zinc-It, by CRC. Galvax, by Alvin Products. Z.R.C., by ZRC Worldwide. Cold Galvanizing Compound, by Rust-Oleum Industrial Brands. Primer-Sealer for Insulated Surfaces: Resin-type primer sealer. Acrylic Latex for Finish Painting of Insulated Surfaces: Cowman-Campbell per color code listed 23 05 53 - 1 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 53 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT below. F. Heat Resistant Paint: Quigley AAA high temperature paint. 2.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION BANDS A. Identification Bands: 1. Bands shall conform to ASNSI A13.1 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems." 2. Bands shall be contact type adhesive backed, Seton Name Plate Corporation, Brady, Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co., Kolbi, or Zeston manufacturer. 2.4 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags: 1. Valve tags shall be constructed of 19-gauge brass with stamped, black enamel filled characters. 2. Tags shall be not less than 1-1/2" round, shall be attached to valves with a brass chain and a brass S-hook. 3. Valve tags shall be inscribed with code used for the standard mechanical symbols per Contract Drawings. 4. Number and description of function shall be indicated on each valve tag. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 A. D. 09603 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION Comply with ANSI A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping System’. PAINTING Paint all non-galvanized work specified in Division 23, which is installed in boiler rooms, mechanical rooms, and fan rooms. 1. Exception: If specifically indicated otherwise, follow those requirements. Paint exterior exposed mechanical work, except aluminum fan housings. Paint exposed frames, supports, and braces for mechanical work and mechanical equipment not having a factory finish. Paint all uninsulated steel piping and valves in steel pipe in all mechanical spaces. All work shall be performed by skilled painters. Paint shall be well mixed. Alkyd paints shall be mixed at least 24 hours before using; shall be covered during this period; shall be thoroughly stirred before application. Each coat of paint shall have slight variation of color from the preceding coat so as to permit ready identification. In cases where procedures are not definitely specified, it shall be in accordance with the best practices of the trade and as approved by the Owner's Representative. Cleaning: All surfaces to be painted shall first be thoroughly cleaned of grease and scale. Caution: Use caution with inflammable materials. Keep only small amounts of paint on hand; remove rubbing cloths and oil rags from building each day. 23 05 53 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 53 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT H. Metal Surfaces: a. General: 3 mils minimum dry film thickness; apply one priming coat and one finish coat of acrylic base paint and additional coats as required to obtain minimum dry film thickness. 2. Metal Surfaces at Temperatures above 450°F (Uninsulated diesel engine exhaust 3.3 09603 muffler and pipe): 3 mils minimum thickness; apply one prime coat and one finish coat of heat-resistant paint and additional coats as required to obtain minimum dry film thickness. 3. Metal Surfaces Exposed to Weather: Provide painting of all structural steel supports for mechanical piping, ductwork, and equipment. 4 mils minimum dry film thickness; apply One prime coat and two finish coats of acrylic base paint and additional coats as required to obtain minimum dry film thickness. 4. Galvanized Sheet Metal Work: No painting required in mechanical rooms, unless it is required by other specification divisions. Verify if painting is required in Architectural specifications and on Architectural drawings. Insulation Surfaces: 3 mils minimum dry film thickness; apply one coat of primer-sealer, and one coat of acrylic base paint and additional coats as required to obtain minimum dry film thickness. Hanger Rods: Paint wherever piping or ductwork is painted. Factory-Finished Surfaces: Factory-finished surfaces shall not be repainted unless the original finish has been damaged. Stainless Steel, Nickel-Placed, and Chrome-Plated Surfaces: Shall not be painted. Aluminum Jackets on Pipes and Ducts: Shall not be painted unless otherwise indicated or specified. Repainting of Existing Work: Wherever any existing work has been damaged during operations of this contract, repaint it, following repair of insulation to match the original condition as closely as practical. Complete repainting of the piping will not be required. Equipment or System: Each major piece of equipment or system shall have the system name lettered thereon with black paint. The letters shall be block style, stenciled approximately 2" size. VALVE TAGS Valve Tags: 1. Provide valve tags on manual valves on all piping lines, including primary mains, branches, risers, and valves in mechanical equipment rooms. Fasten tags with keychain in such a manner as cannot fall off. 2. Number each valve tag in ascending order by system. Applicable tag number shall be indicated on Contractor's as-built record drawings. 3. Valve Tag Index: A complete typewritten index of the valve tag numbers, showing specific valve location, list of rooms affected by valve operation, and valve normal position (open, closed) shall be included in each operation and maintenance manual. a. In each mechanical room, provide one laminated and framed valve tag index of the valves in that room. 23 05 53 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 53 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.4 COLOR-CODED IDENTIFICATION BANDS AND FLOW ARROWS A. Identification of Piping: All piping which is accessible for maintenance operations, including piping concealed above suspended ceilings, shall be identified with semi rigid plastic or adhesive identification bands. 1. Adhesive shall be rated for service temperature. B. Direction of flow arrows shall be included on each band. C. Locations for pipe bands shall be as follows: 1. Adjacent to each valve, branch connection, manifold, entrance and exit from a tank, vessel, or piece of equipment. 2. At 20' centers maximum for the length of the pipe. 3. Wherever a pipe changes direction. 4 At least one band wherever pipe enters or leaves a wall, floor, ceiling or foundation. D. Apply pipe bands after paint work is completed. END OF SECTION 23 05 53 09603 23 05 53 - 4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 93 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT TESTING, ADJUSTING AND DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 1.4 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, General Mechanical Work. WORK INCLUDED Work under this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary for testing and adjusting necessary to place all systems and items of equipment, specified in Division 23, in proper operating condition. All work shall be completely tested as required by this section and applicable city, county, state, federal, international and intergalactic codes and ordinances. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 00 00, "General Mechanical Work". Within 60 days after General Contractor notice to proceed, submit: 1. TAB Contractor's qualifications, including a copy of National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balancing Council (AABC) certification. 2. Copies of log and reporting forms used to record TAB data. 3. Calibration record for instrumentation proposed for use on this project. 4 Preliminary TAB Report within 60 days of General Contractor notice to proceed. At least 15 days prior to Substantial Completion Inspection, submit Final TAB Report per Section 23 00 00, article 1.15 PROJECT CLOSEOUT. QUALITY ASSURANCE The work described in this Section shall be performed by an independent firm certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balancing Council (AABC) for work of this type. The technicians assigned to the work shall be under the direct Supervision of the supervisor who is designated and qualified under the certification requirements of NEBB or AABC. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and apparatus required for performing tests. All defects disclosed by the TAB shall be reported to the owner's representative. After correction of defects, repeat the TAB on the affected items. Test Log: Prepare and maintain TAB records of all systems tests. Records shall show Contractor personnel responsibilities, dates, test gauge identification numbers, ambient temperatures, pressure ranges, rates of pressure drop, and leakage rates. At completion of TAB, logs of tests shall be certified, signed by the Contractor, and included in the final report. Covering or Use of Systems: No heating, cooling, refrigeration, or air distribution system shall be covered, concealed, or put into use until it has been TAB’ed, inspected, and accepted. 23 05 93 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 93 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT TESTING, ADJUSTING AND DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA BALANCING FOR HVAC E. Provide heating system TAB as may be required at later season. If the work is completed during the heating season, perform final TAB of cooling equipment the following summer; if completed during summer, perform TAB of heating system the following winter. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. 2.2 09603 REPORTS Preliminary Report: A thorough analysis of the system design with respect to the ability to TAB the equipment and systems therein. The Report shall name equipment and systems, propose the TAB instrumentation to be used on each, and determine whether there are adequate provisions in the design (e.g. isolation valves, test wells, flow measuring devices, and etc.) for TAB. Final Report: 1. A complete record of all TAB activities and results. 2. Format: Typewritten, with neatly drawn diagrams and handwritten data points on diagrams. 3. The Final Report shall include: a. Name and contact information of the TAB Firm and the name of persons conducting the work. b. A listing of defects and deficiencies found while performing the TAB. 1) Defects and deficiencies shall be corrected by the contractor and removed from the final TAB report. If corrections cannot be made, describe the nature of the defect or deficiency and all attempts at correction in the summary in the TAB report. c. For devices with flow rate measurements, a logically organized table of devices with preliminary, intermediate, and final flow readings, and final balancing device settings. d. A schematic diagram of each fan, air handler, and pumping system showing the pressures, temperatures, and flow rates at all relevant locations on the diagram. e. A copy of the Engineer's drawings, or single line drawings, the same scale as the Engineer's drawings, done on AutoCAD on the same size sheets. The drawings shall show all flow measurements and highlight any significant deviations from the original design. f. Test Log. g. Certification signatures by the TAB Firm’s responsible agent. TAB INSTRUMENTS The TAB agent shall use instruments equal in accuracy and functionality to those listed below in performing this balancing and testing work. The instruments shall be factory calibrated and within the duration limits of the calibration certification, shall be used with factory-determined application factors, and shall be of the type allowed by NEBB or AABC for the work. Anemometer, 4" Biram type. Anemotherm, Anemostat Model 60. Velometer, Alnor Type 3002. Pitot tube and air velocity meter, Dwyer Model 400. Pyrometer, contact type, Alnor Type 4200. Static pressure gauge, Dwyer "Magnehelic," 0-4" w.g. Smoke gun, E. V. Hill manufacturer. Speed indicator, Veedroot or J. B. Biddle "Jagabi’”. Ammeter, clip-on, Amprobe Manufacturer. Electronic Flowhood, direct digital readout, Shortridge Manufacturer. SL OPNQARWNS= ° 23 05 93 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 93 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT TESTING, ADJUSTING AND DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 3.3 3.4 09603 GENERAL Notification of Time at Which Balancing Can Be Performed: Written notice to the TAB agent when the balancing can be performed shall be given at least 30 days before the time work is to be performed. TAB work may be performed once the systems are substantially completed to such a degree as will permit continuous working day sequence on this work. The time required for testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be included in the Contractor's progress schedule. Operation of equipment shall be by Contractor during the time balancing work is being performed. TAB agent will advise the Contractor as to the time at which equipment operation is required. Contractor-Furnished Material and Labor: TAB agent shall furnish ladders, staging, accessories, and labor to access mechanical control devices, including ceiling removal and replacement, and shall change motor drive ratios if required. Contractor shall assist wherever a tradesman's specialized skill and tools are needed. Records of Balancing Test: Records of balancing test shall be kept accurately, carefully and consistently using printed forms approved by the Owner's Representative. Final power measurements of all motors, except fractional, shall be measured and recorded. Promptly notify the Contractor in order to correct deficiencies reported during the air balancing. Retest, -balance, and —adjust devices after corrections are completed. DUCTWORK LEAKAGE TEST Test completed ducts of pressure class 4"w.g. and greater. Leakage shall be based on the total designed airflow and shall not exceed 1%. Provide standard test equipment including a high-pressure rotary blower, calibrated orifice section, diffusion plate, and U-tube manometer, and conduct testing as recommended by SMACNA/DCS, current edition, Section VII, "Functional Criteria.". When partial sections of the system are tested the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed 1% of design air volume. TEMPERATURE INDICATOR CALIBRATION Temperature indicator test: Temperature indicators for plant & system level HVAC equipment, including electronic transmitters to the DDC system, shall be tested and adjusted or calibrated under operating service. Distribution level indicators, such as room thermostats are not included. BALANCING OF HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEMS General: Balance to within - 5% and +10% of design. fl Provide the testing, adjusting, and balancing of all mechanical systems including but not limited to air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems, and the equipment and apparatus connected thereto. 2. Work shall consist of setting volume (flow) and speed adjusting facilities provided or specified for the systems, recording data, making tests, and preparing reports, all as hereinafter specified. 3. Perform test of all operational equipment under working conditions. All of this work, both as to procedure and sequence, shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative. 23 05 93 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 93 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT TESTING, ADJUSTING AND DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA BALANCING FOR HVAC B. Procedures: 09603 A. 3. The environmental systems, both the air handling and hydronic systems, including all equipment, apparatus, and distribution systems, shall be tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the latest edition of the "NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems” or “AABC National Standards for Total System Balance”. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate, and calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance with the requirements of the firm’s certifying association. Accuracy of measurements shall be in accordance with the firm’s certifying association. Air Handling Systems: ft. IZ Measure and adjust all ventilation openings on all systems to produce the airflow rates shown on the Contract Drawings. When complete, at least one air path from each fan or reheat terminal unit to an air outlet or inlet shall have all volume dampers wide open. This is to ensure minimum static pressure build-up in the system as a result of balancing. Determine the minimum operating static pressure required to deliver the required air volumes for each terminal unit, and note the pressure on the record sheets. The total air volume handled by each system shall be measured and recorded, by readings taken at appropriate locations in the fan intake or discharge plenums. These measurements shall be compared with the design system volumetric rate and the individual inlet or outlet readings to correlate and substantiate the system measurements. Determine drive ratio changes required in order to obtain the optimum operating fan speeds, review with the Owner's Representative, and make necessary changes. After final drive ratio changes have been completed, make a final set of readings and adjustments, if necessary, to ensure the system balance. Record the final fan rpm pulley, sheave and belt sizes, and motor amperage. Miscellaneous Measurements and Records: 1. 2. Record nameplate data for all fans, air filters, pumps, motors, etc. associated with the air handling and/or hydronic systems. Measure and record, for all motors associated with the air handling and/or hydronic systems, the rpm, amperage, and voltage of each phase and the rating of the "thermal element" overload protection components. Where definite relationships of "positive" and "negative" pressure are required between adjoining areas, these shall be checked and proven by smoke tests or other appropriate methods and recorded. Marking of Positions: At completion of balancing, mark all settings of quadrants with center punch. Where quadrants are located in areas in which the destination of the duct is not self- evident, the room number of the space served shall be marked at the quadrant. Water Balancing: 1. General: All hydronic systems directly associated with the environmental air handling equipment shall be tested and balanced to the conditions indicated after the air handling systems have been balanced. The hydronic systems shall include but not necessarily be limited to chilled water systems to cooling coils and hot water systems to all terminal units, coils, or radiation. Procedures: Before the balancing begins, the hydronic systems must be clean and so certified by the Contractor. The systems must be flushed and strainers cleaned. The balancing shall start with all control valves open wide. With all pumps running, the flow 23 05 93-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 05 93 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT TESTING, ADJUSTING AND DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA BALANCING FOR HVAC measurements shall be recorded to be followed by the balancing. The final flow shall be set by adjustment at the pump. The tests and adjustments are to include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: a. Pumps shall be tested for flow across the pump using a calibrated orifice or by pressure drop and pump curves. The pump curve will be furnished by the pump manufacturer. The impeller diameter shall be noted on the data sheets. b. Pressure drop across the bypasses at all equipment must equal the pressure drop through the equipment. Cc. Temperatures at points indicated on the design drawings shall be read and recorded. Excessive temperature deviations if not corrected, shall be reported in the defects and deficiencies list. Automatic Control Devices: All automatically operated devices that are pertinent to the adjustment of the aforementioned air and hydronic systems shall be adjusted, calibrated, and set to deliver the required quantities of air and water and at temperatures specified. All control work shall be done in coordination with the control representative. Reports: 1. The testing and balancing agency shall, at the completion of the balancing work, submit a complete report consisting of typewritten data sheets covering all phases of the work herein specified and a set of single line drawings. The drawings shall show locations of pertinent devices and equipment, and show all significant performance deviations from the contract design. 2. Reports of all tests and balancing shall be prepared in three copies. The reports are to be signed by the principal of the firm and listing the person in charge of on-site work. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 09603 23 05 93 -5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 07 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HVAC INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 1.4 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, General Mechanical Work. WORK INCLUDED Description: Work under this section shall include furnishing all labor, material, tools and equipment necessary for the complete installation of all mechanical insulation including: 1. Pipe Insulation. 2. Duct Insulation. oH Equipment Insulation. Revisions and Alterations: Work shall include the insulation of all existing pipes and ducts that are revised. The Contractor shall replace existing insulation on piping or ducts damaged by the new work. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 00 00, "General Mechanical Work". 1. Submit product information for all insulation, jackets, adhesives, closure devices, strapping, and special covers for fittings, valves, and pumps. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire Hazard Rating: All insulation, facings, coatings, adhesives, and other accessories shall have a fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for Flame Spread and 50 for Fuel Contributed and Smoke Developed; ratings determined by UL Standard No. 723, NFPA Standard No. 255, or ASTM Standard No. E-84. UL-labeled listing or satisfactory test results from the approved testing laboratory shall be available to indicate that fire hazard ratings for materials do not exceed the above amounts. Approval of a manufacturer of insulation is not to be taken as approval of the manufacturer's "usual" or "regular" accessory materials, such as facings, adhesives, etc. Manufacturer's Stamp or Label: Every package or standard container of insulation, jackets, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered to the project site for use must have the manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving name of manufacturer, brand, and description of material. 23 07 00-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 07 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HVAC INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 09603 MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: iv Fiberglass Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville. b. Owens/Corning Corporation. c. Certainteed Corporation. d. Knauf. 2. Hydrous Calcium Silicate: a. Johns Manville. b. Owens Corning. 3. Flexible Elastomeric Closed-Cell Insulation: a. Sheet insulation: 1) Armstrong "Armaflex II" with Armstrong No. 520 joint sealant. 2) Rubatex b. Pipe insulation: 1) Armstrong "AP Armaflex. 2) Rubatex. 4. Adhesives, Cements and Coatings: a. Foster. b. MEI. Cc. CMC. 5. Banding and Clips: a. AGM. b. Miracle Surface Anchors. 6. Aluminum Insulation Jacketing: a. ITW Pabco / Childers. INSULATION MATERIALS Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation: Maximum service temperature of 850°F, K=0.23 at 75°F. Board Insulation: i Rigid glass fiber board, facing shall be aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn mesh, and laminated to chemically treated, fire-resistant kraft. 2. Insulation thickness shall be 1.5-inch, 3.0 Ib./cu. ft. density; minimum installed thermal resistance shall be R=5.0. Glass Fiber Blanket Insulation: i. Blanket shall be factory-laminated to a reinforced foil/kraft vapor barrier retarder facing. 2. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed .28 Btu-in. per sq. ft. per °F. per hour, at a mean temperature of 75°F. Insulation thickness shall be 2.0-inch, .75 lIb./cu. ft. density; minimum installed thermal resistance shall be R=5.0. Flexible Elastomeric Closed-Cell Insulation: 7. Sheet: Thermal conductivity shall not exceed .27 Btu-in. per hr per sq. ft. per °F, ata mean temperature of 75°F. Insulation thickness shall be 2.0-inch, R=8.0 2. Formed roll for piping: Thermal conductivity shall not exceed .27 Btu-in. per sq. ft. per °F. per hour, at a mean temperature of 75°F. Insulation thickness shall be 2.0-inch, R- value varies by piping size. 23 07 00 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 07 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HVAC INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA E. G. H. J. 2.3 A. 2.4 A. B. Hydrous Calcium Silicate: K=0.40 at 300°F, maximum service temperature 1200°F., minimum compressive strength of block form not less than 160 psi, with 5% compression at 1-1/2” thickness. Lagging adhesives for cementing outer cover to insulation and for lap joints and finish shall be nonflammable. Insulating Cement: Asbestos-free cement, MEI High Temperature Sealer. Vapor Barrier Coating: For indoor use, UL listed, fire resistive, USDA compliant, MEI “Eco- Vapor Cote” Coating No. 55-10. Mechanical Fasteners: Weld pins, weld studs and washers, mild steel. Staples: Outward clinching type, ASTM A167, stainless steel. REUSABLE INSULATION PADS Bats of glass fiber within silicone-treated glass cloth jackets and with outer vapor barrier finish made and shaped to fit irregular contour surfaces of valves and like devices. Insulation pads shall be non-oiled, fully enclosed all sides and edges, sewn with glass fiber and stainless steel sewing twine, and with rolled-in blind seams, with bats compressed to 1-1/2” thickness. Attach Stainless steel Bergen hooks on 3” centers around all edges of bats, on top surface, laced with stainless steel wire. Pad shall cover all wetted components of the insulated device. ALUMINUM INSULATION JACKETING Aluminum Roll Jacketing manufactured from alloys 3105 and 3003, conforming to ASTM B-209 standards, temper H-14. Provide with Polysurlyn Moisture Retarder to prevent galvanic or chemical corrosion at the metal-insulation interface. Embossed, ribbed or smooth sheet, 0.016" (0.4 mm) nominal thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. Cc. Dz. E 09603 INSULATION WORK—GENERAL Except as specified, material shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Apply insulation only after pipe and duct surfaces to be covered have been leak tested, have had rust and scale removed, and have been cleaned, dried, and inspected. Keep Insulation dry and clean at all times. Insulation shall be continuous through interior walls, except at fire walls. All insulation shall be performed at temperatures recommended by the manufacturers. Joints shall be staggered on multi-layer insulation. 23 07 00 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 07 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HVAC INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.2 A. 09603 INSULATION INSTALLATION, PIPING General: Pipe insulation shall be continuous and installed on all fittings and appurtenances, unless specified otherwise. Installation shall be with full length units of insulation, and using a single-cut piece to complete a run. Provide jackets for all pipe insulation. 1. Apply insulation over flanged joints only after piping has been brought up to operating temperature and flange bolts have been fully tightened. Joints: 1. Joints shall have adjacent sections tightly butted, with jackets drawn tight and smoothly cemented down on all longitudinal and end laps. Jacket longitudinal laps shall overlap by at least 1-1/2". Butt joints shall be sealed with pressure sensitive, vapor barrier tape. 2. Exposed ends of insulation shall be cement sealed using either adhesive or factory- applied, self-sealing system. Laps: 1. Self-sealing laps (1-1/2" minimum) and butt strips (3" minimum width) shall be used for sealing insulation joints. Staple with outward clinching staples on 4" centers. If any open gaps occur, add staples and lagging adhesive, or replace jacket totally. Jacket laps shall be smooth and without fish mouths. 2 For cold applications, provide lagging adhesive on all staples. Joints Between Adjacent Sections of Hydrous Calcium Silicate Insulation: Butt sections of pipe insulation tightly together using high-temperature glue. Form a smooth surface using an insulating cement before applying jacket. Unions, Flanges, Strainers, and Valves: 1. Screwed and Welding Fitting, and Screwed Pattern Valves: On exposed work, insulate to a diameter equal to insulation of adjacent piping. On concealed work, same insulation thickness as on adjacent piping. In all cases, same material as specified for adjacent piping. 2. Flanges and Flanged Valves: Insulate on all piping specified for insulation. Use lags of same material as pipe insulation, overlapping adjacent covering, filled up to uniform outer surface with insulating cement. Thermometer and Test Wells: Insulate thermometer and other test wells over their exterior length. Insulate thermometer wells protruding above finish pipe or equipment insulation. Neatly taper insulation away from top of well. Insulation on thermometer wells shall be 1-1/2" minimum thickness. Hangers and Anchors: Separate hangers and sleeves from the piping by insulation. Continue insulation through pipe hangers and pipe sleeves. Protection shields shall be provided at hangers where the pipe is supported by insulation. Sleeves and Wall Chases: Insulation on pipes through walls and floors shall be full size, and jacketed same as adjacent insulation. Provide a metal jacket over the insulation on pipe passing through sleeves where caulking is required. 1, Where penetrating interior walls, extend the metal jacket 2 inches out on either side of the wall and secure on each end with a band. 2. Where penetrating floors, extend the metal jacket from a point below the back-up material to a point 10 inches above the floor, with one band at the floor and one not more than one inch from end of metal jacket. Allowances for Expansion: At points where pipe will move during expansion and contraction 23 07 00 -4 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 07 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HVAC INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.3 3.4 3.5 09603 (expansion loops), clearances between the pipe and encased insulation shall be sized to permit full pipe movement without cracking or damaging insulation and casing or jacket. INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT Provide rigid insulation on all heated equipment, including heads, irregular surfaces, and flanges. Stagger joints on multi-layered applications. 1. Option: Use reusable insulation pads where access is required for service. Apply equipment insulation to fit as closely as possible to equipment. Insulation shall be grooved or scored, where necessary, to fit to contours of equipment. Stagger joints. Bevel the edges of the insulation for cylindrical surfaces to provide tight joints. After the insulation is in place, fill joints, seams, chipped edges, or depressions with bedding compound or insulating cement, to form a smooth surface. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable. The removable section joint shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap type joint. Entire surface of the removable section shall be finished. Name plates and access points: At Insulation shall be neatly chamfered off at the location of any name plates, stamping, or labeling that serves to identify the equipment and pressure vessel ratings, or at access points. Finish the beveled edge with a smooth-troweled layer of insulating cement. a. Exception: When hot surfaces are a hazard to personnel, cover with a removable port of insulation and identify the port as to its underlying surface. INSTALLATION OF RIGID CALCIUM SILICATE BLOCK INSULATION Securing of Blocks: Soft annealed 16-gauge black steel wire. On irregular surfaces which cannot be wired on, secure by welding studs. Insulating Cement: Trowel finish 1/2" thick finish coat of insulating cement over the insulation, except for removable sections of insulation. Jacket: Upon completion of installation of insulation, field apply two coats of Class 1 adhesive with glass cloth embedded between the coats. The dry film thickness of the finish shall be 1/16". INSTALLATION OF RIGID GLASS FIBER BOARD ON EQUIPMENT Secure the insulation with 3/4" x 26-gauge galvanized steel bands and insulation cement. Cover insulation with a coat of finishing cement. Install 3/4" expanded metal over equipment with standing ribs or seams prior to applying insulation, to eliminate ribs or seams penetrating through the insulation. Jacketing: Cover insulation with glass cloth smoothly adhered with lagging adhesive. Apply a skim coat of hydraulic setting cement directly to the insulation. For glass cloth jacketing, apply a flooding coat of lagging adhesive over the hydraulic setting cement. While still wet, press a layer of glass cloth or tape into adhesive, and seal laps and edges with adhesive. Coat cloth with adhesive cut at a ratio of one part water to five parts adhesive, in color other than white for the purpose of visual inspection to ensure sizing of entire surface. When dry, apply a finish coat of adhesive at can consistency. 23 07 00-5 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 07 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HVAC INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.6 PIPE INSULATION—APPLICATIONS A. General: Pipe insulation shall be provided for all piping systems listed below. 1. Heating system hot water: Alll. B. Thickness: Thickness of pipe insulation for each application shall be in accordance with the following table: MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR INSULATION Nominal Pipe Size** Runouts* 1” 1-1/4” 2-1/2” 5” to i ; Upto2" and to 2" to 4" 6" System Temp. (°F) Material Diameter less Heating System 120-200 Glass Fiber 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 Water Domestic Hot 35-120 Glass Fiber 0.5 05 05 0.5 and Cold Water Elastomeric Closed-Cell 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Downspouts 32-60 Glass Fiber - - 1.0 1.0 1.0 *Run-outs to individual fan coil, radiation, or terminal units not exceeding 12' in length. Run-outs shall be continuously insulated to within 6” of the device, except where no insulation is indicated. *“For piping exposed to ambient air, increase thickness by 1.0". 3.7 3.8 09603 JACKETS FOR PIPE INSULATION Jackets on Glass Fiber Insulation: High density, white kraft bonded to aluminum foil for vapor barrier, reinforced with fiberglass yarn, permanently treated, sealed with adhesive. Jacket shall meet composite fire and smoke hazard ratings of ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723. Jackets on Hydrous Calcium Silicate: Glass fiber, cloth meeting Mil. Spec. MIL-C-20078(G), Type I. Butt Straps: Materials shall be identical in all respects and appearance to the basic jacket material. Special Pipe Jacketing Requirements: ls Insulated piping fittings, valves, and accessories exposed to the public and within 8 feet of the floor or public walk way (bleachers) shall be covered with metal jacketing. 2. Insulated piping, fittings, valves, and accessories exposed to service areas and within 8 feet of the floor or walk way (catwalks) shall be covered with either canvas and lagging or metal jacket, at contractor's option. FITTING INSULATION COVERS, AND FLANGE COVERS General: Provide all fitting insulation covers for pipe fittings, mechanical couplings, and for pipe flanges. Exposed Work: Provide insulated fitting covers applied after pipe insulation is installed. Use material providing thermal resistance value equal to factory premolded insulation under the fitting covers. (inserted by Addendum) Exposed Work—Provide insulated fitting covers-applied 23 07 00 -6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 07 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HVAC INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1. The one-piece UL 25/50 rated PVC fitting cover shall be snapped over the insulated fitting and secured with tack fasteners, staples, or tape. 3.9 INSULATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Insulate with block on board, at Contractor's option. 1. Type of Insulation: Block: Hydrous calcium silicate. 2. Type of Insulation: Board: Rigid glass fiberboard, unfaced, 3.0 Ib./cu.ft. density. B. Equipment to be insulated and thickness of material: Surface Thickness Heat Exchangers 3” Hot Water Storage Tank 3” 1. Jacket Material: Glass fiber cloth meeting Mil. Spec. MIL-C-20079(G), Type |. 3.10 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE EXHAUST PIPE INSULATION A. Cover all exhaust piping, including silencers and flanges, with 3" thickness hydrous calcium silicate, suitable for 1200 degrees service; outer surfaces covered with glass fiber cloth meeting Mil. Spec. MIL-C-20079(G), Type |; joints lapped 2", sealed with 1/2" thick finish coat of insulating cement, troweled smooth. 3.11 INSULATION OF IRREGULAR SHAPE SURFACES A. General: Provide reusable insulation pads on irregular surfaces of flanges and equipment. All surfaces shall be covered. 3.12 INSULATION INSTALLATION, DUCTWORK A. Scope: The following ducts are to be insulated: 1. All ducts, regardless of function, that pass through the building's insulation envelope are to be insulated for 48” from the wall penetration, including any type of accessory assembly (filters, dampers, coils, etc.). 2. All ducts carrying tempered air that are exterior to the building's insulation envelope are to be insulated except as follow: a. Exhaust ducting. b. Non-recirculated relief air ducting. B. Insulation Types: 1. Rectangular Duct: Rigid board. 2. Round duct: Blanket. 3. Exterior Ducts: Flexible Elastomeric Closed-Cell Insulation Cc. Jacket: 1. Exposed Duct: Glass cloth with lagging adhesive. 2. Concealed: Kraft paper “all-service jacket”. 3. Exterior locations exposed to weather shall be covered with metal jacketing. 4. Interior locations exposed within 8 feet of the floor or public walk way (including bleachers) shall be covered with metal jacketing. 09603 23 07 00-7 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 07 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HVAC INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA D. 09603 Insulation Continuity: Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings. Duct insulation shall terminate at all fire dampers and flexible connections. Edges: Finish edges with jacketing material. Edge jackets shall remain secure through bumping or contact that is normal for the location. Trim and finish edges around duct access doors to allow use of door without damaging adjacent insulation or jacket. Installation on Concealed Duct: al For all rectangular and all round ducts, insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive around entire perimeter of the duct in 6" wide strips on 12" centers. 2. For rectangular ducts, 24" and larger, insulation shall be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by use of mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 18" centers, and not more than 18" from duct corners. 3. Mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall be spaced on 18" centers, and not more than 18" from duct corners. 4. Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners where used, and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive. The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and trapeze-type duct hangers. 5. Self-locking washers shall be installed where mechanical fasteners are used. The pin shall be trimmed back to the washer. 6. Insulation shall overlap not less than 2" at joints, and the laps shall be secured with staples on 4" centers. Installation on Exposed Duct: at For rectangular ducts, rigid factory jacketed insulation shall be secured to the duct by mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct, spaced not more than 12" apart, and not more than 3" from the edges of the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be provided for each side of duct 12" and larger. One row shall be provided for each side of duct less than 12". iz Duct insulation shall be formed with minimum jacket seams, and in no case shall a jacket seam be allowed on, or within, 3" of the duct corner. Insulation shall be brought up to standing seams, reinforcing, or other vertical projections, and shall not be carried over the projection. When height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried over. Vapor barrier jacket shall be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. When height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried over the projection. 3. Insulation shall be impaled on the duct with mechanical fasteners. Speed washers shall be installed and pin trimmed to washer. 4. Joints in the insulation jacket shall be sealed with a 4" wide strip of the same material as the jacket. The strip shall be secured with adhesive and stapled. 5. Breaks and penetrations in the jacket material for ribs or standing seam shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the jacket. Patches shall extend not less than 2" beyond the break or penetration, and shall be secured with adhesive and staples. 6. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with adhesive. Two coats of adhesive coating shall be applied, with glass cloth embedded between coats. The total coating shall have a dry film thickness of approximately 1/16", and shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2". Ducts Exposed to Weather: Ducts shall be finished with an aluminum jacket over the insulation. Jacketing shall be applied with joints lapped not less than 2", and shall be secured with 3/8" x 0.020" thick aluminum bands located at each circumferential lap and at not more than 9" intervals throughout. Horizontal joints shall lap downward to shed water. Vertical joints shall be sealed with weatherproof silicone sealant. 23 07 00 -8 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 07 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HVAC INSULATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.13 DUCT INSULATION—APPLICATIONS A. Extent of Insulation: Insulate heating, ventilating, and air conditioning supply and return ducts, plenums and casings from the outside air intake to the room outlets. Insulate flexible runouts, plenums, casings, and air handlers. Omit insulation where acoustical lining is applied in plenums and ducts, at sound attenuators, factory fabricated sound plenums, at terminal devices, where fan cabinet is factory lined, and where the fan casing is totally enclosed in the plenum. B. Install jacketed rigid insulation on exposed ducts in inside and outside locations. Use jacketed flexible blanket insulation on concealed interior ducts. C. Insulation for Exposed Ducts: Rigid glass fiber insulation board, for rectangular ducts and large diameter round and oval ducts. Corner angles shall be installed on external corners of ductwork in exposed spaces before covering with jacket. D. Insulation for Concealed Ducts: Blanket glass fiber, for all concealed ducts and small diameter round exposed ducts. E. Adhesive: MEI, "Eco Spray Adhesive." F. Banding and Clips: Metal bands shall be 3/8" wide x 0.020" thick aluminum or aluminum-alloy. 3.14 MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS FOR DUCTS : Thick- System Material pain Jacket Warm Air, 40°F-65°F & 85°F— Blanket or 1" Kraft Paper 200°F (Supply Duct*) Board P Cold Air, -60°F — 40°F Board 4" Glass Fiber Cloth with Lagging (Outside Air**) Adhesive over Kraft Paper Plenums & ducts within 10 feet of Board 4” Glass Fiber Cloth with Lagging exteriors, if connected to exterior Adhesive over Kraft Paper Room Temp Air, 65°F-85°F (Return/Exhaust Air***) none NIA ..NIA Exposed: Interior Ducts exposed None N/A N/A to the room they serve (Gym) Exposed: Exterior Ducts exposed _ Flexible to weather. Elastomeric 2 Aluminum sheet General guide only. Additional jacketing requirements are specified above in 3.12,C. *Supply air duct shall include all ductwork from the preheat coil through the related supply air diffusers. *“Outside air duct shall include any duct in direct contact with unconditioned outside air. **Return/exhaust air includes ducts returning or exhausting room temperature air, and not included in one of the categories above. END OF SECTION 23 07 00 09603 23 07 00-9 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 11 A. 1.2 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, “General Mechanical Work”. WORK INCLUDED The existing Building Control System (BCS) employs Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology to provide functions necessary for control of mechanical systems. This project must interface seamlessly with the existing system. This is a performance specification. Design work by a qualified controller designer is required upon award of this project. BACnet or LonWorks compatibility, with this new system capable of remote monitoring and future expansion by any other BACnet or LonWorks compatible DDC system. System shall include a portable operator's work station, stand-alone DDC panels, controllers, sensors, automatic control valves and valve actuators, dampers and control damper actuators, field devices, operating software, operator training, installation labor, warranty and all other necessary components, accessories, and labor to provide a complete and workable system. Include all controls listed herein, and control of all items not listed herein but which are a part of the final design. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will be able to operate under stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller, the control system shall continue to independently operate under control. Communication between the control panels and all workstations shall be over a high speed network. The operator shall not have to know the panel identifier or location to view or control an object. Application Specific Controllers shall be constantly scanned by the network controllers to update point information and alarm information. The documentation is schematic in nature. The Contractor shall provide hardware and software necessary to implement the functions and sequences specified and/or shown in this Section of the Specifications. Products furnished but not installed under this section: Control Valves. Flow Switches. Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets in Piping. Automatic Control Dampers. PONS Distributed logic control systems complete with all software and hardware functions shall be provided and installed. This system is to control all mechanical equipment, including all unitary equipment such as pumps, air handlers, heat exchangers, etc. and interface with the biomass boilers control panel. New work shall tie into existing operators work station with a seamless connection and graphical users interface. All application controllers all equipment and any other piece of controlled equipment shall be 23 09 00 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC 09603 fully programmable. Application controllers shall be mounted next to controlled equipment and communicate with building controller via BACnet or LAN. Room sensors shall allow room setpoint adjustment within preset limits. Provide all alarms, manual control, and status indication functions at local CRT and central host as indicated under the sequence of operation, Specification Section 23 09 93. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 00 00, "General Mechanical Work". Variations: 1. Materials: Submit detailed descriptions of any variations from the specified equipment and materials. List the variations on the first page of the submittal, and cross reference the variations with the original specification. 2. Programming: Submit detailed descriptions of any variations from the specified sequences. List the variations on the first page of the submittal, and cross reference the variations with the original sequence. Shop drawings and manufacturers' standard specification data sheets on all hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project until submittals have been reviewed by the Owner’s Representative and Owner for conformity with the plan and specifications. Six (6) copies are required. Shop drawings shall also be provided in electronic media. Provide shop Drawings in standard size 11 inches x 17 inches. Provide shop Drawings utilizing computer aided design (no freehand sketches). Show all field wiring, tubing, interconnecting equipment, and devices. Identify the type and size of wire and tubing, and assign unique numbers or colors to every wire or tube. Identify equipment and devices by the reference designators shown on the Drawings. Provide material list on each Drawing. 6. Include schematics showing the general mechanical system layout, with all sensors/devices of each mechanical system shown with corresponding detail and labeling shall be provided. if. Include floor plan Drawings showing location of all control panels, room sensors, and controllers. PON> a Quantities of items submitted may be reviewed by the Owner’s representative. Such review shall not relieve the contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion. Submit the following within 60 days of contract award: 1. A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer and model number. 2. A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, model number (including pattern and connections), flow, CV, pressure rating, and location. 3. A schedule of all control dampers. This shall include the damper size, pressure drop, manufacturer and model number. 4. Provide manufacturers cut sheets for major system components. When manufacturer's cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification number and article and/or drawing sheet and detail that the submittal is being submitted to cover. Include: a. Building Controllers. b. Custom Application Controllers. 23 09 00-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC 09603 ON Cc. Application Specific Controllers. d. Portable Operator Workstation. e. Auxiliary Control Devices. Proposed control system riser diagram showing system configuration, device locations, addresses, and cabling. Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory terminations. Terminal numbers shall be clearly labeled. Points list showing all system objects, and the proposed English language object names. Sequence of operations for each system under control. Programming shall be specific for the use of the Control System being provided for this project. Project Record Documents: Provide Record Documents 30 days prior to final inspection. Submit three (3) copies of record (as-built) documents. NO FINAL INSPECTION WILL BE UNDERTAKEN BY THE OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE WITHOUT ACCEPTABLE PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS. 1. RO Project Record Drawings—These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop drawings. One set of electronic media including CAD DWG or DXF drawing files shall also be provided. a. Drawings shall include the physical location of building control system equipment and system architecture. Project Record Control Sequences a. Include written sequences of operation, software descriptions, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Checkout, Startup, and Testing Reports and Checklists. Acceptance test proposal indicating personnel, tests, and procedures to prove functional performance of control system. Operating and Maintenance (O&M) Manual—These shall be as-built versions of the submittal product data. In addition to that required for the submittals, the O&M manual shall include: a. Names, address and 24-hour telephone numbers of Contractors installing equipment, and the control systems and service representative of each. b. Operators Manual with procedures of operating the control systems including logging on/off, alarm handling, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing set points and other variables. Cc. Programming Manual with a description of the programming language including syntax, statement descriptions including algorithms and calculations used, point database creation and modification, program creation and modification, and use of the editor. d. Engineering, Installation and Maintenance Manual(s) that explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; preventative maintenance and calibration procedures; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware. e. A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the programming language including the point database. One set of electronic media containing files of the software and database shall also be provided. f. A list of recommended spare parts with part numbers and supplier. Complete original issue documentation, installation and maintenance information for all third party hardware provided including computer equipment and sensors. h. Complete original issue CDs for all software provided including: operating systems, programming language, and operator workstation software. i. Licenses, Guarantee, and Warrantee documents for all equipment and systems. 1) Assign to Owner and register with the manufacturer(s). j. Complete input/output summary ("points list") to document system points and their associated functions as required by the Sequences of Operation in Part 3 - Execution of this Section. Summary shall include all monitoring points, alarm points as specified and appended to this Section. 23 09 00-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC k. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components 1.4 1.5 09603 including a schedule of tasks (inspection, cleaning, calibration, etc.), time between tasks, and task descriptions. Training Outline: 1. Comply with requirements in Section 23 00 00, Article 1.12, OPERATING PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION. 2. The contractor shall provide a minimum of 5 hours of training on the new buildings system and the tie into the boiler controller. QUALITY ASSURANCE System Installer Qualifications: 1. The building controls system shall be installed by skilled electricians and mechanics, all of whom are properly trained and qualified for this work. At least one technician shall be present (when work is being executed) that has been certified by the manufacturer. 2. The Installer shall have an established working relationship with the Control System Manufacturer of not less than three years. 3. The Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's classes on the control system. The Installer shall present for review the certification of completed training, including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request. 4. The installer shall have an office in Alaska and provide 24-hour response in the event of a customer call. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of all applicable standards and codes, except when more detailed or stringent requirements are indicated by the Contract Documents, including requirements of this Section. 1. Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX Listed. 2. National Electrical Code—NFPA 70. 3. Federal Communications Commission—Part J. 4. ASHRAE/ANSI 135-1995 (BACnet). All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be applied in similar installations for a minimum of 5 years. This installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner's representative in writing prior to bid date. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract. Supervision and checkout of the system shall be by Engineers and technicians directly employed by the instrumentation and control subcontractor. Although such work may not be explicitly indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. WARRANTY Provide under the provisions of Division 01. Labor & materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner’s Representative. Control System failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge or reduction in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during customary business hours. At the end of the final start-up/testing, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to 23 09 00 -4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC D. 1.6 A. the Owner's Representative, the Owner’s Representative will sign certificates certifying that the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification. The date of Owner's acceptance shall be the start of warranty. Operator workstation software, project specific software, database, and firmware updates shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during the warranty period. Written authorization by Owner must, however, be granted prior to the installation of such changes. OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL All project developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These include but are not limited to: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Project Database. 3. Job-Specific Application Programming Code. 4. All Documentation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. B. 09603 MANUFACTURER Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Building Control System: Alerton Technologies, Inc. Automated Logic, by Meridian Systems. Honeywell, by Systems House. Johnson Controls. Siebe, by Control Contractors, Inc. Siemens Building Technologies. g. Delta Controls Corporation. meaooD SYSTEM OVERVIEW The BCS shall control all coils, pumps, air terminals, miscellaneous fans, and other specified equipment directly, without intervening conventional controls. System shall be capable of monitoring points described herein. System shall be completely pre-calibrated with no controller set point adjustment or calibration required. System shall include but not be limited to the following features: 1. Zone by zone control of space temperature, usage scheduling, equipment failure reporting, and override timers for off-hours usage. A zone is the area served by one air terminal unit. 2. Totally adjustable room sensors. All temperature setpoints to be capable of override by operator from the operator's terminal. 3: Priority password security system to prevent unauthorized use. Six levels, each assignable to dedicated function keys. 4. Equipment monitoring and alarm function including information for diagnosing equipment problems. 5. Auto-restart on power failure. 6. Equipment run time totalization of fans, pumps, boilers, unitary equipment, etc., capable of alarm and maintenance work order generation. 7 Operator shall have complete capability to modify displays, menus and menu format headings, data base information, at will, with no required auxiliary equipment. 8. Operator may select individual security level assignments for each operation and menu selection available, according to his/her specific operation responsibilities. Graphics: A standard, dynamic, fully programmed, color graphic package shall allow operator 23 09 00-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC 2.3 2.4 2.5 09603 capability of constructing floor plan drawings, mechanical equipment piping diagrams, mechanical systems drawings at will, while system is on line. Graphics to be dynamic, displaying current point data information and integrate with the existing controls. ENCLOSURES All controllers, power supplies and relays shall be mounted in enclosures. Enclosures may be NEMA 1 when located in a clean, dry, indoor environment. Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 12 when installed in other than a clean environment. Enclosures shall have hinged, locking doors. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for all enclosures in any mechanical room or electrical room. Include location and unit served on nameplate. Laminated plastic shall be 1/8" thick sized appropriately to make label easy to read. ELECTRONIC DATA INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Control Outputs: 1. On/Off Outputs: Control panel shall internally provide test points for the circuit driving the equipment contactor, for the purpose of troubleshooting whether the 120 VAC circuit to the contactor is active. All such relays or digital output modules shall provide a pilot light or LED display of this same status. Modulating Outputs: Modulating outputs shall be industry standard 0-5 VDC, or 0-10 VDC. Milliamp outputs of 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA are also acceptable. Drive open/Drive closed type modulating outputs are acceptable provided that they also comply with the following requirements. Le All modulating outputs shall provide display indication via on-board display or portable operator’s terminal of the commanded position signal to the actuating device. This meter, gauge, or display must provide either a 0-100 percent position indication, or readout directly in the engineering units of the signal being used. Drive open/drive closed type controllers shall include sufficient components and control algorithms to comply with this requirement. Positive feedback shall be provided to insure positive indication that this control device is at the commanded position in a drive open/closed operation. INTEROPERABLE CONTROLLER shall be either LonMark or BACNet. Choose either A or B of the following: LonMark Interoperable Digital Controller (IDC): 4! Controls shall be microprocessor based Interoperable LonMark™ or LonWorks Controllers (IDC). Where possible, all Interoperable Digital Controllers shall bear the applicable LonMark™ interoperability logo on each product delivered. 2. HVAC control shall be accomplished using LonMark™ based devices where the application has a LonMark profile defined. Where LonMark devices are not available for a particular application, devices based on LonWorks shall be acceptable. For each LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the device supplier must provide an XIF file for the device. Publicly available specifications for the Applications Programming Interface (API) must be provided for each LonWorks / LonMark controller defining the programming or setup of each device. All programming, documentation and programming tools necessary to set up and configure the supplied devices per the specified sequences of operation shall be provided. 3. The LonWorks network trunk shall be run to the nearest Network Area Controller (NAC). A maximum of 126 devices may occupy any one LonWorks trunk and must be installed using the appropriate trunk termination device. All LonWorks and LonMark devices must 23 09 00-6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC 2.6 09603 be supplied using FTT-10A LonWorks communications transceivers. The Network Area Controller will provide all scheduling, alarming, trending, and network management for the LonMark / LonWorks based devices. The IDCs shall communicate with the NAC at a baud rate of not less than 78.8K baud. The IDC shall provide LED indication of communication and controller performance to the technician, without cover removal. All IDCs shall be fully application programmable and shall at all times maintain their LONMARK certification. Controllers offering application selection only (non- programmable), require a 10% spare point capacity to be provided for all applications. All control sequences within or programmed into the IDC shall be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained. The supplier of any programmable IDC shall provide one copy of the manufacturer's programming tool, with documentation, to the owner. Interoperable BACnet Controller (IBC): A: Controls shall be microprocessor based Interoperable BACnet Controllers (IBC) in accordance with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995. IBCs shall be provided for Unit Ventilators, Fan Coils, Heat Pumps, Variable Air Volume (VAV) Terminals and other applications as shown on the drawings. The application control program shall be resident within the same enclosure as the input/output circuitry, which translates the sensor signals. The system supplier must provide a PICS document showing the installed systems compliance level to the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995. Minimum compliance is Level 3. The IBCs shall communicate with the NAC via an Ethernet connection at a baud rate of not less than 10 Mbps. The IBC Sensor shall connect directly to the IBC and shall not utilize any of the I/O points of the controller. The IBC Sensor shall provide a two-wire connection to the controller that is polarity and wire type insensitive. The IBC Sensor shall provide a communications jack for connection to the BACnet communication trunk to which the IBC controller is connected. The IBC Sensor, the connected controller, and all other devices on the BACnet bus shall be accessible by the POT. All IBCs shall be fully application programmable and shall at all times maintain their BACnet Level 3 compliance. Controllers offering application selection only (non- programmable), require a 10% spare point capacity to be provided for all applications. All control sequences within or programmed into the IBC shall be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained. DDC SYSTEM Modular Building Controllers (MBCs): 7 The system shall utilize intelligent Modular Building Controllers (MBCs) to interface TECs and sensors being monitored and equipment. Being controlled by the DDC control system. Each unit shall be microprocessor based, and shall be listed for UL 916 and UL 864. Each MBC shall be capable of performing all specified control functions in a manner completely independent of any central host or any other computer. All database information, operating software and application programs for each unit shall be stored and executed from within the MBC. The stand-alone MBC shall be microprocessor-base, multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules. All units shall contain the necessary equipment for direct interface with the sensors, actuators, and TCUs to which connection is made. Each MBC shall contain a real time clock to enable the unit to automatically perform time- based functions. Each panel shall have a long life battery back-up to protect RAM based programming. 23 09 00-7 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC 09603 5. 10. aie 12. 13. Each MBC shall have at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals, modems and portable laptop computers. Any system which requires purchase of proprietary printer or operator terminal for communication will not be acceptable. Each panel shall be capable of direct interface to industry standard sensors and input devices. It shall be possible for the panels to accept the following types of input and outputs. a. Analog Inputs: 1) 4.20 mA. 2) 0-10 Vde. 3) Thermistors. 4) 1000 ohm RTDs. b. Digital Inputs: 1) Dry Contact Closure. 2) Pulse Accumulator. 3) Voltage Sensing. c. Outputs: 1) 4.20 mA. 2) 0-10 Vdc. 3) 0-20 psi. 4) Dry contact. MBCs shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device. Graduated intensity LEDs or analog indication of value shall also be provided for each analog output. Status indication shall be visible without opening the panel door. The operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the MBC via local, point discrete, on-board hand/off/auto operator override switches for digital control type points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel processor is operational or not. a. Switches shall be mounted either within the MBCs key-accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorized overrides. b. MBCs shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. MBCs shall also collect override activity information for reports. All pneumatic analog outputs must also be provided with integral feedback of actual pressure output and manual override. Feedback shall be a true output loop feedback reading. Also, each processor shall have a self-diagnostic LED to indicate status. Point configuration of each MBC shall be completely flexible to meet specific field application (i.e. point input and output modules for each panel may be selected in any combination of analog or digital inputs and outputs up to the maximum panel capacity). It shall be possible to add any point type by simply adding another point module of that specific type. The MBC shall inherently contain the following energy management routines without the addition of any hardware or software: Time of Day Scheduling. Start/Stop Time Optimization. Peak Demand Limiting. Duty Cycling. Economizer Control. Trend Logging. ; Temperature Reset Routines. The database for each panel shall be owner-definable and shall be RAM based, such that system programming may be modified through a CRT or laptop computer plugged into the MBC panel's RS232C port. The operator shall have access to database for all panels on the network from a single MBC location. An operator terminal connected to any field panel on the network directly or via modem “~paocp a 23 09 00-8 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC 2.7 09603 will also have access to all terminal equipment controllers. Under no circumstances will it be necessary to identify the specific bus, field panel, or terminal controller prior to obtaining values or status for any point in the building. Application Specific Controllers (ASCs): 1. Provide ASCs as required for each mechanical system or piece of equipment. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-based direct digital control unit and shall be capable of operating either as a stand-alone controller or on a multi-drop communications network originating at the MBC. Provide each ASC with sufficient memory to operate in a truly independent manner; that is, each ASC shall support its own inputs and outputs, operating systems, database and programs necessary to perform control sequences and energy management routines. Provide the following types of ASC's as necessary: a. Terminal equipment controllers. b. Digital point units (DPUs). c. Remote building controllers (RBCs). Terminal Control Units (TCUs): ft Control of terminal units shall be accomplished by a microprocessor based stand-alone MBC utilizing direct digital control. The TCU shall interface to the building control system. An individual controller shall be provided for each terminal unit. The terminal control unit must be listed by Underwriters Laboratory under the following categories UL PAZX and UL 864 UDTZ. For air terminal boxes, the DDC contractor shall furnish the terminal controller (controller, damper motor, flow transducer) to the terminal unit manufacturer, for factory mounting. Costs associated with factory mounting of the terminal control unit shall be covered by the air terminal unit manufacturer. The air terminal unit manufacturer shall provide an averaging air velocity sensor suitable for interfacing with the TCUs differential pressure transducer. Each TCU shall be accessible for purposes of control and monitoring from central operator's terminals as specified herein. TCU damper actuator shall be of the 24 VAC floating-point type. Upon power loss, the actuator maintains its current damper position. Position status is shown in percentage open notation. TCU room temperature sensor shall come complete with a terminal jack and programmable override switch integral to the sensor assembly. The terminal jack shall be used to connect the portable operators terminal to control and monitor all hardware and software points associated with the terminal unit. A terminal jack may be alternatively located on a stainless steel wall plate mounted adjacent to the sensor. An override switch shall initiate override of the night setback or unoccupied mode to normal operation when activated. The switch function may be locked out, canceled or limited as to time or temperature in software. TCU differential pressure transducer shall accept an average airflow measurement signal from the VAV terminal box averaging air velocity sensor. The value is converted through a square root function to average air flow by the TCU, TCU wiring terminal shall be detachable type allowing quick serviceability of the electronic controller hardware without removing the existing wiring. The TCU shall continue its primary control function independent of other network communication. An operator's terminal connected to any field panel on the network, directly or via modem, will have access to all TCUs connected to all communication bus. Under no circumstances will be necessary to identify the specific bus, field panel, or TCU prior to obtaining values or status for any point in the building system. BOILER CONTROL Provide tie in to the boiler controller supplied by the Biomass Boiler Supplier/Contractor. 23 09 00-9 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC B. The DDC Controls Contractor shall supply quantities as required of temperature transmitters, 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 09603 proving devices for air- and water flow, pressure transmitters, and control panels. 1. Using a main loop-mounted temperature transmitter, the DDC controls shall upon an enable signal from the central BAS, boiler pumps in order to maintain the desired loop operating temperature. Sequencing control system shall provide the following features: a. Combustion fan proof of flow to Biomass control panel b. Adjustable delay on break for boiler pumps: 1 to 15 minutes of additional run time. c. Required relays, alarm horn, and terminal strip for the interface with the central BAS. d. Return water temperature transmitter for the biomass boiler control panel. e. Supply water temperature transmitter for the biomass boiler control panel. f. Listing by Underwriters Laboratory (UL) for the control panel. 2. Digital display for displaying temperatures and set points. Displays and set points for the following shall be available: loop temperature, loop set point from the HVAC computer, return water temperature and set point, maximum and minimum permissible set points from the central HVAC system. ALTERNATING / LEAD-LAG MOTOR CONTROLLERS Controller with two 480v 3 ph inputs and two 480v 3 ph outputs, shall automatically alternate lead unit based on logical parameter to equalize the motor run-time. Controller shall automatically start lag unit upon input from lead failure sensor, and prevent simultaneous operation. ALTERNATING / THREE STAGE MOTOR CONTROLLERS Controller with three 480v 3 ph inputs and three 480v 3 ph outputs, shall automatically alternate lead unit based on logical parameter to equalize the motor run-time. Controller shall automatically start lag units upon demand for additional capacity or upon input from lead failure sensor. TRANSFORMERS 120 VAC to 24 VAC transformers shall be supplied to provide control voltage to the control system. The incoming 120 VAC power shall be fused. Transformers shall be supplied with suitable mounting plates, and mounted in separate electrical panel boxes with hinged covers adjacent to control system panels. CONTROL VALVES Control valves shall be two-way or three-way pattern as shown, constructed for tight shutoff and shall operate satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials. Two-way control valves shall exhibit equal percentage characteristics. Non-equal percentage valve characteristics shall not be acceptable. Valves with size up to and including 3" shall be "screwed" with 250 psi ANSI pressure body rating; 4" and larger valves shall be ‘flanged’ configuration. Proportional control valves shall be sized for a maximum pressure drop of 3.0 psig at rated flow (except as noted). Two-position line size and shall be provided with a 250 psi static pressure body rating. MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS See Section 23 33 00. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) See Section 23 05 14, “Variable Frequency Drives.” 23 09 00 - 10 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC 2.14 A. 09603 SENSORS AND MISCELLANEOUS FIELD DEVICES Temperature Sensors: 1. All temperature sensors shall be solid state electronic, employing a resistance type output. All sensors shall have a minimum accuracy of 0.5 degrees F for room application, and 1.0 degrees for averaging duct applications. Duct Sensors (Rigid Element): Sensors shall be 1000 ohm RTD, rigid averaging element provided in length suitable (18", 24" or 48") for accurately sensing average temperature in duct. Range: 32 to 140 degrees F. Duct Sensors (Flexible Element): Sensors shall be 1000 ohm RTD, flexible averaging element provided with sensor length of up to 20 feet for complete duct coverage: Range, 32 to 260 degrees F. Outside Air Temperature Sensor: Sensor shall be an RTD or solid-state device mounted in the outdoors where airflow occurs. The temperature range shall be -80°F to 120°F. Provide with sun shield and weatherproof assembly for mounting to 1/2-inch rigid conduit. Pipe Sensors: Sensors shall be 1000 ohm RTD devices for all hot water temperature applications. The temperature range shall be 32 to 260 degrees F for accurate sensing. Sensor probe shall be installed with heat conductive grease. Probe and sensor head shall be removable without breaking fluid seal. Install sensors in top of pipe for horizontal runs, and at a positive slope on vertical runs to prevent condensation from flowing to sensor head. Remote temperature sensors: Sensors shall be outdoor type with a minimum temperature range of -10 to 100 degrees F. Sensor shall be electronic 2 wire type and be provided with a minimum 200 ft of lead. Wall Sensors: 1, User Adjustable wall sensor shall use solid-state temperature sensing device packaged in aesthetically pleasing enclosure. Sensor shall provide override function, warmer/cooler lever for set point adjustment and port for plug-in of Field Service Tool for field adjustments. Override time shall be stored in controller and be adjustable on a zone-by- zone basis. Adjustment range for warmer/cooler lever shall also be stored in EEPROM on controller. All programmable variables shall be available to Field Service Tool through the wall sensor port. Non Adjustable wall sensor shall use solid-state temperature sensing device packaged in a service box with stainless steel cover plate. Setpoint adjustment shall be over the network from the workstation. T-Stat for use with remote temperature sensor: Shall be a digital non-programmable, low voltage type, with single stage heat and cool setting. Display shall be LCD and indicate temperature. T-stat shall have warmer/cooler set point adjustment. Low Temperature Detection Thermostats (Freezestats): 1 Freezestats shall have an extended 20-foot element to sense the air temperature entering the reheat coil. The freezestat shall sense the coldest 6-inch segment. If the set point falls below the designated set point (usually 35°F), the freezestat's output contacts shall transfer. Output control shall have two (2) SPDT contacts with a voltage and current rating double the applied load. One (1) contact shall be hardwired to de-energize the fan system and the other contact for remote monitoring. Freezestats shall be furnished with a manual reset. Provide one (1) freezestat for each 20 square feet of coil face area. Flow Sensors and flow-proving switches: 1. For air and water applications: Analog-in / digital-out current transmitters, or differential pressure sensor. Controlled application shall operate in the sensor’s mid-range. a. Current transmitters shall be the electronic analog type with accuracy of 0.2% of scale, for use in water or air systems. b. Differential-pressure type air flow sensors shall be electronic analog transmitters piped to fan discharge, except where fans operate at less than one inch WG they 23 09 00 - 11 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC E. F. G. 2.15 A. B. shall be piped across the fan. Maximum pressure rating shall be at least 10 inches wc. 1) For fractional horsepower and non-ducted fans, relays or auxiliary contacts may be used to indicate proof-of-flow. Cc. Differential-pressure type water flow sensors shall be electronic analog transmitters piped across pump suction and discharge. Devices shall be 150 psi rated. Differential pressure switches will have three valve manifolds for servicing. Building Static Pressure Transmitters: Differential air pressure shall have a range of -0.25 to +0.25 inches. Transmitter accuracy, including non-linearity, hysteresis, and non-repeatability shall be within 1% of full scale. Prove zero and span adjustments for a proportional output of 4- 20ma. Duct Static Pressure Transmitters: Duct static pressure transmitters shall be electronic analog type suitable for the low pressures to be encountered, be selected for approximately 50% over range. Field Service Tool: t Field service tool shall allow technician to view and modify all setpoints and tuning parameters stored in application controller. In addition, technician shall be able to view status of all inputs and outputs on digital readout. Each piece of data shall have a data code associated with it that is customizable. 2. Field service tool shall plug into wall sensor and provide all the functionality specified. Operator workstation shall include the capability to disable operation of the field service tool. 3. Provide 1 Field Service Tools for this project. WIRING Class 1: Meet all requirements of Division 26 for Class 1 wiring. Class 2: a Provide shielded low capacitance wire for all communications trunks. 2. All cables shall be UL listed for application, e.g. cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed specifically for that purpose. a. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120V. If only higher voltages are available, provide step-down transformers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 09603 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Examination: A Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. 2. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Owner's Representative for resolution before rough-in work is started. 3. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. General Workmanship: a Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2: Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible. 3. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. 4. Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by Chapter 1 Article 100 Part 23 09 00 - 12 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC 3.2 3.3 09603 A of the NEC. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices. On LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and programming required to ensure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences of operation and point schedules. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 48 inches above floor with minimum 3’-0” clear access space in front of units. Obtain approval on locations from owner's representative prior to installation All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted to protect them from vibration, moisture and high or low temperatures. Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags for all panels. Provide stainless steel or brass thermowells suitable for respective application and for installation under other sections, sized to suit pipe diameter without restricting flow. DDC OBJECT TYPE SUMMARY Provide all database generation. Displays: 1. System displays shall show all analog and binary object types within the system. They shall be logically laid out for easy use by the owner. Provide outside air temperature indication on all system displays associated with economizer cycles. 2. All equipment: System Graphics shall include all alarms and all parts. Graphics shall be prepared for a minimum of the following systems and subsystems: Overall hydronic heating system. Overall hydronic ventilation system. Individual room fintube and VAV boxes. Air handling units. Heat exchangers and pumps. Exhaust fans. Lift Station. am-oeaocm Run Time Totalization: At a minimum, run time totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored supply fan, return fan, exhaust fan, hot water and glycol heating water pumps. Warning limits for each point shall be entered for alarm and or maintenance purposes. Trendlog: All binary and analog object types (including zones) shall have the capability to be automatically trended. At the owner or engineer's discretion all points shall be trend logged. Alarm: All analog inputs (High/Low Limits) and selected binary input alarm points shall be prioritized and routed (locally or remotely) with alarm message per owner's requirements. Database Save: Provide back-up database for all stand-alone application controllers on disk. 23 09 00 - 13 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC 3.4 FIELD SERVICES A. Start up systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up prior to placing control systems in permanent operation. B. Provide the capability for off-site monitoring at control contractor's local or main office. At a minimum, off-site facility shall be capable of system diagnostics and software download. Owner shall provide phone line for this service for 1 year or as specified. Cc. Provide Owner's Representative with spare parts list. Identify equipment critical to maintaining the integrity of the operating system. 3.5 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. A project supervisor shall be assigned to coordinate all aspects of the project installation. The project supervisor shall be a direct employee of the authorized control system subcontractor. The supervisor shall be factory trained in control technology, systems installation, and commissioning software based system. The project supervisor shall also have the broad authority to schedule all control work, supervise the installation of control equipment, issue field change orders, provide technical consultation, commission system, provide acceptance testing, correct punchlist items, and train the user's operators. B. Arrange for wiring regardless of voltage. Wiring over 24 volts shall be installed by competent electricians and comply with all provisions of Division 26. C. Provide sensors and other field devices for installation in piping, ductwork, and walls or ceilings to be installed by the appropriate crafts. D. Provide temperature sensing wells to be installed by plumber. E. Coordinate with the Biomass Boiler Supplier/Contractor with the boilers, burners, and their associated pumps. F. Provide control dampers to be installed by the sheet metal worker. 3.6 WIRING A. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. B. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the national and local electrical codes and Division 26 of these specifications. Where the requirements of this section differ with those in Division 26, the requirements of this section shall take precedence. Cc. Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.) D. Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g. relays and transformers). E. Where class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it, and bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 10 ft intervals. Such bundled cable shall be fastened to the structure, using specified fasteners, at 5 ft intervals 09603 23 09 00 - 14 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC 3.7 09603 or more often to achieve a neat and workmanlike result. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to- wire connections shall be at a terminal block. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals. 1 All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices shall be made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations in accordance with other sections of this specification and local codes. Size of conduit and size and type of wire shall be the design responsibility of the Control System Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These relays may also be located within packaged equipment control panel enclosures. These relays shall not be located within Class 1 starter enclosures. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network cabling. Network or communication cabling shall be run separately from other wiring. Adhere to Division 16 requirements for installation of raceway. This Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated (as- built) wiring diagrams with termination's identified at the job site. Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2" electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall be used. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or as indicated on the electrical drawings. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms to be installed in raceways. All other wiring to be installed neatly and inconspicuously per local code requirements. Control wiring above accessible ceiling spaces may be run with plenum rated cable (without conduit). Control wiring shall not be installed in the below floor space. All wiring in non-accessible spaces shall be in conduit (example wiring routed down wall shall be in conduit). INSTALLATION OF SENSORS Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor operates. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by the wall framing. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings. Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of air flow. 23 09 00 - 15 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC F. Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 09603 Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip. All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells. Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within mechanical and service rooms. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at designated location. INSTALLATION OF ACTUATORS Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions. To compress seals when spring return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, power actuator to approximately 5@ open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the linkage. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions. Valves - Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's recommendations. WARNING LABELS Affix plastic labels on each starter and equipment automatically controlled through the Control System. Each label shall indicate the following warning: "C A U T 1 ON this equipment is operating under automatic control and may start at any time without warning." IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served. Identify control panels with minimum 1 cm letters on laminated plastic nameplates. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record documents. All plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does not remove the label. CONTROLLERS Provide a separate Controller for each major piece of HVAC equipment. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature are exempt from this requirement. Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a minimum of 15% spare I/O point capacity for each point type found at each location. If input points are not universal, 15% of each type is required. If outputs are not universal, 15% of each type is 23 09 00 - 16 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC 3.12 3.13 3.14 09603 required. A minimum of one spare is required for each type of point used. Future use of spare capacity shall require providing only the field device, field wiring, point database definition, and custom software. No additional Controller boards or point modules shall be required to implement use of these spare points. PROGRAMMING Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of 25% of available memory free for future use. Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the use of a written point index. Software Programming: Provide programming for the system as per specifications and adhere to the strategy algorithms provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation of the system but not specified in this document shall also be provided by the Control System Contractor. Imbed into the control program sufficient comment statements to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of operations. Operators' Interface: 1. The controls contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up, and trouble-shoot all operator interface software and their functions as described in this section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface data base, and any third party software installation and integration required for successful operation of the operator interface. 2. As part of this execution phase, the controls contractor shall perform a complete test of the operator interface. Test duration shall be a minimum of 16 hours on-site. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner or Owner's representative. Demonstration: A complete demonstration and readout of the capabilities of the monitoring and control system shall be performed. The contractor shall dedicate a minimum of 16 hours on-site with the Owner and his representatives for a complete functional demonstration of all the system requirements. This demonstration constitutes a joint acceptance inspection, and permits acceptance of the delivered system for on-line operation. CLEANING This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction Manager or General Contractor. At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment, etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris, etc. At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. PROTECTION The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused. 23 09 00 - 17 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC B. The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, 3.15 3.16 3.17 09603 tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship. All piping and or wiring runs shall be properly supported. Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work. TRAINING The controls subcontractor shall provide complete instructions for proper control of the system under all modes of operation. These modes shall include but not be limited to summer/winter, occupied/unoccupied, energy management, and alarm event sequences. The instructions shall be conducted during normal working hours, Monday through Friday at the job site, during the contract period. These instructions shall consist of both classroom and hands-on training. Provide a minimum of 5 hours of training. Train the Owner's designated staff to enable them to proficiently operate the system; create, modify and delete programming; add, remove and modify physical points for the system; and add additional panels when required. Additionally, training shall address the following operator functions: 1. Sensor/Actuator Operation. 2. Operator level interface to system for alarm handling, point addressing, manual commands, and statistical data acquisition. 3. Program level operation for command control and definition of energy management parameters. 4. Configuration level for all database entry and modification. Provide training outline and materials as per Part 1 of this Section. The instructor(s) shall provide one copy of training material per student. The instructor(s) shall be factory-trained instructors experienced in presenting this material. Classroom training shall be done using the completed control system, the completed and approved O&M Manual, and supplemental training materials as needed. In addition to the warranty, the controls and instrumentation subcontractor shall provide, when requested and without charge, up to 20 hours of troubleshooting and consultation to the Owner’s Representative using remote communication and exchange of disks. This effort shall be available between one to five years after building completion. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O&M) At final acceptance and system turnover delivery to the mechanical subcontractor for delivery to the Owner, the required number of bound copies of the O&M, describing the operations, maintenance, and servicing requirements of the overall systems and all equipment provided. 23 09 00 - 18 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC B. 3.18 Provide the following information in separate Section, each with tab index: 7 a OaAaPRw is Material List. Technical literature for all equipment including catalog sheets, calibration, adjustments and operation instructions, and installation instructions (the operators’ instruction portion may be separately bound). List of spare parts recommended for purchase by the Owner. System description and complete sequence of operation. Full size (11" x 17") copies of shop Drawings to "as-built" condition. Input/output (I/O) summary forms for the system listing all connected analog and binary input and output functions and the number types of all points. Control programs specific to this system. SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE Schedule inspection and demonstration for the Owner’s Representative upon completion of requirements in Section 23 00 00, PROJECT CLOSEOUT. Demonstrate complete operating system to owner's representative. The system installation shall be complete in all respects, and tested for proper operation prior to acceptance testing for the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall provide completion documentation. 1. oO A letter shall be sent to the Owner’s Representative requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are installed, and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. When the system has been deemed satisfactory in whole or in part by the Owner’s Representative, the system will be accepted for beneficial use, which will start the warranty period for the accepted portion. Point-to-point checkout forms shall indicate the point name, wiring ID, terminal number, connectivity with the control unit in which it terminates, and basic response to- or generation of signal. Each point shall be initialed and dated by the contractor. Record drawings. Acceptance procedure for testing the system's sequences, functionality and accuracy. Procedure shall be detailed by the contractor to suit the project. END OF SECTION 23 09 00 09603 23 09 00 - 19 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 93 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SEQUENCE OF OPERATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 1.5 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, “General Mechanical Work”. SECTION INCLUDES Requirements for Control Sequences. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 00 00, "General Mechanical Work". Submit diagrams indicating mechanical system controlled and control system components. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Include written description of control sequence. Include flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control logic. Include draft copies of graphic displays (Graphical User Interfaces) indicating mechanical system components, control system components, and controlled function status and value. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Submit documents under provisions of Section 01 70 00. Accurately record actual setpoints and settings of controls, including changes to sequences made after submission of shop drawings. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This Section defines the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified. Equipment, devices, and system components required for control systems are specified in other Sections. The Graphical User Interface (G.U.I.) is the software on the Operators Workstation with which the operator can monitor and control the system. The G.U.I. must follow the specifications outlined in Section 23 09 00 and should include the Dynamic Data and Animated Graphics for each piece of equipment as indicated on the drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 09603 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS The Sequence of Operations for equipment controls shall follow the sequences as indicated on 23 09 93 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 93 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT SEQUENCE OF OPERATION DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR HVAC CONTROLS the drawings. 3.2 OPERATING MATRIX A. All inter-relating equipment shall be controlled in accordance with the modes of operations shown in the operating matrices as indicated on the drawings. 3.3 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE A. The animated graphics should reflect the mode of operations of the system, and the system controls shall respond to the dynamic data displays. END OF SECTION 23 09 93 09603 23 09 93 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 21 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HYDRONIC PIPING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, “General Mechanical Work”. Follow all provisions of Section 23 05 00, “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods’. Conform to the standards contained within ASME B31.9-2004, “Building Services Piping”. WORK INCLUDED Work under this section shall include furnishing and installing piping, fittings, and connections common to the various piping systems specified in Division 23. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 00 00, "General Mechanical Work". Submit product information for each type of pipe and fitting. Include construction material description, and pressure and temperature classification. Provide pipe connection details, dimensions, and required clearances; and installation instructions for items not covered by ASME B31.9-2004, “Building Services Piping”. Submit welder’s qualifications. Submit engineer’s design shop drawings and calculations for engineered seismic restraint system, if applicable. Submit shop drawings for all piping over 2” in size. QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualify welding processes, procedures, and operators for piping according to ASME B31.9- 2004, “Building Services Piping”. Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25 to permanently identify the manufacturer. STORAGE AND PROTECTION Cover stored piping and fittings, materials to protect from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. a. Store pipes and tubes with protective end caps to maintain pipe end condition and to prevent entry of foreign material. 2. Retain protective plugs and caps on other materials when provided by manufacturers. Protect all pipe and fittings from paint or grease, except for specified final finishes. 23 2113-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 21 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HYDRONIC PIPING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.6 A. DEFINITIONS Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 09603 PIPING SYSTEMS Hydronic Piping, Subject Only To Interior And Above Ground Environments: 1. Pipe: Black steel, Schedule 40, ANSI/ASTM A53, Type E, Grade B. Weld all joints in black steel piping 2 1/2" and larger. Welding of piping 2” and smaller is optional. a. Fittings, 2-inch and smaller: Screwed malleable iron, 150 Ib. wsp, ANSI/ASME 16.3. b. Fittings, 2-1/2 inch and Larger: Wrought steel butt-welding fittings with 150 Ib. forged steel flanges, ASTM A234 and ANSI/ASTM B16.5. 2. Optional Hydronic Piping (4” and smaller): a. Pipe: 4” and smaller, copper, Type ‘L’, Hard drawn, ASTM B88. b. Fittings: Wrought copper or bronze, solder joint, ANSI/ ASME B16.22. 1) Threaded adapters for connections to threaded components shall be made of copper alloy material. Hydronic Piping Subject to Exterior or Below Ground Environments: a Arctic Pipe: Schedule 40 steel carrier pipe with factory-applied 3” injected polyurethane foam insulation and waterproof outer containment pipe. 2. Fittings: Wrought steel butt-welding fittings with field-applied 3” injected polyurethane foam insulation and waterproof outer containment cover. a. Waterproof cover joints: 3” field applied polyurethane foam insulation with field applied wrap or heat-shrink sleeve forming a waterproof joint of the outer containment pipe. 3. Electric Freeze Protection Heat Tracing, on fire water/domestic water arctic pipe only. See mechanical details, electrical drawings, and fire protection specifications. PIPE JOINING Dielectric fittings: a Dielectric waterway nipples. Schedule 40 steel nipple with insulating liner. 2. Dielectric flange kit: Insulating washers, bolt sleeves, and gasket for use on standard flange connections. Unions and flanges: a Copper Tube: Joint type to match piping system, thread or solder. a. Ground Joint unions. b. Companion Flanges. ya Steel Pipe: a. 2" and smaller, threaded unions, malleable iron, 250 Ib. ground joint. b. 2-1/2" and larger, flanged unions, 150 Ib. forged steel. Nipples: Threaded pipe nipples: Full cut threads; short nipple with minimum of 1” section of uncut pipe between threaded ends. Joining Materials: 1. General: a. Compatibility: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system contents. 2. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, non-metallic, flat, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, except where thickness or specific material is indicated otherwise. 23 2113-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 21 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HYDRONIC PIPING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Po 6. 7 1) Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast bronze flanges. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B32: 95/5 Tin/Antimony (Lead Free). Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8: a. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorous alloys. b. BAg1: Silver alloy. Welding Filler Materials: Comply with ASME B31.9-2004, “Building Services Piping” for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. The use of pulled mechanically formed tee branches is not an acceptable fitting method. The use of pressed fittings is not an acceptable fitting/joining method for heat mains. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. c. 09603 INSTALLATION OF PIPING Keep openings in piping and ends of pipe closed during installation. Piping Connections: 1. 2. 3. 4. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Change size in piping with reducing couplings. Do NOT use bushings. Short Pipe Connections: For short pipe connections, use short nipples or longer. Do NOT use close nipples. Dissimilar piping materials: Use dielectric nipples or dielectric flange kits when connecting copper to ferrous materials and piping systems. Do NOT use dielectric unions. Piping Joint Construction: Construct joints according to ASME B31.9-2004, “Building Services Piping”. Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping system sections. i Preparation, all piping systems: a. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. b. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Soldering Manual" Chapter 22 "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube". a. Polish contact surfaces of fittings and pipes with emery cloth, sandpaper or steel brush, and wipe clean before fluxing male and female surfaces of joints. 1) Steel wool NOT permitted for polishing. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. a. Cut threads clean and true using sharp dies. Full cut threads and make up joints with no more than three threads exposed. b. Screw joints shall be made tight by using pipe dope or Teflon tape on male threads. Do NOT use Teflon tape in compressed air systems. c. Do NOT caulk, solder, top-dress, peen, weld, salt, use leak-stop additives, or make any other manipulation to threaded joints to stop leaks. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to ASME B31.9-2004, “Building Services Piping” using qualified processes and welding operator. a. Welds shall exhibit uniform ripple with full penetration and no undercut. b. Chip and wire-brush to clean slag and spatter from weldment. Cc. Do NOT grind weldments except to remove defective work and re-weld. 23 2113-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 21 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HYDRONIC PIPING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.2 A. 3.3 09603 HYDRONIC PIPING INSTALLATION Hydronic piping: Piping shall be properly graded to secure easy circulation and prevent noise and water hammer. Water piping shall pitch upward in direction of flow 1" in 60'. Proper provision shall be made for expansion and contraction in all portions of piping, to prevent undue strains on piping or on fixtures or apparatus connected therewith. 1. Low Point Drains: Valved 3/4" hose thread drain fitting with threaded cap shall be installed at the lowest point in the return main near the boilers, at locations indicated on the drawings, and at all system low points to facilitate system draining. 2. Air Vents: Install Air vents with copper drain tubing at the high points of all hydronic piping systems and at locations shown, where specified, and where required for the proper functioning of the system. Tubing shall be run from the vent to the nearest drain funnel. The inlet to all automatic air vents shall be through a manual valve. 3. Piping Alterations and repairs: If, after mechanical systems are in operation and there are coils that do not circulate quickly and noiselessly (due to conditions such as trapped or airbound connections), Contractor shall make proper alterations and repairs to correct all such defective connections. Contractor shall repair or replace piping immediately if leak appears in any piping system. Cut pipe accurately to measurement established on building and work into place without springing or forcing. Temporary Piping: Provide all temporary pipe, valves, fittings, etc., if required for installation, balancing, cleaning, testing, or inspection, or to maintain temporary services. Remove when no longer required. Installation of Valves: 1. Valves: Install at locations shown, where specified, and where required for the proper functioning of the system. Valves shall be installed with their stems horizontal or above. Piping installation at HVAC terminal units: Piping, with exception of the final equipment connections, shall not be run within 2 feet of terminal unit sides. No piping shall be run below HVAC terminal units or other serviceable equipment which would hinder clear access. CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS General: Each system shall be thoroughly cleaned after installation (for the purpose of removing foreign matter from coils, controls, and piping). 1. Notify Owner's Representative 7 days prior to pipe cleaning to allow witness of this work. 2. Retain certificates of mechanical cleaning, with signature from the witness authorized by the Owner's representative. Chemical Cleaning: Apply a chemical cleaning operation to the interior of the hot water heating systems. This shall be done under the supervision of a qualified water treatment specialist. 1. Cleaning: After all hydrostatic tests have been made and prior to operating tests, the boilers and piping shall be thoroughly cleaned by filling the system with a solution of 1 pound of caustic soda or 3 pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Install start-up filters at all strainer screens. The water shall be heated to at least 150°F, and the solution circulated in the system for a period of 24 hours, then drained, and the system thoroughly flushed out with fresh water. 2. Remove start-up filters, open isolation valves, and proceed with mechanical flushing. Mechanical flushing: Apply a mechanical flushing operation to the interior of hot water heating systems. Provisions for Flushing: 1. Provide temporary valving or piping at connections to equipment and elsewhere as required to confine flushing to the desired piping. 23 2113-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 21 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HYDRONIC PIPING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.4 a. All coil control valves are to be kept closed during cleaning operation. Any control valves or other system components which do not function properly because of imperfect cleaning of any piping system shall be replaced. 2. Flushing operations shall attain fluid velocity of 10 feet per second or greater in all branches. Maintain flushing velocity for minimum of 24 hours, or as long as required to thoroughly clean the apparatus, whichever is longer. a. The main piping immediately adjacent to the HVAC pumps does not require 10 FPS velocity. The unthrottled output of the pumps will be sufficient. 3 Permanently wire cattle magnets approximately 3" long x 1/2" diameter into main line strainer baskets to pick up metallic fines. 4. Remove, inspect, clean, and replace all strainer baskets and screens as a final step in the cleaning of the system. Fill system with hydronic solution and arrange for chemical treatment per contract requirements. TESTING OF HYDRONIC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Provisions for Testing: Provide temporary valving or cap piping at connections to equipment as required to confine testing to the affected piping systems. 1. Protect equipment from pressures that exceed their ratings. 2. Notify Owner’s Representative 7 days prior to pipe cleaning to allow witness of this work. 3. Retain certificates of each pressure test, with signature from the witness authorized by the Owner's representative. Hydronic Piping: Test at hydrostatic pressure at least 1% times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 100 psi; duration not less than two hours. Hydronic Equipment: Once all piping is hydrostatically tested, open all connections to equipment and test again at the pressure rating of the equipment. Duration shall be for 24 hours. END OF SECTION 23 21 13 09603 23 2113-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 21 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HYDRONIC PUMPS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. Bl RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. WORK INCLUDED Work under this section shall include furnishing and installing electric motor driven water circulating pumps, domestic water pressure booster packages, and accessories. SUBMITTALS Submit product information on all pumps, including pump curves and motor data. QUALITY ASSURANCE Pumps shall perform flow and efficiency as specified, or better. Pump curves shall be similar to specified pumps, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, including, but not limited to, the specified conditions. 1. Motor: Each pump shall be driven by a VFD compatible motor. Pump brake horsepower at design speed shall, under no operating condition, exceed the nominal motor horsepower. Motors shall comply with the requirements of Section 23 05 13, "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment". 2. Capacity: Each pump shall be guaranteed to circulate not less than the specified quantity of water against the specified circulating head when operating continuously without overheating the motor or bearings, etc. and without producing noise, audible anywhere in the building, outside of the space in which the pumps are installed. Quiet operation is mandatory. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. B. Cc. 09603 MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturers - Provide products from the following manufacturers: 1. Pumps: a. Base Mounted End Suction Pumps: Bell & Gossett 1510 series, or Grundfos equal. b. In-line Circulator Pumps: Bell & Gossett PL Series, or Grundfos equal WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS (BASE MOUNTED, END SUCTION) Construction: Pumps shall be bronze fitted construction and trim. Pumps shall be balanced, single volute design. Suction and discharge connections shall be flanged, suitable for 400 pounds or cold-water nonshock. Casing shall have bronze replaceable wear ring. Motor shaft shall be one-piece stainless steel, or steel with bronze shaft sleeve. Pump shall have mechanical shaft seal of the Ni-Resist type, vented to suction connection. The motor pump coupler shall be a flexible type drop out, coupler. Pump casings shall be designed for 175-psi working pressure and shall be tested at 1-1/2 times this pressure and proven tight. Pump base: Heavy duty steel frame of structural steel and cross memebers. 23 2123-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 21 23 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HYDRONIC PUMPS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA D. E. F. 2.3 A. Cc. D. Gauge Openings: Provide tapped-gauge openings at suction and discharge nozzle of each pump. Suction Diffuser: Provide a suction diffuser with strainer and flanged connections on the intake of each pump. Pump shall be compatible with propylene glycol, temperatures of 225°F, and max. operating pressure of 150 psig. CIRCULATING PUMPS (IN-LINE TYPE) Construction: Single-stage, cast-iron, stainless steel or all bronze construction. Pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. Impeller; enclosed- type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced. Seal: Mechanical-type seal, with carbon seal ring and ceramic seat. A shaft sleeve shall be furnished under the complete wetted area of the mechanical seal. Bearings: The bearing frame assembly of the pump shall be fitted with permanently lubricated, steel ball bearings and a stain steel shaft. The motor shall be resilient mounted, and of the split capacitor type. Gauge Openings: Provide tapped-gauge openings at suction and discharge nozzle of each pump. Pump shall be compatible with propylene glycol, temperatures of 225°F, and max. operating pressure of 150 psig. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 3.2 A. EQUIPMENT HANDLING Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting pumps. Properly store and protect pumps from physical damage. Leave factory shipping covers on suction and discharge in place until installation. INSTALLATION OF PUMPS In-Line Pumps: Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and use pipe hangers or other supports at proper intervals to provide complete piping support near the pump. Both suction and discharge piping shall be independently supported and properly aligned so that no strain is transmitted to the pump when flange bolts are tightened. END OF SECTION 23 21 23 09603 23 2123-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 31 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL DUCTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, “General Mechanical Work”, and Section 23 05 00, “Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods”. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this section shall include furnishing all materials and labor for installation of the air ducts, including specialties and associated components, all connected and ready for use. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal Ducts. 2. Listed Class | Ducts. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 00 00, "General Mechanical Work". B. Submit product information for ducts and duct fittings, specialties, and components. Include construction material description, pressure and temperature classification, duct connection details, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Cc. Submit shop drawings for duct joint and duct fabrication details, for each type and pressure class duct. D. Submit engineer's design shop drawings and calculations for engineered seismic restraint system, if applicable. E. Submit shop drawings for all ductwork over 12” in diameter or equivalent rectangular size. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ducts: Install in accordance with the details and notes indicated and the recommendations and printed instructions of the manufacturer for each item. B. Construct ductwork in conformance to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 2005 (HVAC/DCS). Cc. Installation of all ducts shall conform to all local codes and ordinances. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Listed Class 1 Ducts: a. Metal-Fab Model IPIC-4G No-Chase grease duct system t. b. 3M Firemaster S Duct Wrap System. Cc. or other meeting requirements if approved 10 days prior to bid. 09603 23 3113-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 31 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL DUCTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.2 2.3 2.4 09603 2. Flange and Gasketed Joint Systems: a Duct Mate. b Lockformer/TDC. c. Engle/TDF. d. SMACNA T24 formed joint. e. SMACNA T22 companion angle joint. Gasketing: a. 3M Weather-ban No. 1202. b. Hardcast Flange-Gasket 1902. 4. Joint Sealants and adhesives: a. Interior, brush-on: 1) Duro-Dyne SZ. 2) Ductmate No. 795. 3) Hardcast Sealing System, 602, 321 or 102. 4) United Sheet Metal Company, Inc. 5) Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 6) Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Co. No. 800. 7) Goodloe Moore No. 12 "Tuff-Bond,”. b. Exterior, brush-on: 1) Hardcast Exterior Sealing System, 321 or 102. c. Rolled Sealant: 1) Exterior: Hardcast Type 1403-181. 2) Interior: Hardcast, Type AP 1602. 5. Zinc Paint Compound: a. Zinc-It, by CRC. b. Galvax, by Alvin Products. c. Z.R.C., by ZRC Worldwide. d Cold Galvanizing Compound, by Rust-Oleum Industrial Brands. SHEET METAL MATERIALS General: Sheetmetal materials specified hereinafter shall conform to the following material requirements. 1, Galvanized Steel Sheets: G90 grade of galvanized sheet produced to ASTM A653. It has 0.90 oz/sq. ft. of zinc overall or 0.45 oz/sq. ft. per side. 2. Galvanized Steel Hot-Dipped After Fabrication: Comply with requirements of ASTM A123. Aluminum Alloy Sheets: Comply with requirements of Military Standard MIL-A-52174. Copper Sheets: ASTM B152, light cold-rolled temper. Stainless Steel Sheets: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, conforming to ASTM A167. Stainless Steel Sheets: Type 316L stainless steel, not to exceed 0.03% carbon, conforming to ASTM A167. DaAPw FLANGE & GASKETED JOINT SYSTEMS (TRANSVERSE JOINTS) Manufactured system or shop-formed per SMACNA HVAC/DCS as listed herein. JOINT SEALANTS AND ADHESIVES Interior: Water based, fire-retardant, high bonding flexible surface sealer with Class | flame spread rating. SMANCA pressure class to 10”; Seal class A. Exterior: Water based, fiber reinforced, UV inhibited, high bonding type sealer with Class | flame spread rating. SMANCA pressure class to 10”; Seal class A. Rolled sealant: A: General: Pressure sensitive modified butyl sealant; 30-year adhesion characteristics; 23 3113-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 31 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL DUCTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA permanently flexible. SMANCA pressure class to 6”; Seal class A. Adhesive-backed “duct tape” or metallic furnace tape will NOT be acceptable. 2. Interior: Plenum rated; paintable white polyester-backed; 25 mils thick; 500% elongation. 3. Exterior: Aluminum backed; 17 mils thick; UV resistant. 2.5 ZINC PAINT COMPOUND A. Single-component, zinc-rich epoxy in spray or brush application, with the following characteristics: A Contains minimum 90% pure zinc in the dry film. 2. Excellent adhesion to clean iron, steel, or aluminum. 2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK A. General: Provide all rectangular ductwork for pressure class defined per SMACNA HVAC/DCS, including transition pieces from rectangular to round. Ducts shall not pulsate, “oil-can’, or vibrate when in operation. B. Construction: Metal gauges, duct construction, and reinforcements shall conform to the SMACNA HVAC/DCS and NFPA 90A. Ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized steel unless indicated otherwise, or if listed Class 1 ducts are of other material. Cc. Seams: Comply with SMACNA HVAC/DCS . Snaplock-type seams made on lockformer tools will be acceptable where Pittsburgh seams are called for. Do not use standing seams for longitudinal seams on ducts other than plenums. D. Transverse Joints: aH S-&-Drive. ial Seal with brush-on or rolled sealant. 3. Flanged mechanical joint, caulked or gasketed, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction and installation manuals. E. Cross-Breaking: Provide on all panels wider than 18". i! At Contractor's option, in place of cross-breaking required for stiffening on panels wider than 18", all such panels may have machine-formed transverse ribbed stiffening on 12" centers, provided such stiffening accomplishes stiffness and freedom from buckling or oil- canning, and does not lessen airtightness at seams and joints. F. Elbow Radius: Elbows on supply ducts; inside radius equal to maximum width of elbow. Elbows on exhaust ducts; inside radius 1/2 the duct width; 6" minimum. G. Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes at square corner elbows where air velocities are over 1000 feet per minute, and in locations indicated. 09603 23 31 13-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 31 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL DUCTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA H. 2.7 2.8 2.9 09603 Plenums and Large Duct Construction: Except where acoustical-type fan plenums are specified, and whenever maximum dimension of a duct exceeds 84", sheet metal for duct shall be 18-gauge, and steel angle framing shall be provided on 18" centers to support the sheetmetal work. Sheetmetal seams shall be lapped 2” or may be flange and gasketed type, and shall be screwed to the framing on 4" centers for lapped seams and 12" centers for standing seams, and shall be airtight. Horizontal surfaces shall have supplementary bracing to prevent any deformation of the panels under operating conditions. Hardened steel screws, No. 8 minimum size, shall be used for attachment of sheet metal to the backup angles. ROUND DUCT All ducts: Construction shall conform to SMACNA HVAC/DCS. Snap-Lock Seam. Spiral Seam Ducts. Ducts with spiral seams may be used for round and flat oval ducts. Ends of ducts up to 48" diameter shall be coupled with slip insert fittings sealed as specified for slip joints; flange and gasketed joints for any size. PON> BRACING Provide on the exterior of all ducts, to withstand required pressures and as required to prevent vibration, oil-canning, drumming, or similar deleterious effects. Sizes and spacing as recommended in SMACNA, HVAC/DCS. i. Obtain prior approval for interior bracing; ducts with air velocities under 1500 feet per minute only. Bracing for Flat Oval Ducts: Flat oval ducts shall be reinforced based on flat span dimension and required pressure class. Bracing shall be as recommended by SMACNA, HVAC/DCS. Bracing for Rectangular Ducts: Bracing shall be provided on the outside of flat surfaces at pressure up to 8" w.c. On ducts wider than 20", bracing shall be spaced at not more than 2' on centers and shall be continuous angles around all four sides and secured by screwing or tack welding on not more than 6" centers. FIELD JOINTS General: Sizes and spacing as recommended in SMACNA, HVAC/DCS. 1. Slip-Type Male Coupling: Non-serrated type; male insert of distance 1/3 the duct diameter, but 3" maximum; all joints sealed and screwed. a. Minimum two screws per joint up to 6" diameter, three minimum for ducts to 12"; 8" on centers around periphery for larger ducts. b. Sealing shall include adhesive in all joints. Brush-on or roll sealant over screws. 2. S-&-Drive: Drive to extend entire length of joint and bend over to lock in place. a. Brush-on or roll sealant after drive installation. 3. Pittsburg, Snap-lock, and other: a. Brush-on or roll sealant after joint assembly. 4. Welded: Air and water tight, with smooth ripple and no undercut. Brush to remove slag and clean for painting. Do not grind except to remove defective welds for repair. 5. Flang e and Gasketed: All joints bolted or screwed together with gasket. a. General: Design, gauge, and attachment per manufacturer and SMACNA HVAC/DCS. b. Gasketing: Tape-type, between the flanged joints; and bolts shall be on full periphery of ducts. cl SMACNA T-22: Flanges made of steel angles rolled to match outside surface of ends of ducts; gauge and attachment per SMACNA HVAC/DCS. 23 3113-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 31 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL DUCTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.10 A. ZINC TOUCH UP PAINT Use for corrosion protection on galvanized materials in the following applications: At All weld-affected areas. 2. All ground areas where original galvanizing is affected or removed. 3: All unsealed cut or sheared edges exposed to moisture or corrosive environment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. Cc. D. E. . 09603 INSTALLATION—DUCTS General: Provide complete installation. Conform to NFPA 90A, SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. Where requirements differ, install to the more stringent requirements. Ductwork shall be installed so that its operation is free of chatter and vibration throughout the fan operating range. 1c Provide mounting and supporting of ducts, equipment, accessories and appurtenances 2: Provide duct accessories. Refer to Section 23 33 00, “Air Duct Accessories”. Access doors at all service access points: fe Provide at each damper, each filter, and above and below every coil. 2. Provide additional access doors wherever necessary for duct cleaning and maintenance. Duct lining: Duct sizes indicated on the drawings refer to inside clear dimensions. Increase the sheet metal ducts to accommodate duct lining. Installation of Ductwork: a Routing of Ductwork: a. Maintain all access routes for service and maintenance of equipment and points which require access. b. Retain clear space at least 8” above all removable ceiling systems. c. Avoid contact with all support and framing for the ceiling suspension system. d. Give right-of-way to piping installed with slope requirements. 2. Field Coordination and Changes to Ductwork: Changes in duct sizes not indicated in the drawings such as those required to suit the size of factory-fabricated equipment actually furnished or as required to avoid obstructions shall be designed without sudden expansion and contraction. Transitions with included angle of not greater than 60° shall be used in field changes. Offsets in Ductwork: NOT ALL OFFSETS ARE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. Provide all offsets required without additional cost to the Owner. Offset angles to be not greater than 30°. 5. Duct Sizes: Sizes shown refer to clear dimensions inside acoustical lining. 6. Joint Sealing: Ductwork shall be airtight to meet leakage requirements. 7 Seal all ducts to meet requirements of SMACNA Standard Duct Sealing Requirements. eo Duct Connections: a Dielectric isolation: Provide at dissimilar metals for the purpose of minimizing galvanic corrosion. 2: Diffusers, Branch Connections to: The duct connecting to the diffuser shall be the same size as diffuser neck, tightly fitted to the diffuser neck. 3. Terminal Units, Branch Connections to: Size of individual branch duct connections to terminals shall be the same size as inlet of the units, except no branch duct shall be smaller than 6" diameter, unless otherwise indicated. Duct connection at the unit inlet shall be straight, without offsets for a minimum length of five duct diameters. 4. Coil Installation in Ducts: Provide sheetmetal closures all around the coils, within the ducts; seal coil frame edges with fire-retardant waterproof mastic to prevent bypass. Flexible connections shall be provided between all fans and connecting ductwork, except 23 3113-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 31 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL DUCTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.2 3.3 09603 internally isolated fans may have hard connection between ductwork and casing. Flashings: Where ducts pass through exterior building walls and roofs, flashings shall be provided and shall be made waterproof. Unless otherwise indicated, flashing shall conform to Division 07. DUCT APPLICATION Duct — Pressure Class: Provide duct metal gauge, joint and seam construction, and bracing according to the following: 1. Air Handling Units 5000 CFM and above with Terminal Units: 2. Positive Pressure Ducts: a. Supply Plenum: 2” WC. b. Supply air mains between plenums and terminal units: 2” WC. CG: Supply air branches downstream of terminal units: 1” WC. d. Relief air ducts 2” WC. 3. Negative Pressure Ducts: a. Return air Plenum: 2” WC. b. Return air mains: 2” WC. Cc. Return air branches: 2” WC. 4. Packaged AC and Air Handling Units under 5000 CFM with Terminal Units: a. Positive Pressure Ducts: 1) Supply Plenum: 2” WC. 2) Supply air mains between plenums and terminal units: 2” WC. 3) Supply air branches downstream of terminal units: 1” WC. 4) Relief air ducts 2” WC. b. Negative Pressure Ducts: 1) Return air Plenum: 2” WC. 2) Return air mains: 2” WC. 3) Return air branches: 2” WC. 5. Packaged AC and Air Handling Units without Terminal Units and CRAC Units: a. Positive Pressure Ducts: 1) Supply Plenum: 2” WC. 2) Supply air branches: 2” WC. 3) Relief air ducts 2” WC. b. Negative Pressure Ducts: 1) Return air Plenum: 2” WC. 2) Return air mains: 2” WC. 3) Return air branches: 2” WC. 6. Fans, Supply and Exhaust, without Terminal Units — Not less than the values listed below; round up to the nearest tabulated value in SMACNA, HVAC/DCS: a. Positive Pressure Ducts: 1) Supply Plenum: 200% of the scheduled fan operating pressure. 2) Supply and relief air ducts: 150% of the scheduled fan operating pressure. b. Negative Pressure Ducts: 1) Return air Plenum: 200% of the scheduled fan operating pressure. 2) Return air ducts: 200% of the scheduled fan operating pressure. Ducts Exposed to Weather: Flash over a curb where each passes through the roof. Ducts above the roof shall have watertight seams. All exposed joints, seams, and screws shall be soldered over, or at Contractor's option, all joints, seams, and screws shall be given two coats of exterior duct sealing system. Width of second coat shall overlap the first coat by 2 inches. Cross-break or form the top surface of all ducts above roof to provide adequate drainage. DUCT CLEANING If the interior surface of any new work including ductwork, plenums or casings is dirty at the 23 3113-6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 31 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT METAL DUCTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA completion of the work, it shall be cleaned when so directed by the Owner’s Representative, without additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 23 31 13 09603 23 3113-7 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 33 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DUCT ACCESSORIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. fa A. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. B. Cc. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, “General Mechanical Work”, and 23 05 00, “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods’. WORK INCLUDED Work under this section shall include furnishing all materials and labor for installation of duct accessories, including specialties and associated components, all connected and ready for use. This Section includes the following: Access Panels. Turning Vanes. Flexible Duct Connections. Dampers. Duct Liner. OARWN> SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 00 00, "General Mechanical Work". Submit product information for all duct accessories. Include construction material description, pressure and temperature classification, duct connection details, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. QUALITY ASSURANCE Duct Accessories: Install in accordance with the details and notes indicated and the recommendations and printed instructions of the manufacturer for each item. Protection: All equipment shall be covered and stored to prevent damage or weathering prior to installation, according to the provisions in 23 05 00, “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”. Construct duct accessories in conformance to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 2005 (HVAC/DCS). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 09603 MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Access Panels And Doors: a. Duro-Dyne. b. Nailor, Inc. c. Ruskin. d. Ventfabrics, Inc. 23 33 00 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 33 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DUCT ACCESSORIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 09603 2. Flexible Connectors: a. Duro-Dyne. b. Ventfabrics. 3. Dampers and Quadrants: a. American Warming & Ventilating. b Air Balance, Inc. c. Duro-Dyne. d. Penn Ventilator. e. Ruskin. f. Tamco. g Vent Products, Inc. h. Young Regulator. Acoustical Lining: a. Owens/Corning Fiberglas "Aeroflex." b. CertainTeed "Ultra-Lite." Cc. Manville "Linacoustic," or “Permacote Linacoustic.” d. Knauf "Liner M". Duct Lining adhesives and sealers: a. Manville "Permacote" fire retardant sealer or equal. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Access panels and doors, turning vanes, duct volume dampers, flexible connectors, and test holes shall conform to SMACNA HVAC/DCS Standards. ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS Access Doors and Plates in Ducts: Provide for access to equipment as specified in Part 3 of this section. 1. Size 12” x 12” and under. Door plates shall be the removable hand-hole type with wing- nuts attaching bolts welded to gasketed backing plate. Minimum plate shall be 12” x 12” or the maximum size which will fit the duct. 2. Size over 12” x 12” Doors shall be continuously hinged and have latches not requiring tools to operate. Entire assembly shall be rigid and of sufficient strength to withstand door load in at duct pressure class. a. Construct access doors to SMACNA HVAC/DCS construction specifications. TURNING VANES Provide turning vanes at all square corner elbows, double-thickness type, fitting a vane rail on each cheek of the elbow. 1. Use single-thickness vanes where specifically indicated. Provide acoustical turning vanes at all square corner elbows where upstream duct is sound lined. Provide double thickness type, perforated, and filled with minimum 1.25 Ib/cubic foot fiberglass. Secure to elbow with vane rail on each cheek of elbow. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS General: Provide flexible connectors to separate vibrating equipment from stationary ductwork such as at fans and ducts or at fans and plenums; where ducts are of dissimilar metals, and elsewhere as indicated. Flexible Material: Connectors shall be made of neoprene-coated glass fabric weighing approximately 30 oz. per square yard. Materials shall be UL labeled, Class 1. Flexible 23 33 00 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 33 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DUCT ACCESSORIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.6 09603 connections shall be securely fastened by zinc-coated iron cinch-type draw bonds for round ducts. For rectangular ducts, the flexible connections locked to metal collars shall be installed using normal duct construction standards and according to SMACNA HVAC/DCS. DAMPERS General: 1. Dampers shall fit with close tolerance into ductwork. Dampers shall be free from any characteristics, including rough edges, excessive flexibility in material, or loose fit, which produce excessive turbulence or rattle, or which would prevent obtaining the acoustic performance in the rooms served. 2. Leakage ratings: Blade seals shall be screwed or crimped in place. Air leakage through the damper in the closed position, rated by the leakage (CFM) per square foot (SF) of damper area at a differential of 1” W.C. over a standard size (48” x 48” damper). a. Class 3: Maximum 40 CFM/SF. b. Class 2: Maximum 10 CFM/SF. c. Class 1 (Low Leakage): Maximum 4 CFM/SF. d. Class 1A (Ultra-low leakage): Maximum 3 CFM/SF. 3. Pressure Drop Ratings: Damper pressure drop and leakage ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500. Backdraft Dampers: 1. General: Provide backdraft dampers at all fans exhausting to atmosphere that are not specified to have automatic dampers. 2: Type: Backdraft dampers shall be galvanized steel or aluminum multi-blade type. Blades shall have felt or neoprene blade gaskets screwed or crimped in place. Each blade shall be rigidly attached to a pivot rod. The rod shall extend into oil-impregnated bronze bushings, or antifriction bearings, located in the frames. Blades shall be joined together with connection bars. a. Balancing mechanism: Adjustable counterweight or spring tension secured to damper connection bars or pivot rod. Motorized Control Dampers: 1 Dampers shall be galvanized steel or aluminum multi-blade type, parallel or opposed blade action as scheduled. The blade edges shall contact spring steel edge seals embedded in the damper frame. Each blade shall be rigidly attached to a pivot rod. The pivot rod shall extend into oil-impregnated bronze bushings or antifriction bearings located in the frames. Blades shall be joined together and connect to a common jackshaft. a. Low pressure drop: Blades with an airfoil cross-section shall present an aerodynamic shape to the airstream in the open position. b. Insulated-blade type: Blades shall be filled with insulation and present a thermal break when in the closed position. c. IAQ-blade type: Static pressure and total pressure sensing chambers integral to blades, allow connection to a transducer for measurement of airflow in the range of 150 feet per minute (FPM) to 2000 FPM. 2. Damper Actuators are specified in Section 23 09 00, “Instrumentation and Control For HVAC” Volume Dampers and Quadrants, Low Pressure Ducts: 1. General: Dampers and quadrants in ductwork shall quietly balance the duct systems to their required air quantities. 2. Acoustic Performance: Dampers shall be free from any characteristics, including rough edges or loose fit, which produce excessive turbulence or rattle, or which would prevent obtaining the acoustic performance in the rooms served. 23 33 00 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 33 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DUCT ACCESSORIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.7 2.8 09603 3. Edges of Blades: Both leading and leaving, hemmed; side edges flanged 1/2"; placed so air strikes the smooth face. 4. Damper Blades & Types: For ducts 12" high or less, 22 gauge single blade with locking hand quadrant; Ruskin MD-25 or equal. For ducts larger than 12” high, use a multiple blade damper assembly, blades linked together with locking hand quadrant; Ruskin MD- 35 or equal. 5. Quadrants, in General: Duro-Dyne manufacturer, catalog numbers as follows: a. Maximum Dimension of Blades 10" or Less: KS-145 series, dial regulator with locking nuts, round end spring-in bearing, and square end damper bearing. b. Maximum Dimension of Blades 11" to 20": KSR-195 series, dial regulator with locking nut, round end spring-in bearing, and square end bearing. c. Maximum Dimension of Blades over 20": KS-12 series with "Shaft-Loc" quadrant and 1/2" damper bearings. 6. Quadrants for Dampers in Ducts Concealed in Ceilings: Flush-mounted concealed type, Ventfabrics Catalog Type 666, or Young Regulator No. 301; finish of all exposed parts prime painted, not chromium plated. 7. Damper Positions: Contractor shall set and lock all dampers in the "Full Open" position prior to balancing work. See additional requirements specified in Section 23 05 93, "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." ACOUSTICAL LINING—RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK Provide where shown on the drawings or otherwise called for in these specifications. Acoustical Lining: 1" thickness unless otherwise shown; shall cover all four interior surfaces of duct. Liner shall be coated to prevent erosion of the material recommended for use in ducts with air velocities up to 4000'/minute and shall conform to UL 723 and resistant requirements of NFPA Pamphlet No. 90 and Uniform Mechanical Code Standard No. 10-1. The "R" value shall be 4.0 when test in accordance with ASTM C518 at 75°F mean temperature. Acoustical Properties: The material shall be tested by an independent testing laboratory to determine the sound absorption coefficient in accordance with ASTM C423 using TypeA mounting. The sound absorption coefficients shall meet or exceed the following values: Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Thickness 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 1" 13 45 A5 65 14 .90 a 25 13 94 95 95 95 ACOUSTICAL LINING OF PLENUMS General: Acoustical lining shall be applied to the interior surfaces of plenums. Lining shall be composed of heavy-density glass fiberboard. The surface exposed to the air flow shall be coated with an erosion-resistive, acrylic-faced coating recommended for use in plenums with air velocities up to 4000'/minute. Manville "Permacote Linacoustic." or equal Acoustical Properties: The material shall be tested by an independent testing laboratory to determine the sound absorption coefficient in accordance with ASTM C423-81 using Type A mounting. The sound absorption coefficients shall meet or exceed the following values: Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Thickness 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 a .22 .67 99 1.09 1.04 1.05 23 33 00 -4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 33 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT DUCT ACCESSORIES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 3.3 3.4 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS Provide access panels or doors for servicing and maintenance at each fire or smoke damper, control damper, combination smoke/fire damper, air balancing damper, wherever equipment is installed, at duct-mounted detectors, at upstream and downstream side of duct-mounted coils, and elsewhere as shown. Installation shall be tight fitting, hinged with latch, sized as required for access, in compliance with SMACNA. BALANCING DAMPERS Provide a damper in the duct to each supply and exhaust opening, except ducts at outlet of any terminal unit which serves a single diffuser; and elsewhere as shown. Location of Dampers: At a point where the duct is accessible. Wherever possible; axis of the blade the long dimension of the duct, as far from the outlet as possible. MOTORIZED DAMPERS At installation at building wall openings, provide a perimeter steel angle or channel support frame, bolted to the damper assembly frame and bolted to the building surface with compressible glass fiber to make a tight, rigid connection. Dampers in ductwork and in plenums shall be provided with sheetmetal closures all around the dampers frame, including mullions. Seal perimeter of damper frame closures with fire-retardant mastic for airtight closure. Construction and air-tightness must be suitable for duct pressure class used. Multiple damper sections shall be bolted together and reinforced at joints with steel angles or channel mullions. Shop drawings for all motorized damper installations shall be submitted for approval. ACOUSTICAL LINING Edge Treatment: Seal all edges of acoustical lining with two coats of approved fire-retardant sealer before securing to the duct. Also cover the leading edge of liner with a formed piece of galvanized metal nosing such that the liner is covered for a minimum of 1” in the direction of airflow. Method of Fastening: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Material shall be cemented to the duct using Fire Retardant Adhesive. Lining on vertical or upper horizontal surfaces shall be fastened in addition to cementing; using one stove bolt or metal clip with larger washer for each 2 square feet of area. Cut bolt or clip pin flush with face of insulation. Cleaning: Entire coated surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with a vacuum cleaner to remove all particles of glass fiber from the coated surface. Extreme care shall be taken not to crush or damage the coated surface. Any damaged lining shall be replaced. END OF SECTION 23 33 00 09603 23 33 00 -5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 34 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FANS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. B. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. B. Cc. 1.4 A. B. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Follow all provisions of Section 23 00 00, “General Mechanical Work’. WORK INCLUDED Work under this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the complete installation of all fans complete with motors, drives, accessories, all connected and ready for use. SUBMITTALS Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections and Section 23 00 00, "General Mechanical Work". Submit product information on all fans, including fan curves and motor data. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings for each fan shall include construction details necessary for installation, complete performance curves and sound power level data in all standard octave bands at midfrequencies for fan performance curve application area. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 01 Section, "Materials and Equipment". Standardization: Provide fans that serve similar duty from the same manufacturer throughout where possible. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 09603 MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Fans: Acme. Barry Blower. Broan. Cook. Greenheck. Hartzell Hunter. Penn. Strobic Air. Trane. Twin City Fans. aT Tease ao TD 23 3400-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 34 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FANS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.2 A. 09603 AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Criteria: 1. Performance data for all fans shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of AMCA Standard 210. 2. Sound power level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA Standard 301 and shall be the results of tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 300. 3. Unit construction shall conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA Standard Handbook Publications and to requirements specified herein. Safety: Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted fan inlets and outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI B15.1, the recommendations of the National Safety Council and requirements specified herein. Nameplate: Provide a metallic, corrosion-resistant, embossed or stamped nameplate for each fan. Nameplate data shall include selection point capacity conditions, rpm and bhp. Permanently affix in a conspicuous location. Horsepower: Motor brake horsepower input to each proposed fan shall not exceed scheduled brake horsepower. Alignment: All fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be properly protected during shipment so that bearings are not damaged. Rigging: Field rigging methods shall not negate balancing. Lifting eyes shall be used. Shafts shall not be bent. Bearings: al Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type. Bearings shall have a certified AFBMA L-50 minimum rated life of 200,000 hours unless otherwise specified. Bearings shall have dust-tight seals suitable for lubricant pressures encountered. Housings shall be cast iron, unless otherwise specified or approved. 2, Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall be such as to preclude overheating due to excess lubricant or seal blowout due to excess pressure. Grease supply fittings shall be surface ball check type. Provide manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings as necessary to comply with specified requirements. Bearing and seal construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on the side opposite to the supply fitting. Relief shall be visible from normal maintenance locations. Lubrication provisions shall include extension tubes where necessary to facilitate safe maintenance while equipment is operating. 3. Permanently sealed prelubricated antifriction bearings, which conform to above-specified materials and AFBMA L-50 life requirements, may be provided for air moving equipment with nameplate horsepower requirements less than 1/2 in lieu of relubricable bearings. Electrical: Unit electrical wiring shall comply with its UL listing, or with provisions of Division 26 where no listing is present. Motors: Ae Motors shall be premium efficiency, conforming to the requirements of Section 23 05 13. 2 Motor nameplate shall show full load motor efficiency. Fan Drives & Guards: 1. General: Provide a V-belt drive, with guard shall be provided for each air handling unit fan except direct-driven type fans. 2. Multiple Belt Drives: For all systems with motors 2 hp and larger, drives shall be multiple 23 3400-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 34 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FANS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.3 A. B. Cc. belt type. 3. Select drives in accordance with the following except the minimum drive rating shall be 140% of the motor rating, unless specified otherwise. a. Motors 5 HP and Smaller: Adjustable motor sheave, drive 150% of fan brake horsepower at design. b. Motors 7-1/2 HP Through 30 HP: Fixed motor sheave, drive 145% of fan brake horsepower at design. 4. Sheaves: Cast iron; Fort Worth, T.B. Woods Sons, Dodge, Browning, or Worthington manufacturer; groove pattern suitable for belts selected. Sheaves for two-belt drives on motors 5 hp and smaller shall be adjustable pitch type. a. Minimum Pitch of Motor Sheaves: 4.0" for Type A belts; 6.0" for Type B; 10.0" for Type C; 4.5" for 3/8" width, 9.0" for 5/8" width. b. Balancing: For supply fans, fan and motor sheaves shall be balanced both statically and dynamically at full speed at the factory. Cc. Drive ratio shall give the required cfm at the static pressure of the system. In case the static pressure in any system is found to differ from that shown, change the ratio as required. Actual drives shall be to the present capacities shown. 5. Belts: Multiple matched V-belts, Uniroyal, Dodge, Dayco, Goodyear, or Gates manufacturer; selected for either A, B and C cross-section series, or 3/8", 5/8" or 1" width series. Belts shall be imprinted with the basic manufacturer's name and number identification. Minimum quantity of belts: two per drive. 6. Setting of Belt Tension: Adjust belt tensions according to belt manufacturer's recommendations. When adjusted, there shall not be any audible belt slippage during fan acceleration from standstill to operating rpm, nor during running of fan. 7. Guards: a. Guards for each fan drive shall be four-sided guards and shall also cover exposed parts of fan shafts. b. Guards shall meet OSHA safety standards; 1/2" mesh No. 14-gauge screen, in steel angle frame; removable by unbolting sections of the guard, for belt replacement; supported on upper isolated base, or from the fan; shall not transmit vibration from fan or motor to the building structure. Cc. Guard design shall allow measurement of driver and driven shaft speeds with revolution counter. Installation shall be such that fan vibration isolation provisions remain fully effective. PROPELLER FANS General: Provide the propeller fans, locations and capacities as indicated. Type: Square panel type, deep spun venturi inlet, die-formed steel blade propellers. Belt driven with totally enclosed, heavy-duty ball bearing; high-efficiency motor; safety guard at fan intake side; AMCA 210 labeled. Fan outlet screens shall allow measurement of driver and driven shaft speeds with revolution counter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 09603 INSTALLATION—FANS General: The installation of the fans shall conform to local codes and ordinances, NFPA 90A, and SMACNA. Mounting and supporting of all equipment including accessories and appurtenances shall be provided, including but not limited to structural supports, hangers, vibration isolators, stands, clamps, and brackets. Installation of Equipment: Installation shall conform to equipment manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Equipment shall be installed, leveled and located 23 3400-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 23 34 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT FANS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.2 so that working clearance is available under overhead lines and so that working space is available for all necessary servicing such as shaft removal, replacing or adjusting drives and motors, lubrication, and access to automatic controls. ELECTRICAL WORK General: Electric motor-driven equipment specified in this section shall be provided complete with motors and controls. Electric equipment and wiring shall comply with requirements of NFPA 70 and Division 26, "Electrical Work". Starters: Motor starters and disconnects, unless otherwise specified or indicated shall be furnished and installed by Division 26 Contractor. END OF SECTION 23 34 00 09603 23 3400-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT COMMON WORK RESULTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY The work under this division includes furnishing all materials, equipment, labor, supervision, tools and items necessary for the construction, installation, connection, testing and operation of all electrical work for this project as shown on the Electrical Drawings specified herein. Related Work Described Elsewhere: Where other divisions require electrical materials or installations comply with all applicable requirements herein. Provide all electrical materials and installation work required to connect, test and operate equipment required by other divisions. Electrical installations required by other divisions but not shown on the electrical drawings shall be provided. Itemized Schedule of Costs: Furnish a contract cost breakdown by specification section to the Contract Administrator to allow evaluation of partial payment requests. Refer to Division 01 for requirements. Warranty: The Contractor shall guarantee all work installed under this specification and make good, repair or replace at his own expense, any defective work, materials or parts within one year after final acceptance, if, in the opinion of the Architect, said defect is due to imperfection in material, design or workmanship. Incandescent lamps are not warranted but all shall be Operating at time of final acceptance. Warranty shall be submitted in writing as required in Division 01. REGULATIONS Codes and Ordinances: Comply with all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations including the National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, NFPA, and all other national, state and local codes and ordinances. Notify the Contract Administrator of any non-compliance in contract documents to applicable codes and regulations prior to installation of the work. Changes in the work after initial installation due to requirements of code enforcing agencies shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Permits: Provide and pay for all permits and fees required for this project. In addition to paying for all permits and fees, the Contractor shall be responsible for contacting the various Approving Authorities, arranging for review of shop drawings where appropriate, scheduling inspections in a timely manner, and making necessary corrections as required by the Approving Authorities. Approving Authority: It is the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain and contact the appropriate "Approving Authorities" for this project. Approving Authorities will include, but not be limited to the electrical inspector and the Fire Marshal having jurisdiction. Certificate of Inspection: Obtain a Certificate of Electrical Inspection from the local inspecting authority indicating final acceptance. Submit to the Owner upon completion of the project as part of project closeout. Safety measures to be taken: The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide 26 05 00 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT COMMON WORK RESULTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL FOR ELECTRICAL 1.4 1.5 1.6 09603 design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The duty of the Engineer to conduct construction observations of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures, in, on or near the construction site. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS Intent: The Electrical Drawings and specifications are intended to include all labor and materials necessary to provide a complete and operating facility. Any materials shown and called for on the drawings but not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, which are necessary for the proper completion of the installation or operation of the equipment, shall be furnished the same as if specifically called for in both. By submitting a bid, the Contractor is acknowledging that he has made a thorough examination of the contract documents, existing site conditions, and has determined that these documents and conditions do sufficiently describe the scope of construction work required under this contract. Any questions regarding interpretation of the contract documents shall be made in writing in a timely manner prior to the bid date to allow reasonable time for resolution of the questions. Diagrammatic Drawings: The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show exact or complete raceway and wiring configurations, routing, rating or the necessary number and types of raceway fittings or pull boxes. Provide all labor and materials required to execute the work SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS It is the Contractor's responsibility to thoroughly review vendor-assembled shop drawings, catalog cuts, etc. to ensure that these documents are complete and comply with the specifications. Submittal Format: Submittals must be sent in complete "sets," including all specified material. Submission of individual materials will not be accepted. Review: The review of a manufacturer's name or product does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in all details with the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for submitting materials at such a time to allow a minimum of two weeks for Contract Administrator's review. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Prepare operations and maintenance manuals for all electrical equipment installed on this project. Reference is made to Section 01700, "Contract Closeout." Provide table of contents at front of manual indicating general content of each section. Provide index for each section of the manual with complete equipment catalog item or identification. The information and diagrams included must be on the specific equipment installed for this project. General "product line" information is not acceptable. The equipment model and catalog numbers with appropriate prefixes and suffixes must be clearly indicated on the data sheets. Manuals shall contain shop drawings, schematic and wiring diagrams (showing all external connections), parts lists, operating and maintenance information. Any modifications to equipment in the field shall be updated on the drawings, diagrams, etc., to reflect the "as-built" conditions. 26 05 00 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT COMMON WORK RESULTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL FOR ELECTRICAL D. Bind manuals in three-ring binders with hardboard covers. Label manual edge with name of the nid 1.8 G9 9 BD > m 1.9 09603 project, year of completion and the words "Electrical Equipment." Label manual front with the words "Electrical Equipment" the name of the project, the name of the Owner, year completed, name of the Architect, Engineer and Contractor. If the thickness of the manual exceeds 3", provide separate volumes, each 3” thick or less with each volume imprinted as described above and with the addition of the volume number. One preliminary copy shall be submitted for review 30 days prior to completion of the project. Preliminary copy shall include proposed wording for cover and back edge of the manual. Submit final bound copies for distribution as required in Division 01. RECORD DRAWINGS A record shall be made during the progress of the project indicating the work as actually installed. Corrections and changes shall be kept up to date at all times on a separate set of record drawings kept at the job site for review. Mark-ups may be schematic as related to interior raceway systems; however, all raceways shall be shown in proper relationship with junction boxes, panelboards, devices, and equipment. Raceways installed below grade shall be shown with both horizontal and vertical dimensions at an accuracy of +6 inches. Project Closeout: At completion of the project, the Contractor shall provide as-built drawings indicating work as revised, detailed, and actually installed. Additional Record Drawings: Refer to Division 27 and 28 sections for additional record drawing requirements. AutoCAD production requirements also apply to all special system drawings. ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Provide: To furnish and install. Wiring: Raceway, conductors and connections. Exposed: Visible from occupied areas. Install: To set in position and make fully operational. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to the job site. Required: As required by code, authority having jurisdiction or contract documents for the system and/or installation to be fully operational. COORDINATION Work of Other Trades: The Electrical Drawings do not show complete details of the building construction. Refer to the Architectural, Structural, Civil, Landscape, and Mechanical Drawings for those details which may affect the execution of this work. Specific locations of construction features shall be obtained from the reference drawings, field measurements, or the trade providing the material or equipment. No extra payments will be allowed for failure to obtain this information. The Contractor will not be paid for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination prior to installation such as removing and replacing, relocating, cutting, patching or finishing. Special attention is called to the following items and all conflicts shall be coordinated prior to installation: nit Light switches will be located on the "strike" side of the door. 26 05 00 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT COMMON WORK RESULTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL FOR ELECTRICAL C. D. 2. All electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and equipment are installed to avoid conflict with grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment. 3. Electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and equipment are to be installed in proper relation to cabinets, counters, doors and other Architectural appurtenances. 4. Electrical characteristics (HP, KVA, voltage, phase, fusing, overload protection) of actual equipment furnished under other divisions being different from that shown on the electrical drawings. Provide access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. STANDARD OF QUALITY General: Whenever any material or equipment is specified by patent or proprietary name or by the name of the manufacturer, such specification shall establish the minimum standard of quality in that particular field of manufacture. The Contract Administrator shall be the sole and final judge as to quality and acceptability of substitutions, no exceptions. PRODUCT LISTING AND LABELING All electrical equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and labeled. Equipment in compliance with UL standards but not bearing their label is not acceptable. If the manufacturer cannot arrange for labeling of an assembled unit at the factory, the necessary inspection and acceptance by the testing facility shall be performed in the field at no additional cost to the Owner, and be acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 A. 3.3 A. 3.4 A. 09603 GENERAL All materials shall be new, free from defects and arrive at the job site in their original unopened container. MATERIAL STORAGE Make all necessary provisions for storing materials and equipment at site so as to insure the quality and fitness of the items to be incorporated in the work. Equipment shall be stored to prevent damage and corrosion. FIRESTOPPING Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. CUTTING AND PATCHING Provide all cutting, demolition and patching required for the installation of the electrical work on 26 05 00 -4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT COMMON WORK RESULTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL FOR ELECTRICAL 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 09603 this project. Patching shall be accomplished by utilizing the general construction trades normally providing materials and labor needed for restoration of floor, ceiling or walls. Penetrations through existing structural walls, ceiling or floor slabs shall be core drilled. Spillage from core drilling shall be contained by diking, vacuuming and covering with protective plastic sheeting as required. In no case shall structural members be penetrated without prior approval of the Architect. After installation of raceways, provide approved fire sealing materials to close spaces around raceways. PAINTING Touch up electrical equipment with factory finished surfaces as required using factory furnished paint. Coordinate field painting requirements with the Contract Administrator prior to final trim and cover installation. Do not paint screw heads, hinges, nameplates, hardware, etc. All surface-mounted raceways in finished areas will be painted as directed under the "Painting" division of the specifications. CLEANING Promptly remove waste material and rubbish resulting from electrical work. Prior to energizing equipment, remove all chipping materials, construction dirt and debris, vacuum and wipe-down all internal areas. At completion of the project, clean all equipment and fixtures installed under this Contract. CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE Site Review: On-site meetings or reviews of construction by the Contract Administrator or Engineer shall not be construed as acceptance by these parties as related to quantities, rough- in locations, and compliance with code enforcing authorities. Testing: The Contractor shall test all wiring and all electrical equipment to verify absence of grounds and short circuits and verify proper operation, rotation, and phase relationship. Contractor will be responsible for scheduling of tests and demonstrations at times mutually acceptable to the Owner. All equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this specification and the manufacturer's recommendations. Operate every device manually and automatically in accordance with its purpose. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner or his designated representative. All instruments and personnel required to conduct the test shall be provided by the Contractor. Any test not witnessed by the Owner shall be waived by written document. All such documents must become the property of the Owner upon completion of construction. INSTRUCTION FOR OWNER’S PERSONNEL Scope: Following initial operation of all electrical equipment and prior to acceptance of the electrical work, conduct demonstrations of equipment operation and instruction periods for the Owner's representatives. Instruction Periods: Shall include preliminary discussion and presentation of information from maintenance manuals with appropriate references to drawings, followed by tours of equipment spaces explaining maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, settings and available system and equipment adjustments. Contractor's representatives, in general, who conduct these instructions and demonstrations shall be qualified foremen or superintendents acquainted with this project and from the trade involved. For major equipment, the representative shall be the manufacturer's representatives with operating experience and substantial design experience on this project. Their qualifications 26 05 00 -5 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT COMMON WORK RESULTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL FOR ELECTRICAL shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator before conducting the instruction period. D. Minimum Duration of Instruction Periods: 1. Electrical Distribution System: 4 hours. 2. Heat Trace System: 2 hours. 3. Fire Alarm System : 1 hour. 4 Refer to other section of the specification for additional testing requirements. E. Scheduling of Instruction Periods: Provide notice of Contractor's readiness to conduct such instruction and demonstration periods to the Owner at least two weeks prior to each instruction period and reach agreement on the date of each instruction period. F. Prepare a written statement of acceptance for the Owner's signature. The statement shall be substantially as follows: "| (the Contractor), the associated factory representatives and the subcontractor, have thoroughly tested each of the following systems and have proved their normal operation to the Owner's representative and have instructed him in the operation and maintenance thereof." Owner’s System Demonstrator Representative Date Electrical Distribution & Lighting Heat Trace System Fire Alarm System Owner's Representative Date Electrical Contractor Date G. Send copies of this acceptance to the Contract Administrator and Owner and place one copy in each maintenance manual. H. Completion of Work: When requesting final inspection, provide ten day notice. Submit written certifications that the work has been fully completed in strict accordance with the plans and specifications. 3.9 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The Electrical Contractor shall submit to the Contract Administrator a Project Closeout Form (form at end of this section) properly filled out prior to the time final acceptance of the electrical work is requested. At this time also submit copies of final inspection certificates and receipts for loose materials (spare wiring devices, fuses, etc.) turned over to the Owner. END OF SECTION 26 05 00 09603 26 05 00 -6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT COMMON WORK RESULTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL FOR ELECTRICAL JOB CLOSEOUT FORM 1. Electrical Inspector's Final Acceptance: 0 Copy of certificate attached. | Transmitted previously to Date 2. Fire Marshall's Final Acceptance of Fire Alarm System: Copy of certificate attached. | Transmitted previously to Date As-Built Drawings: Attached Transmitted previously to Date oOo 4. O&M Manuals: 0 Attached 0 Transmitted previously to Date 5. Spare Parts: (Delivered to Date Note: Provide separate letter of transmittal with itemized list of parts for each set of spare parts. Each transmittal must be signed by an authorized representative of the Owner. 6. As-Built Fire Alarm Shop Drawings: 0 Attached | Transmitted previously to Date 7. Testing and Owner Training: Copy of written certification attached. 0 Transmitted previously to Date 8. The work is complete in accordance with the contract documents and authorized changes except for the following (attach a separate sheet): Electrical Contractor Date General Contractor Date 09603 26 05 00 -7 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. iid A. B. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: AL American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Southwire Company. 4. Alcan Wire. Copper Conductors: Stranded, comply with NEMA WC 70. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN and XHHW. CONNECTORS AND SPLICES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 2. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 3. Tyco Electronics Corp. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 3.2 A. B. Cc. 09603 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS Feeders: Stranded Copper. Branch Circuits: Stranded Copper. CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND WIRING METHODS Feeders: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. Minimum Conductor Size: 1B Ground: #12 AWG. 26 05 19 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 19 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2: Phase Conductors (more than six in a raceway): #10 AWG. 3. Phase Conductors (six or less in a raceway): #12 AWG. 4. Branch Circuit Homeruns (longer than 75 feet): #10 AWG. D. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless- steel, wire-mesh, and strain relief device at terminations to suit application. E. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. F. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. B. Provide insulated screw-on type connectors on lighting and receptacle branch circuit splices. Hydraulically-set compression lugs for terminations at panel and switchboard busses. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. D. Termination at busses (panel, switchboard, ATS, etc.), and transformers to be made with hydraulically set compression lugs. 3.5 BRANCH CIRCUITS A. Homeruns greater than 75 feet to first outlet shall be No. 10 AWG minimum. Make no splices in home runs. Wiring from separate raceway systems shall not be intermixed in common junction boxes. Wiring shown in separate raceway systems shall not be combined. 3.6 FEEDERS A. Make no splices unless shown on the plans. END OF SECTION 26 05 19 09603 26 05 19 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 26 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1.3 A. B. C. 1.4 A. B. CONDUCTORS Insulated Conductors: Stranded Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V. Bare Copper Conductors: Stranded Copper wire or cable. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches by 12 inches in cross section, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators. CONNECTORS Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.5 A. B. Cc. 1.6 A. 09603 APPLICATIONS Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telecommunications equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. he Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch, minimum, from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus. Conductor Terminations and Connections: fl Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. BONDING Insulated grounding bushings shall be installed to bond all feeder conduits to the switchboard 26 05 26 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 26 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.7 1.8 ground bus or panel ground bus at both ends of feeder raceways. Insulated grounding bushings shall also be installed in all feeder pull boxes to bond all conduits together. Jumpers or bonds shall be copper and sized in accordance with Table 250-122 of the National Electrical Code. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1 Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. INSTALLATION Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. al Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2! Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each above ground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 09603 26 05 26 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 29 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HANGER AND SUPPORTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. B. C. 1.3 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. DEFINITIONS EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit for each of the products being provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. Cc. 09603 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Thomas & Betts Corporation. c. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 4 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. wn Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. 26 05 29 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 29 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HANGER AND SUPPORTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: _ Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Hilti Inc. 3) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Too! Works, Inc. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7 Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. Cc. D. 3.2 A. 09603 APPLICATION Equipment Anchorage, Support and Bracing: 1. General: Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for all electrical raceways, fixtures and equipment required by the International Building code (IBC), Section 1621. Contractor shall retain and pay for the services of a licensed structural engineer to design the required anchorage and bracing to comply with the requirements of the IBC. 2. Conduit Crossing Structural Separation: Conduit that crosses structural or seismic separations between building units shall be installed with flexible connections, suitable to accommodate longitudinal and transverse displacements. Secure raceways each side of joint and provide minimum of 36 inches length flexible conduit between building units. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. SUPPORT INSTALLATION Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength 26 05 29 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 29 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT HANGER AND SUPPORTS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 Ib. B. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: it To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5 Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. Cc. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 PAINTING A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 26 05 29 09603 26 05 29 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 33 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. @ C. D. 1.3 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. DEFINITIONS EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit for each type of product being provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 09603 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Electri-Flex Co. 4. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. EMT: ANSI C80.3. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. iad Fittings for EMT: a. Couplings: Threaded metallic type of the same material as the conduit. b. Locknuts: Steel up to 2 inches, malleable iron for 2-1/2 inches and larger. c. Bushings: Bakelite or plastic up to 2 inches, malleable iron with insulating collar for 2-1/2 inches and larger. 26 05 33 - 1 4/5110 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 33 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS d. Unions: Zinc plated malleable iron, 3 piece conduit coupling. Running threads are not acceptable. e. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1-1/2" and smaller shall be set-screw type steel employing a split corrugated ring and tightening nut. Cast metal will not be accepted. Fittings 2" and larger shall be steel and may be setscrew type containing dual setscrews on each side of coupling. f. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Slip-on, nonthreaded type of same material as conduit. g. Flexible Metallic Conduit: Steel, one- or two-screw clamp type. h. Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit: Galvanized steel, compression type. G. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Electri-Flex Co. 4. Carlon Electrical Products. B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC or HDPE, unless otherwise indicated. Cc. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 2.3 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard ivory enamel finish. 2.4 ONE-COMPARTMENT SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS A. The raceway shall consist of a base and cover section; factory assembled and designed to accommodate pulling conductors through the raceway. The base section shall have a nominal thickness of .040" and be manufactured of zinc plated or galvanized steel. The cover section shall have a nominal thickness of 0.40" and be painted with a baked enamel ivory finish which is capable of being over-painted in the field if required. The overall dimensions of the raceway shall be 3/4" wide x 21/32" high. Wiremold V700 series. 2.5 TWO-COMPARTMENT SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS A. The raceway shall consist of a base section having a nominal thickness of .050". The cover section shall have a nominal thickness of 0.40". The base and cover sections shall be manufactured of galvanized steel and painted with a baked enamel ivory finish which is capable of being over-painted in the field if required. The overall dimensions of the raceway shall be 4- 3/4" wide x 1-3/4" high. Wiremold V-4000 series. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Thomas & Betts Corporation. b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 09603 26 05 33 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 33 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Hoffman. 4. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 5. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 7. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). B. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1, Type 12. C. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. a! Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2.7 MULTI-SYSTEM WALL BOX A. Recessed wall box with module faceplates to accommodate receptacles and special systems devices as shown on the drawings. Provide barrier to divide box for high and low-voltage wiring. Provide four-gang box for up to three devices. Provide six-gang box for four or more devices. Hubbell Multi-Connect HBLWSCSxX series wall box with wall flange and faceplates to accommodate devices shown on the drawings. Flange and faceplates to be white. B. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 12, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. Akon PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 09603 RACEWAY APPLICATION Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed Conduit, Above Ground: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Above Ground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes raceways in the following locations: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet ro 26 05 33 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 33 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS locations. 3.2 09603 5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. it Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. INSTALLATION Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. fl! Planning: The layout of all raceways shall be carefully planned by the Contractor to ensure an installation which is neatly done and workmanlike. Any work showing improper care in planning will be ordered removed by the Architect, and shall be replaced in a neat and proper manner, without any additional cost to the Owner. 2. Concealment: All raceways shall be concealed in finished areas unless approved otherwise by the Architect. Where existing wall surfaces are inaccessible, surface metal raceways for these exceptions may be provided when approved by the Architect. Raceways may be surface mounted in unfinished equipment spaces such as mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, elevator machine rooms, and attic spaces. 3. Cutting and Bending: Raceways shall have smooth interior, ends cut square and reamed. Bends shall be carefully made to avoid injuring or flattening raceways. 4. Exposed Raceways: Install exposed raceways as high as possible, above ductwork, parallel or at right angles to building lines. 5. Raceways shall not be installed in concrete slab or wall construction when passing through an expansion or earthquake joint. 6. Raceways shall be installed in furred or suspended ceiling spaces with a minimum of 36 inches of flexible conduit crossing the expansion or earthquake joints. Secure raceways each side of joint. it. Routing: All raceways shall be installed parallel or at right angles to the building construction unless prohibited by a physical obstruction. This applies to all exposed raceways as well as all raceways above suspended ceiling. 8. Conduit Location: Conduit shall not be run under heavy equipment, footings or other structural elements that might adversely affect the integrity of the raceways system or building footing. All raceways installed above suspended ceilings must be kept a minimum of 6" clear above top of ceiling system. 9. Floor Slabs and Columns: Conduits installed in structural floor slabs shall be coordinated with structural steel and shall be routed to provide a maximum concrete cover. In general, conduit shall not be installed in structural columns, unless special permission is granted by the Architect. 10. Pullboxes with Covers: Shall be provided as shown on the drawings or as required by Code. All pullboxes shall be located so as to be accessible. 11. Flexible Conduit: Shall be used only for lighting fixture pigtails in accessible ceilings, flush-mounted speaker pigtails in accessible ceilings, sound control, motor connections and at building expansion joints as specified. Any other proposed use of flexible conduit must be approved by the Architect's representative. 12. Sealing: All conduit, sleeves, blockouts or openings around raceway and cable systems that penetrate building walls, floors and ceilings shall be sealed. Sealing materials shall be fire-rated, non-combustible type, specifically designed for this type of installation and shall be approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 13. Penetrations: Raceways which pass through building roof, exterior walls of building 26 05 33-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 33 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 09603 above or below grade and floor slabs on grade shall be sealed on the interior side of the building using non-hardening sealing compound after all conductors have been installed in the raceway. Sealing material shall be specifically designed for electrical wiring systems and comply with Section 7. 14. Conduit Passing Through Building Roof: Provide a 4 Ib. lead plumbing vent flashing with a counterflashing attached above using a galvanized steel clamp. 15. Conduit Penetrating Membranes: All conduits penetrating walls or slabs with membranes shall be installed with approved membrane clamping devices in order to provide necessary seal. 16. Exterior Walls: Conduits passing through exterior walls below grade and/or bridging an area which was previously excavated and backfilled shall be rigidly supported by a structurally reinforced concrete duct bank spanning between the building wall and a bearing surface on undisturbed earth. 17. Cleaning of Raceways: The interior and exterior of all conduits and other raceways shall be thoroughly cleaned of all material. All conduits shall be capped or plugged after installation to ensure that they remain clean. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degrees bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-Ib tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RMC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 degrees F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. 1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location: 26 05 33-5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 33 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 degrees F temperature b. oie Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 degrees F temperature c. ideer Spanse Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 3.3 09603 degrees F temperature change. d Attics: 135 degrees F temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change. 3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 8 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. RACEWAYS AND CABLE INSTALLATION PATHWAYS FOR LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Installation of Raceways/Pathways for low-voltage systems shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A, Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. Conduits above lay-in ceilings: Do not install cables in conduits that are supported from the ceiling suspension system. All conduits shall be supported independently of the ceiling support system. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent. Bend radii for conduits shall meet the following requirements: 1. If the conduit has an internal diameter of 2 inches or less, the bend radius must be at least 6 times the internal conduit diameter. 2. If the conduit has an internal diameter of more than 2 inches, the bend radius must be at least 10 times the internal conduit diameter. There shall be no more than two 90 degrees bends between pull points in telecommunications conduit, without derating of the conduit capacity. For each additional 90 degrees bend, the conduit capacity shall be derated by 15 percent. Increase conduit size as required to meet conduit fill requirements of this section with the derated capacity accounted for. Or, provide pull boxes to eliminate 90 degrees bends as necessary to avoid having to derate conduit. Offsets shall be considered as equivalent to a 90 degrees bend. Pull boxes added to conduit runs as of result of this requirement shall be in accordance with this section. Conduits which are terminated at cable trays shall be supported from structure with a maximum distance of 24 inches from the tray. Conduits terminated at cable trays shall be bonded to the tray. Exterior conduit shall be GRC of sizes noted on the drawings. Interior conduit for vertical riser cable shall be GRC, sized per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A-5 or as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Interior conduit for horizontal cable shall be EMT, sized per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A-5 standards or as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Use of flexible conduit for telecommunications shall be kept to a minimum and shall be at the 26 05 33 -6 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 33 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS discretion of the Contracting Agency. Obtain prior written approval for the use of flexible conduit. Where required due to physical considerations, flexible metal conduit may be allowed in lengths not exceeding 4 feet. If used, flexible metal conduit shall be increased by one trade size for the application used. Conduits entering the MDP room through the floor shall be terminated 4 inches above finished floor. Conduits entering the MDP room from above shall be terminated 4 inches below the finished ceiling, but in no case shall the conduits terminate greater than 12 inches above the cable tray or distribution frame. J. Conduits and cut-out openings between floors shall be sealed with firestopping material which is removable and reusable, to accommodate adds, moves and changes in the cabling system. K. All conduits used for routing of low voltage cables shall have bushings at all stubouts. 3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. a Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2! Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 05 33 09603 26 05 33 -7 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL LE A. 1.2 A. B. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. DEFINITIONS The IBC: International Building Code. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1, Site Class as Defined in the IBC: E. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II. a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5 for essential systems, 1.0 for non-essential systems. b. Component Response Modification Factor: 6.0. c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5. 3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration a. 1.0-Second Period: 0.21 g. b. Short Period: 0.45 g. 4. Essential Systems: a. The following electrical equipment, raceways, and spaces are considered essential for the continued operation of the facility: 1) All electrical, generator, mechanical, and communications rooms. 2) All life-safety distribution equipment, feeders, and conduit. 3) All equipment and feeders rated 225 Amperes and above. 4) All cable trays. 5) All fire alarm system equipment and conduit. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1 Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2: Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. b. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 09603 VIBRATION ISOLATORS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Isolation Technology, Inc. 26 05 48 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2.2 09603 2. Vibration Isolation. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. Resilient Material: Oil and water-resistant neoprene. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators. A Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. RON Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint. az Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch-thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. Oak SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: at Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2: Hilti Inc. 3. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 4. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of steel 26 05 48 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS E a G. 2.3 A. assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter. FACTORY FINISHES Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. Cc. 3.2 A. B. C. 3.3 A. B. Cc. 09603 EXAMINATION Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. APPLICATIONS Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION Equipment and Hanger Restraints: 1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment. 2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at 26 05 48 - 3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 48 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. D. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications. 3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. B. Adjust active height of spring isolators. C. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION 26 05 48 09603 26 05 48 -4 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 53 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT IDENTIFICATION FOR DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL Le RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Color for Printed Legend: 1. Power Circuits: White letters on a black field. 2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable. Cc. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use. 2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable. Uses permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2.3 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. Cc. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 09603 26 05 53 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 53 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT IDENTIFICATION FOR DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2.4 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES A. General: Nameplates shall be engraved in 1/16 inches thick phenolic letters, a minimum of 3/16 inches high with white letters on black background for all equipment and signal and communications systems except fire alarm. Provide white letters on a red background for fire alarm. B. Mounting: Nameplates shall be attached with a minimum of two 6-32 roundhead screws, lockwasher and nuts in exterior locations and contact-type permanent self-adhesive in indoor locations. 2.5 SWITCHBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. General: Provide nameplate which identifies the switchboard/distribution panel and the source panel. (Example: Distribution Panel No. 1/Fed from Main Service Switchboard - Bkr. No. 1.) B. Overcurrent Devices: Provide nameplate at each overcurrent device that identifies the device number and the load served. (Example: Bkr. No. 1/Panel A.) 2.6 PANELBOARDS A. Provide nameplate on the front of the panel room which identifies the panel. (Example: Panel A.) Provide a nameplate concealed behind the door which identifies the panel, and the source panel. (Example: Panel A, Fed from Distribution Panel 1-Bkr. No. 2) 2.7 TRANSFORMER A. Provide nameplate identifying the transformer, the source panel and the panel served. (Example: Transformer T1/Fed from Distribution Panel 1, Bkr. No. 1/Serves Panel A) 2.8 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND MOTOR STARTERS A. Provide nameplate which identifies the source panel, load served and the fuse size where applicable. (Example: Panel A-1, 3, 5/Exhaust Fan No. 1/10 amp, RK1 fuses.) 2.9 JUNCTION AND PULL BOX IDENTIFICATION A. Mark the cover of all junction boxes and pull boxes to identify the system, circuits, or feeders contained within the box. Use red color for fire alarm. Circuits shall be identified by panelboards and specific circuit numbers contained within the junction box. Refer to specification Sections 26 05 33. 2.10 ARC FLASH HAZARD LABELS A. Provide label on all new equipment required under NEC 110.16, which designates the appropriate PPE (Personal Protective Equipment) required for the hazard present. Labels to comply with the NEC and NFPA 70E. Submit sample of label to Engineer for review. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus -40 to plus +185 degrees Fahrenheit. 09603 26 05 53 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 53 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT IDENTIFICATION FOR DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS B. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. Cc. D. 09603 APPLICATION Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors No. 1/0 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color-coding conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use marker tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source and circuit number. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: 2. Power transfer switches. 3. Controls with external control power connections. 4 Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. 26 05 53 - 3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 53 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT IDENTIFICATION FOR DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3.2 09603 Electrical switchgear and switchboards. Transformers. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. Disconnect switches. Enclosed circuit breakers. Motor starters. Push-button stations. Power transfer equipment. Contactors. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. Battery inverter units. Battery racks. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators. Monitoring and control equipment. Uninterruptible power supply equipment. posgratT-sa>~9a00 INSTALLATION Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50- foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 6(00V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit, field applied. 2. Colors for 208/120-Volt Circuits: a Phase A: Black. b Phase B: Red. Cc. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White. e Ground: Green. f. Travelers: Yellow. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: a Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Gray. e Ground: Green. f. Travelers: Lavender. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum 26 05 53 -4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 05 53 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT IDENTIFICATION FOR DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. H. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting Sections. END OF SECTION 26 05 53 09603 26 05 53 -5 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 24 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PANELBOARDS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Related Work In Other Sections: al 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 2. 26 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems. 3. 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. DEFINITIONS EMI: Electromagnetic interference. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component. indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers’ technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. a, Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. g@ao00m Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1 Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2 Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's written permission. 26 24 16 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 24 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PANELBOARDS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 2.3 2.4 09603 MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: i Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: a. Cutler-Hammer or approved equal. 2. Transient Voltage Suppression Panelboards: a. Cutler-Hammer or approved equal. MANUFACTURED UNITS Enclosures: a. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. b. Boiler Room: NEMA 250, Type 12 2. Hinged Front Cover: Door within door. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat. 4. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside panelboard door. Phase and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material. 1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 2. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type. 3. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service disconnect switches. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Omit for fused-switch panelboards. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: ial For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers. 26 2416-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 24 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PANELBOARDS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 2.5 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. B. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.6 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION PANELBOARDS > mo oO 8 Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Main Overcurrent Devices: Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers. Bus: Copper phase and neutral buses; 200 percent capacity neutral bus and lugs. Transient Voltage Suppression Device: IEEE C62.41, integrally mounted, plug-in-style, solid- state, parallel-connected, sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules. al Minimum Single-Impulse Current Ratings: a. Line to Neutral: 100,000 A. b. Line to Ground: 100,000 A. Cc. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A. Protection modes shall be as follows: a. Line to neutral. b. Line to ground. c. Neutral to ground. EMI/RFI Noise Attenuation Using 50-ohm Insertion Loss Test: 55 dB at 100 kHz. Maximum Category C Combination Wave Clamping Voltage: 600 V, line to neutral and line to ground on 120/208 V systems. Maximum UL 1449 Clamping Levels: 400, line to neutral and line to ground on 120/208 V, 800 V, line to neutral and line to ground on 277/480 V systems. Withstand Capabilities: 3000 Category C surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. a7 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. a 09603 Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. Circuit Breaker Padlocking Provisions: Padlocking provisions shall be furnished for circuit breakers indicated on the drawings to receive up to three padlocks when circuit breaker is in the disconnect position, positively preventing unauthorized closing of circuit breaker contacts. Shunt Trip: Shunt tripping provisions shall be furnished for the circuit breakers indicated on the drawings such that the breaker can be tripped from a remote location by opening or closing a set of contacts. 26 24 16 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 24 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT PANELBOARDS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.8 A. SPACE FOR FUTURE CIRCUIT BREAKRS OR FUSED SWITCHES Provide as indicated on the drawings. Spaces shall be completely equipped for the future addition of a circuit breaker or fused switch, including all mounting hardware and buss connections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. Cc. D. ie G. 3.2 A. B. Cc. INSTALLATION Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Mount top of trim 78 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers. ml Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. Install filler plates in unused spaces. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. IDENTIFICATION Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. END OF SECTION 26 24 16 09603 26 2416-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 27 26 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT WIRING DEVICES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A B Cc. D. E 1.3 A. 1.4 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. DEFINITIONS EMI: Electromagnetic interference. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product provided. COORDINATION Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. 2.3 A. 09603 MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers’ names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A,: Comply with NEMA 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex). GFCI RECEPTACLES General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMAWD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. 26 27 26 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 27 26 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT WIRING DEVICES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125V, 20A: it Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084. 2.4 SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Snap Switches, 120/277V, 20A: ill. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). ic. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way). Cc. Pilot Light Snap Switches, 20 A: ql Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120V and 277V. b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120V and 277V. c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120V, 1221-7PLR for 277V. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120V. 2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON." D. Emergency Stop Switch, 120/277V, 20A: 1. Description: Single pole maintained contact, red mushroom-head push button, twist to release, labeled “Boiler Emergency Shutdown’. 2.5 FINISHES A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. ve Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. 09603 26 27 26 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 27 26 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT WIRING DEVICES DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA C. — Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. ih When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Use spring-closed covers for all receptacles in the Boiler Building. Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. — Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." ad Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. END OF SECTION 26 27 26 09603 26 27 26 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 28 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 1.3 14 1.5 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Non-fusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers. 4. Molded-case switches. DEFINITIONS GD: General duty. HD: Heavy duty. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Current and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current rating. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. ORON>= Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker. QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Comply with NFPA 70. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. 26 28 16 -1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 28 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 1.6 A. 1.7 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 40 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 A. B. 2.3 A. B. Cc. D. 09603 MANUFACTURERS 1. Cutler-Hammer or approved equal FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES Fusible Switch, 600A and Smaller: NEMAKS1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. Nonfusible Switch, 600A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padiocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. a: Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical style with compression lug kits suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. Molded-Case Switches: Molded-case circuit breaker with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating. Molded-Case Switch Accessories: 1. Lugs: Mechanical style, with compression lug kits suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors. 2. Application Listing: Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 26 28 16 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 28 16 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 3.3 3.4 A. EXAMINATION Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. IDENTIFICATION Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." ADJUSTING Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. END OF SECTION 26 28 16 09603 26 28 16 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 29 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for each type of enclosed controller. Include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide for enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and all installed components. Cc. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motor to be protected. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. C. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a Cutler-Hammer or approved equal. 2.2 TYPE, SIZE AND FUNCTION A. Across-the-line start, below 3 HP B. Electronic soft start of variable frequency drive for 5 HP and above 2.3 ACROSS-THE-LINE ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS A. Manual Controller: NEMAICS 2, general purpose, Class A, with "quick-make, quick-break" toggle or pushbutton action, and marked to show whether unit is "OFF," "ON," or "TRIPPED." 1. Overload Relay: Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristics 09603 26 29 13 -1 415/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 29 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. Cc. 2.4 A. 2.5 A. B. 2.6 A. and NEMAICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristics. Relays shall have heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate, full-load current of specific motor to which they connect and shall have appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. Magnetic Controller: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing, across the line, unless otherwise indicated. di Control Circuit: Control voltage shall match control voltage of HVAC controllers; obtained from integral control power transformer with a control power transformer of sufficient capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and control devices, plus 100 percent spare capacity. Protective fuse for control circuit. 2, Adjustable Overload Relay: Dip switch selectable for motor running overload protection with NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 20 30 tripping characteristic and selected to protect motor against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. Provide relay with Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on starting. 3. Pilot device on controller door a. HOA switch b. Motor running — red LED light c. Circuit energized — green LED light d. Reset buttons 4. Terminal strip for all external connections 5 Auxiliary Contacts: Provide two normally open and normally closed auxiliary contacts Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination controller and disconnect switch. ue Disconnecting Means: NEMA rated, heavy-duty, thermal magnetic circuit breaker or motor circuit protector. Safety disconnect handle on cover. Padlocking provision in open position. 2. Magnetic controller as specified in this specification. ENCLOSURES Description: Surface-mounting cabinets. NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2: Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. ACCESSORIES Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type. FACTORY FINISHES Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclosed controllers before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 09603 EXAMINATION Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. if Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 26 29 13-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 29 13 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 3.2 A. 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 INSTALLATION Control Equipment at Walls: Bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. Controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." IDENTIFICATION Identify enclosed controller, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION Install wiring between enclosed controllers according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applicable. 1 Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position. 2. Connect selector switches with enclosed controller circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high- temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. CONNECTIONS Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 26 29 13 09603 26 29 13 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 51 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INTERIOR LIGHTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 G9 O09 BD > 1.3 1.4 1.5 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. DEFINITIONS BF: Ballast factor. CRI: Color-rendering index. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit for each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. Ballast. Energy-efficiency data. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps. aAkWON> Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies. WARRANTY Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years. 2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven (7) years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer 26 51 00-1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 51 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INTERIOR LIGHTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion. Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 09603 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic- interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter. BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; programmed-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. 1. Sound Rating: A. 26 5100-2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 51 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INTERIOR LIGHTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA B. 2.3 A. 2.4 A. B. 2.5 A. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. BF: 0.85 or higher. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C 82.11 and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. DNOONRWN Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: i. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg F starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types. EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code- required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED. FLUORESCENT LAMPS Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 09603 INSTALLATION Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. 26 5100-3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION 26 51 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT INTERIOR LIGHTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA Cc. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." D. Coordinate light fixture locations with mechanical equipment. END OF SECTION 26 51 00 09603 26 5100-4 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION SECTION 26 56 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT EXTERIOR LIGHTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA SECTION 26 56 00 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. fe 1.3 1.4 09603 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings. DEFINTIONS CRI: Color-rendering index. HID: High-intensity discharge. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each luminaire support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters. 2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories. a. For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer. b. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products 6. Photoelectric relays. i Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for components involved. Shop Drawings: a Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include emergency, operation, and SECTION 26 56 00 - 1 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION SECTION 26 56 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT EXTERIOR LIGHTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA D. 1.5 A. B. Cc. D. EE! 1.6 A. maintenance manuals. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers’ laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." Comply with NFPA 70. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. RON> PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 09603 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. SECTION 26 56 00 -2 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION SECTION 26 56 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT EXTERIOR LIGHTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA ri 2.2 2.3 2.4 09603 Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of support materials. LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fe with 15-second minimum time delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from causing false turnoff. f. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with NEMA C136.10. 2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points. BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer. BONDS HID LAMPS Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. All HID lamps shall be operable at temperatures down to -40 degrees F. SECTION 26 56 00 -3 4/5/10 DGSD BIOMASS HEATING SYSTEM SECTION SECTION 26 56 00 DELTA GREELY SCHOOL DISTRICT EXTERIOR LIGHTING DELTA JUNCTION, ALASKA 2.5 A. B. 2.6 A. SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. a Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. SPARE PARTS Provide spare lamps and ballasts of every type installed as part of this project. The quantity of each type of spare part shall be equal to or greater than 5% of the number of that type of part installed as part of this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. Cc. 3.2 A. B. 3.3 A. LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION Install lamps in each luminaire. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. a Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources. CORROSION PREVENTION Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap. GROUNDING Ground metal support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1! Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system. END OF SECTION 26 56 00 09603 SECTION 26 56 00 - 4 4/5110 KOTLIK SCHOOL HVAC UPGRADES SECTION 28 31 11 LOWER YUKON SCHOOL DISTRICT DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE- KOTLIK, ALASKA ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL Le A. re 1.3 1.4 1.5 09049 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. DEFINITIONS LED: Light-emitting diode. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide new initiation and notification devices as shown in the drawings and integrate with existing fire alarm system. SUBMITTALS General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. 2! Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. i Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 3. Include battery-size calculations. 4 Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 6. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits. PROJECT CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated: 1 Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service. 28 31 11-1 4/9/2010 KOTLIK SCHOOL HVAC UPGRADES SECTION 28 31 11 LOWER YUKON SCHOOL DISTRICT DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE- KOTLIK, ALASKA ALARM SYSTEM 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written permission. 1.6 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. — Comply with UL 864. B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years. C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software. 1, Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. 2.3 A. 09049 GENERAL All products shall be fully compatible with the existing system. MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1 Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery- powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation. 4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. oN SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be four-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status. 28 3111-2 4/9/2010 KOTLIK SCHOOL HVAC UPGRADES SECTION 28 31 11 LOWER YUKON SCHOOL DISTRICT DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE- KOTLIK, ALASKA ALARM SYSTEM B. 2.4 2.5 09049 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: Primary status. Device type. Present average value. Present sensitivity selected. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). Present sensitivity selected. g. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). >paooD HEAT DETECTORS General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F. 1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single- mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens. 1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 28 3111-3 4/9/2010 KOTLIK SCHOOL HVAC UPGRADES SECTION 28 31 11 LOWER YUKON SCHOOL DISTRICT DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE- KOTLIK, ALASKA ALARM SYSTEM 2.6 DEVICE GUARDS A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection. it Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 09049 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections. 1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control equipment as necessary to extend existing control functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: ay Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture. Ro Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. 28 3111-4 4/9/2010 KOTLIK SCHOOL HVAC UPGRADES SECTION 28 31 11 LOWER YUKON SCHOOL DISTRICT DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE- KOTLIK, ALASKA ALARM SYSTEM 3.2 CONNECTIONS 1 Provide necessary hardware and programming to fully integrate new devices with 3.3 3.4 3.5 09049 existing system. 2. Provide necessary hardware and programming for the fire alarm control panel to initiate a shut-down of the HVAC equipment installed as part of this project. IDENTIFICATION Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit. GROUNDING Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter. b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 2: System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances. 28 3111-5 41912010 KOTLIK SCHOOL HVAC UPGRADES SECTION 28 31 11 LOWER YUKON SCHOOL DISTRICT DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE- KOTLIK, ALASKA ALARM SYSTEM F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. I Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. END OF SECTION 28 31 11 09049 28 3111-6 4/9/2010